Icom VE-PG4 RoIP Gateway Operating Guide

Operating Guide for ICOM models including: VE-PG4 RoIP Gateway, VE-PG4, RoIP Gateway, Gateway
ICOM VE-PG4 (02) PDF MANUAL - Manual-Hub.com
File Info : application/pdf, 423 Pages, 11.24MB
ICOM VE-PG4 (02)
OPERATING GUIDE

RoIP GATEWAY
VE-PG4

INTRODUCTION 1 TOP 2 INFORMAITON 3 NETWORK SETTINGS 4 ROUTER SETTINGS 5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS 6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER 7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS 8 DESTINATION SETTINGS 9 EXPERT SETTINGS
10 IP LINE SETTINGS 11 PBX 12 PBX TRANSCEIVER CALL SETTINGS 13 PBX EXTENSION 14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS 15 MANAGEMENT

https://manual-hub.com/

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing this Icom product. The VE-PG4 RoIP GATEWAY is designed and built with Icom's IP network technology. With proper care, this product should provide you with years of trouble-free operation.
L This document is described based on the VE-PG4 firmware version 1.11.
Icom is not responsible for the destruction, damage to, or performance of any Icom or non-Icom equipment, if the malfunction is because of: · Force majeure, including, but not limited to, fires, earthquakes, storms, floods, lightning, other natural
disasters, disturbances, riots, war, or radioactive contamination. · The use of Icom transceivers with any equipment that is not manufactured or approved by Icom. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. This document contains material protected under International and Domestic Copyright Laws and Treaties. Any unauthorized reprint or use of this material is prohibited. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system without express written permission from Icom Incorporated. All stated specifications and design are subject to change without notice or obligation. Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the United States, the United Kingdom, Germany, France, Spain, Russia, Australia, New Zealand, and/or other countries. AMBE+2 is a trademark of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other products or brands are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders.
 Voice coding technology
The AMBE+2TM voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to extract, remove, decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a humanreadable form. U.S. Patent Nos. #8,595,002, #8,359,197, #8,315,860, #8,200,497, #7,970,606, and #6,912,495 B2.
i
https://manual-hub.com/

INTRODUCTION
ABOUT THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE MANUAL
You can use the following manuals to understand and operate this RoIP Gateway. Precations (Comes with the RoIP Gateway) Instructions for the connections, initialization, and precautions. Installation guide (PDF type) Instructions for the system requirements, the system setup basics, maintenance, and the specifications. It can be downloaded from the Icom website. Operating guide (This manual, PDF type) The detailed references for the settings in the RoIP Gateway setting screen. It can be downloaded from the Icom website. Also refer to the manual for each device, that is connected to your system.
ii
https://manual-hub.com/

TOP

1 Section

TOP screen ........................................................................................................................... 1-2 M System Status .................................................................................................................. 1-2 M MAC Address .................................................................................................................. 1-2 M WAN Status ..................................................................................................................... 1-3 M LTE Status ..................................................................................................................... 1-3

1-1
https://manual-hub.com/

1 TOP
TOP screen
TOP
 System Status
Displays the firmware version, Date and Time, uptime, and memory usage.
L See "Transceiver Management" screen in this manual for details on the firmware version of each IP100H that is registered to the RoIP server. (Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Management)
TOP
 MAC Address
Displays the MAC Address (LAN/WAN.)
L The MAC address is the peculiar number that is assigned to a networking device. It is displayed in 12 hexadecimal (00-90-C7-XX-XX-XX).
L The MAC address is also printed on the label on the bottom of the RoIP gateway.
1-2
https://manual-hub.com/

1 TOP
TOP screen
TOP
 WAN Status
Displays the WAN connection status that is set on the "WAN" screen setting in the Router Settings menu. (Router Settings > WAN)

TOP
 LTE Status
Displays the LTE information, such as RSSI Level, if a nanoSIM card is installed.

1 2 3
4 5

1 Network Status 

Displays the type of the connected telephone line, "4G" or "3G."

2 RSSI Level 

Displays the approximate RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) level, "High," "Middle," "Low," or "Out of range."

3 Connection Status

Displays the status of the 4G/3G line connection, "Initializing," "Initialization failure," "Connecting," "Connected," or "Disconnected."

4 Last Access time to the Server

Displays the last accessed date and time to the transceiver controller. L The date and time in the list shows the received log from the transceiver
module.

5 Check the Server Connection Click <Check> to check the connection to the IP Transceiver controller.

1-3
https://manual-hub.com/

INFORMATION

2 Section

Network Status screen ............................................................................................................ 2-2 M Interface List..................................................................................................................... 2-2 M Ethernet Port Connection Status .......................................................................................... 2-2 M DHCP Lease Status ......................................................................................................... 2-2
SYSLOG screen ..................................................................................................................... 2-3 M SYSLOG ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
Bridge Status screen ............................................................................................................... 2-4 M Bridge Status .................................................................................................................. 2-4 M Port Connection Status ...................................................................................................... 2-5
PBX Status screen .................................................................................................................. 2-6 M Extension Group List ......................................................................................................... 2-6 M List of Extensions ............................................................................................................ 2-7
Call Log screen........................................................................................................................ 2-8 M Call Log........................................................................................................................... 2-8
Extension Status screen ............................................................................................................ 2-9 M Extension Status ............................................................................................................... 2-9
LTE Status screen ............................................................................................................... 2-10 M LTE Module Status ......................................................................................................... 2-10 M SIM Status .................................................................................................................. 2-10 M LTE Status .................................................................................................................. 2-11

2-1
https://manual-hub.com/

2 INFORMATION
Network Status screen
Information > Network Status
 Interface List
Displays the details of the Interface Setting. (Network Settings > Static Routing > Routing Table > Interface)
Information > Network Status
 Ethernet Port Connection Status
Displays the transfer speed and the transfer type for the Ethernet Port. This is an example setting the WAN connection type as [LAN Port].
TIP: · The RoIP Gateway's [LAN] ports are auto-negotiation enabled, and can automatically select the optimal
speed and duplex mode if the peer devices are auto-negotiation enabled as well. · We recommend that you always enable auto-negotiation on the peer devices.
If a peer device is fixed to full-duplex mode, auto-negotiation enabled devices (including the RoIP Gateway) may generally take it for half-duplex mode, and cannot communicate properly. Information > Network Status
 DHCP Lease Status
Displays the IP Address and Lease Time assigned to the connected devices.
2-2
https://manual-hub.com/

2 INFORMATION
SYSLOG screen
Information > SYSLOG
 SYSLOG
Displays the log of the RoIP Gateway.
1 2

3 45

1 Severity 
2 Display Filter  3 <Refresh>  4 <Save>  5 <Clear> 

Select one or more log types that you want to list. L Remove the check mark to hide the entries. L The selection is not stored, and will reset when you leave this screen.
Enter a keyword (for example: dhcp) and select "Include" or "Exclude" to narrow down the list.
Click to reload the list. Up to the last 1000 logs are listed.
Click to save a log to a text (.txt) file.
Click to clear all the logs.

2-3
https://manual-hub.com/

2 INFORMATION
Bridge Status screen
Information > Bridge Status
 Bridge Status
Displays the bridge connection status list, if a bridge destination network address is set. (See also section 5 in this manual for the Bridge Connection.) L The Transceiver Controller is set to each port by default.
(This is only an example.)
2-4
https://manual-hub.com/

2 INFORMATION
Bridge Status screen
Information > Bridge Status
 Port Connection Status
Displays the connection status of each port.
(This is only an example.) · RoIP Gateway 1 ~ 8 displays the status of the RoIP Gateway Connection settings.
(Connection Port Settings > RoIP Gateway > RoIP Gateway Connection) · Converter Bridge 1 ~ 20 displays the status of the Connection settings.
(PBX Extension > Converter Bridge > Connection) · Voice Protocol and the AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment display the status of the AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment
settings. (Bridge Connection Setting > Bridge Connection > AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment)
2-5
https://manual-hub.com/

2 INFORMATION

PBX Status screen
Information > PBX Status
 Extension Group List
Displays the Extension Group List status.

1

2

3

4

1 Extensions not Belonging to a Group 
2 Extension Group Number  3 Extensions  4 Setting for Extension
Prioritization 

Displays the Extension Numbers that do not belong to any Extension Group. Displays the Extension Group Number and its Group Name. Displays the Extension Numbers that belongs to the Extension Group.
Displays the prior extensions to receive a call from the Extension Group Number (2).

2-6
https://manual-hub.com/

2 INFORMATION

PBX Status screen
Information > PBX Status
 List of Extensions
Displays the Extension settings.

1
(This is only an example.) 1 Extension Number 2 Extension Group Number
3 Port Type  4 Dial-in number  5 Automatic Acquisition
Line Number  6 Connection from WAN  7 MAC Address  8 IP Address 

2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Displays the Extension number and the name. (PBX > Extension > Extension)
Displays the Extension Group number. L Displays "No Extension Representative" when the Extension Numbers that
do not belong to any Extension Group make a call.
Displays the port type of the extension.
Displays the dial-in number, if entered.
Displays whether or not to automatically acquire a specific telephone line.
Displays whether or not to allow connecting the Extension number from the WAN.
Displays the MAC address of the extension.
Displays IP Address used by the extension. · Displays "Disconnected" when the extension does not connect to the
RoIP Gateway. · Displays "-" when you connect to the Transceiver Controller Telephone
Connection or the Converter Bridge.

2-7
https://manual-hub.com/

2 INFORMATION
Call Log screen
Information > Call Log
 Call Log
Lists the log of the Bridge connection to the RoIP gateway and the telephone communication. 1 23

1 <Refresh>  2 <Save>  3 <Clear> 

Click to reload the list. Up to the last 1000 logs are listed. Click to save a log to a text (.txt) file. Click to delete all the logs.

2-8
https://manual-hub.com/

2 INFORMATION

Extension Status screen
Information > Extension Status
 Extension Status
Displays the status of the Extension. (PBX > Extension > Extension)

1

2

3

4

5

6

1 Name  2 Extension Number 3 Port Type  4 Version  5 IP Address  6 Presence 

Displays the Extension number and the name assigned to Extension settings. (PBX > Extension > Extension)

Displays the extension number assigned to Extension. (PBX > Extension > Extension)

Displays the port type of the extension assigned to Extension settings. (PBX > Extension > Extension).

Displays the Firmware information for VoIP Expansion.
L Displayed when a SIP phone is displayed to only the Port Type Setting(3).

Displays the IP Address used by VoIP Expansion.
L Displayed when a SIP phone is displayed to only the Port Type Setting(3).

Displays the status of the VoIP Expansion.

· Offline:

Not registered.

· Online*:

Registered.

· On the phone*: Calling or holding.

· Step out*:

Call forwarding except for the transceivers.

*Online, On the phone, and Step out is displayed when successfully registered.

L Displayed when a SIP phone is displayed to only the Port Type Setting(3).

2-9
https://manual-hub.com/

2 INFORMATION

LTE Status screen
Information > LTE Status
 LTE Module Status
Displays the information of the LTE communication module.

1 2
1 Version  2 IMEI 

Displays the version of the LTE communication module.
Displays the communication module's IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identifier.)

Information > LTE Status
 SIM Status
Displays the information of the SIM.

1 2 3
1 Active SIM Slot  2 ICCID 
3 Phone Number 

Displays the SIM slot number in use.
Displays the ICCID (IC Card IDentifier) of the installed SIM card. L Displayed when information of Active SIM Slot Setting (1) can be acquired.
Displays the telephone number of the SIM card. L Displayed when information of Active SIM Slot Setting (1) can be acquired.

2-10
https://manual-hub.com/

2 INFORMATION

LTE Status screen
Information > LTE Status
 LTE Status
Displays the information of the LTE line if installed and valid.

1 2 3 4
1 Network Status  2 RSSI Level 
3 Connection Status
4 Last Access time to the Server 

Displays the type of the connected telephone line, "4G" or "3G."
Displays the approximate RSSI level, "High," "Middle," "Low," or "Out of range."
Displays the status of the 4G/3G line connection, "Initializing," "Initialization failure," "Connecting," "Connected," or "Disconnected."
Displays the last accessed date and time to the IP transceiver controller. L The date and time in the list displayed here are acquired from the transceiver
module.

2-11
https://manual-hub.com/

NETWORK SETTINGS

3 Section

IP Address screen .................................................................................................................. 3-2 M Host Name ..................................................................................................................... 3-2 M IP Address ..................................................................................................................... 3-3
DHCP Server screen ............................................................................................................... 3-4 M DHCP Server .................................................................................................................. 3-4 M Static DHCP ..................................................................................................................... 3-7 M List of Static DHCP Settings ................................................................................................ 3-7
Static Routing Screen ............................................................................................................... 3-8 M Routing Table .................................................................................................................. 3-8 M Static Routing .................................................................................................................. 3-9 M List of Static Routing Entries ................................................................................................ 3-9
Policy Routing screen ............................................................................................................ 3-10 M Source Address Routing ................................................................................................ 3-10 M List of Source Address Routing Entries .............................................................................. 3-10

3-1
https://manual-hub.com/

3 NETWORK SETTINGS
IP Address screen
Network Settings > IP Address
 Host Name
Enter the host name.

Host Name 

Enter a host name of up to 31 characters.

(Default: VE-PG4)

When the RoIP Gateway connects to Telnet/SSH, this host name is

displayed.

L The usable characters are: "a" ~ "z", "A" ~ "Z", "0" ~ "9", and "-."

L The name must start with an alphanumeric character, and must NOT start or

end with a "."

3-2
https://manual-hub.com/

3 NETWORK SETTINGS

IP Address screen
Network Settings > IP Address
 IP Address
Enter the VE-PG4's IP Address.

1 2 3 4 5
1 IP Address 
2 Subnet Mask 
3 Default Gateway 
4 Primary DNS Server 
5 Secondary DNS Server 
6 <Apply>  7 <Reset> 

6 7
Enter the LAN IP address according to your network environment. (Default: 192.168.0.1)
L When using the DHCP Server function, the network part of the IP address must be the same as that set in the "IP Pool Start Address" item in the [DHCP Server] menu.
Enter the subnet mask according to your network environment. (Default: 255.255.255.0)
If a default gateway device, such as a router, is connected to the LAN port, enter the device's IP address.
Enter the DNS server address specified by your service provider. If you have two DNS server addresses, enter the primary address.
If you have two DNS server addresses, enter the secondary DNS server address.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

3-3
https://manual-hub.com/

3 NETWORK SETTINGS

DHCP Server screen
Network Settings > DHCP Server
 DHCP Server
Configure the DHCP Server function.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 DHCP Server  2 IP Pool Start Address  3 Pool Size 
4 Subnet Mask  5 Lease Time  6 Domain Name  7 Default Gateway 

Select "Enable" to use the DHCP Server function. (Default: Disable)
The DHCP Sever is activated, depending on the IP Pool Start Address (2) and Pool Size (3) items.

Enter the IP Pool Start address.

(Default: 192.168.0.10)

An IP address is automatically assigned to a transceiver that the RoIP

Gateway connects to, from this IP Pool Start address.

Entry the number of an IP address that can be automatically assigned. (Default: 30)
Up to 128 addresses can be automatically assigned by the DHCP server function. Another 32 addresses can be manually assigned.

Enter the subnet mask for the IP Pool Start address set in the "IP Pool

Start Address" (2).

(Default: 255.255.255.0)

Enter the lease time period. Range: 1 ~ 9999 (hours)

(Default: 72)

Enter a network address domain name of up to 253 characters.

Enter the default gateway IP address. When the DHCP Server function is used, this IP address is sent to a client. L When this item is blank, the RoIP Gateway's IP address is sent.

3-4
https://manual-hub.com/

3 NETWORK SETTINGS

DHCP Server screen
Network Settings > DHCP Server  DHCP Server

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15 16

The screen above shows when "DNS Proxy" (8) is set to "Disable."

8 DNS Proxy  9 Primary DNS Server  10 Secondary DNS Server  11 Primary WINS Server  12 Secondary WINS Server 

Selects whether or not to use a DNS proxy.

(Default: Enable)

When this option is set to "Enable," the terminals can assign the RoIP

Gateway as the DNS server.

(Displayed only when the DNS Proxy (8) is disabled) Enter the DNS server address specified by your service provider. If you have two DNS server addresses, enter the primary address.

(Displayed only when the DNS Proxy (8) is disabled) If you have two DNS server addresses, enter the secondary DNS server address.

Enter the WINS server's address. If you have two WINS server addresses, enter the primary address.

If you have two WINS server addresses, enter the WINS server's secondary address.

3-5
https://manual-hub.com/

3 NETWORK SETTINGS

DHCP Server screen
Network Settings > DHCP Server  DHCP Server

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15 16

The screen above shows when "DNS Proxy" (8) is set to "Disable."

13 TFTP Server Distribution 
14 TFTP Server Address  15 <Apply>  16 <Reset> 

Set to "Enable" to use a provisioning KX Series telephone. (Default: Enable)
When this option is enabled, the telephone automatically reads the setting from the RoIP Gateway and sets up by itself. L The telephone's MAC address must be entered on the "Extension" screen. L When using this system with static IP addresses, see also Section 4 in the
Installation guide.
Enter the IP address of the TFTP server for the KX series telephone. If this item is blank, the RoIP Gateway works as theTFTP server.
(Default: Blank)
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

3-6
https://manual-hub.com/

3 NETWORK SETTINGS
DHCP Server screen
Network Settings > DHCP Server
 Static DHCP
Enter the MAC and static IP addresses of the DHCP server. L You can enter up to 32 entries.

Static DHCP 

Enter the MAC and IP addresses, and then click <Add>. L This setting is useful when the DHCP Server function is used. See page 3-4
for details of the DHCP Server function. L Sets a different IP address from the IP address that the DHCP Server
function automatically assigns. L Make sure that the addresses of the devices on the network do not overlap
or conflict. If a DHCP server is already connected to the network, and there is an address conflict, a network problem will occur.

 List of Static DHCP Settings
Displays the static DHCP entries.

<Delete> 

Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.

3-7
https://manual-hub.com/

3 NETWORK SETTINGS

Static Routing Screen
Network Settings > Static Routing
 Routing Table
Displays the valid routing information for packet transmission.

1

2

3

4

1 Destination  2 Subnet Mask  3 Gateway  4 Interface 

The network address of the route's destination network.

The subnet mask of the route's destination network.

The route's gateway address.

The routing interface.

· br-lan:

LAN

· eth0:

WAN

· ppp0 ~ ppp7: PPPoE (WAN)

· vti0 ~ vti 31: IPsec Tunnel

3-8
https://manual-hub.com/

3 NETWORK SETTINGS

Static Routing Screen
Network Settings > Static Routing
 Static Routing
Enter the static routing destinations. L You can enter up to 32 entries.

1

2

3

4

5

1 Destination  2 Subnet Mask  3 Gateway  4 Interface 
5 <Add> 

The network address of the route's destination network.
The subnet mask of the route's destination network.
(Only when the Interface (4) is set to "Set the gateway") Set the route's gateway address.
The routing interface. · Set the gateway · ppp0 (WAN01) ~ ppp7 (WAN08) · vti0 ~ vti 31
Click to add the entry. The entry that is registered in the [List of Static Routing Entries] is displayed.

 List of Static Routing Entries
Displays the static routing destinations. L You can enter up to 32 entries.

12

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 

Click to edit the entry.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.

3-9
https://manual-hub.com/

3 NETWORK SETTINGS

Policy Routing screen
Network Settings > Policy Routing
 Source Address Routing
Enter the packet source routing from the specified network address of the source terminal (such as a PC.) L You can enter up to 32 entries.

1

2

3

4

5

1 Source Address  2 Subnet Mask  3 Gateway  4 Interface 
5 <Add> 

Set the network address of the source terminal.
Set the subnet mask of the source network address.
(Only when the Interface (4) is set to "Set the gateway") Set the route's gateway address.
The routing target interface from: · Set the gateway · ppp0 (WAN01) ~ ppp7 (WAN08) · vti0 ~ vti31
Click to add the entry. The entry that is registered in the [List of Source Address Routing Entries] is displayed.

 List of Source Address Routing Entries
Displays the entered packet source routing settings.

1 2

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 

Click to edit the entry.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.

3-10
https://manual-hub.com/

ROUTER SETTINGS

4 Section

WAN screen ........................................................................................................................... 4-2 M Connection Status ............................................................................................................ 4-2 M Connection Type ............................................................................................................... 4-6 M Connection Settings ......................................................................................................... 4-7 M List of Connection Settings ............................................................................................. 4-12
NAT screen ........................................................................................................................ 4-13 M NAT ........................................................................................................................... 4-13 M DMZ Host ..................................................................................................................... 4-13 M Port Forwarding ............................................................................................................ 4-14 M List of Port Forwarding Entries .......................................................................................... 4-15
IP Filter screen ..................................................................................................................... 4-16 M General Settings ............................................................................................................ 4-16 M IP Filter ........................................................................................................................ 4-17 M List of IP Filter Entries ................................................................................................... 4-22
Simple DNS screen ............................................................................................................... 4-23 M Simple DNS Server Setting ............................................................................................. 4-23 M List of Simple DNS Server Settings .................................................................................... 4-23
VPN screen ........................................................................................................................ 4-24 M IPsec Settings ............................................................................................................... 4-24 M IPsec Tunnel Settings...................................................................................................... 4-25 M List of IPsec Tunnel Settings ............................................................................................. 4-27

4-1
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

WAN screen
Router Settings > WAN
 Connection Status
(When "Connection Type" is set to "LAN port") The WAN connection status is displayed.

1 2 3 4 5

1 Connection Status 2 Connection Type  3 IP Address  4 Peer IP Address  5 DNS Server 

Nothing is displayed. The WAN connection type is displayed. Nothing is displayed. Nothing is displayed. Nothing is displayed.

4-2
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

WAN screen
Router Settings > WAN  Connection Status (When "Connection Type" is set to "DHCP Client") The WAN connection status is displayed.

1 2 3 4 5

1 Connection Status
2 Connection Type  3 IP Address  4 Peer IP Address 
5 DNS Server 

The connection status to the Internet line is displayed as "Unplugged," "Connecting," or "Connected."
The WAN connection type is displayed.
The RoIP Gateway's IP address is displayed.
The default Gateway IP address specified by your service provider is displayed.
The DNS server's IP address is displayed.

4-3
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

WAN screen
Router Settings > WAN  Connection Status (When "Connection Type" is set to "Static IP") The WAN connection status is displayed.

1 2 3 4 5

1 Connection Status
2 Connection Type  3 IP Address  4 Peer IP Address 
5 DNS Server 

The connection status to the Internet line is displayed as "Unplugged," or "Connected."
The WAN connection type is displayed.
The RoIP Gateway's IP address is displayed.
The default Gateway IP address specified by your service provider is displayed.
The DNS server's IP address is displayed.

4-4
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

WAN screen
Router Settings > WAN
 Connection Status
(When "Connection Type" is set to "PPPoE") The WAN connection status is displayed. L Up to 2 PPPoE sessions can be connected from the registered PPPoE destination. L The first session is set to the default gateway. L To use a second session, set the Static Routing and the Policy Routing.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 PPPoE Session  2 Destination 
3 Connection Status 4 Connection Type  5 IP Address  6 Peer IP Address  7 DNS Server  8 Uptime 

The first session and the second session are displayed respectively.
Select the destination from the WAN connection set in the [Connection Settings" setting (Router Settings > WAN > Connection Settings). L You cannot select while connecting the line. <Connect>/<Disconnect> Click to manually connect or disconnect the selected WAN. L <Disconnect> is displayed when the line is connected. L If "Connecting" is not displayed in [Connection Status] when the line is
connected, check the cable connection and network configuration.
The connection status to the Internet line is displayed as "Unplugged," "Disconnect," "Connecting," or "Connected."
The WAN connection type is displayed.
The RoIP Gateway's IP address is displayed.
The default Gateway IP address specified by your service provider is displayed.
The DNS server's IP address is displayed.
The elapsed time the RoIP Gateway has been connected to the network is displayed.

4-5
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS
WAN screen
Router Settings > WAN
 Connection Type
WAN/LAN port settings.

Connection Type 

Select the WAN connection type as specified by your service provider. (Default: LAN Port)

· LAN Port: Switching the [LAN] port to connect to other devices.

· DHCP Client: The WAN IP address is automatically obtained by a DHCP server.

· Static IP: The WAN IP address is specified by your service provider.

· PPPoE:

The WAN IP address is specified by your service provider using the PPPoE method.

4-6
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

WAN screen
Router Settings > WAN
 Connection Settings
(When "Connection Type" is set to "DHCP Client") Set the WAN.
1 2 3

4 5

1 Nickname  2 Primary DNS Server 
3 Secondary DNS Server 
4 <Apply>  5 <Reset> 

Enter your service provider's name of up to 31 characters.
Enter the DNS server address specified by your service provider. If you have two DNS server addresses, enter the primary address.
If you have two DNS server addresses, enter the secondary DNS server address.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

4-7
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

WAN screen
Router Settings > WAN
 Connection Settings (When "Connection Type" is set to "Static IP") Set the WAN.
1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8

1 Nickname  2 IP Address  3 Subnet Mask  4 Default Gateway  5 Primary DNS Server 
6 Secondary DNS Server 
7 <Apply>  8 <Reset> 

Enter your service provider's name of up to 31 characters.
Enter the WAN IP address.
Enter the WAN Subnet Mask
Enter the WAN Default Gateway.
Enter the DNS server address specified by your service provider. If you have two DNS server addresses, enter the primary address.
If you have two DNS server addresses, enter the secondary DNS server address.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

4-8
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

WAN screen
Router Settings > WAN  Connection Settings (When "Connection Type" is set to "PPPoE") Set the WAN.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11 12

1 Select Connection  2 Nickname  3 User Name  4 Password  5 Reconnect Mode 

Select the WAN connection. (Up to 8 settings can be set.) (Default: WAN01(ppp0))

Enter or edit your service provider's name of up to 31 characters. L The nickname set in [Select Connection] is displayed.

Enter the login user name or the account name.

Enter a login password. The entered characters are displayed as * (asterisk) or  (black circle.)

Select the PPPoE connection method.

(Default: Always-ON)

· Manual: The PPPoE line can be manually connected, by clicking <Connect>/<Disconnect>
L The network is disconnected, when the RoIP Gateway is booted.

· Always-ON: The PPPoE line is always connected to the destination set in the [Select Connection].
L The network is already connected when the RoIP Gateway is booted. L You can manually connect or disconnect by clicking <Connect> or
<Disconnect> in the "Connection Status" setting (Router Settings > WAN > Connection Status).

4-9
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

WAN screen
Router Settings > WAN  Connection Settings (When "Connection Type" is set to "PPPoE")

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11 12

6 IP Address  7 Primary DNS Server  8 Secondary DNS Server  9 Authentication Protocol 

Enter the WAN IP address only if it is specified by your service provider.

Enter the DNS server address specified by your service provider. If you have two DNS server addresses, enter the primary address.

If you have two DNS server addresses, enter the secondary DNS server address.

Enter the authentication protocol specified by your service provider.

Select "Automatic" if not specified.

(Default: Automatic)

· Automatic: Change PAP/CHAP automatically according to the destination's request.

· PAP:

Use a password for the authentication. Note that the password is not encrypted.

· CHAP: The authentication information is encrypted. It is more secure than PAP.

4-10
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

WAN screen
Router Settings > WAN  Connection Settings (When "Connection Type" is set to "PPPoE")

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11 12

10 MSS Limit
11 <Apply>  12 <Reset> 

Enter the MSS Limit, if specified by your service provider. (Default: 1322) · Range: 536 ~ 1452 (byte)
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

4-11
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS
WAN screen
Router Settings > WAN
 List of Connection Settings
(When "Connection Type" is set to "PPPoE") Lists the connection destinations registered in "Connecting Settings". (Router Settings > WAN > Connection Settings)

<Delete> 

Click to delete an entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.

4-12
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS
NAT screen
Router Settings > NAT
 NAT
Set the NAT. L This function cannot be used when "LAN port" is selected in "Connection Type."

NAT 

Select "Enable" to use the NAT function.

(Default: Enable)

The NAT function converts the WAN global address into a private address.

Router Settings > NAT
 DMZ Host
Set the DMZ Host function. L This function cannot be used when "LAN port" is selected in "Connection Type."

1

23

1 DMZ Host IP Address 
2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

Enter the DMZ Host IP address. The DMZ Host function (DeMilitarized Zone) transfers an unknown IP frame from the WAN (Internet) to the specified IP address on the LAN. But you need to pay attention because it also decreases the security of the IP address, which is specified as the transfer destination. L When the DMZ Host function and Port Forwarding are used at the same
time, Port Forwarding is prioritized. L Icom is not responsible for any results caused by a decline in security.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

4-13
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

NAT screen
Router Settings > NAT
 Port Forwarding
The Port Forwarding function forwards the packets from a masquerade IP (Router Global IP) address to a private IP address.

1

2

3

4

5

1 WAN Port 
2 LAN IP Address  3 LAN Port 
4 Protocol  5 <Add> 

Select "Custom" if you select the WAN port by its number. If you don't select the port by number, select the port by the mnemonic (DNS, Finger, FTP, Gopher, NEWS, POP3, SMTP, Telnet, Web, or Whois).
Enter the private IP address.
Select "Custom" if you select the LAN port by its number. If you don't select the port by number, select the port by the mnemonic (DNS, Finger, FTP, Gopher, NEWS, POP3, SMTP, Telnet, Web, or Whois).
Select the protocol from "TCP," "UDP," "TCP/UDP," "GRE," and "ESP."
Click to add the entry. L Up to 32 masquerade IP addresses can be registered.

4-14
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS
NAT screen
Router Settings > NAT
 List of Port Forwarding Entries
Lists the Port Forwarding Entries.

1 2

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 

Click to edit the entry. L The registered entries are displayed in [Port Forwarding].
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.

4-15
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

IP Filter screen
Router Settings > IP Filter
 General Settings
The settings to pass or block the packets that match the registered filtering settings. L When [LAN Port] is set in Connection type, this setting cannot be changed. L Icom is not responsible for any results caused by a decline in security due to changing the IP filter.

1

2

3 4

1 Block Action 

Select the operation when blocking the packet.

(Default: Drop)

· Drop: Dropping the packet without any response.

· Reject: Sending the denied packet.

2 Syslogging Unmatched Packets



Select whether or not to log the packets started from the WAN and

blocked due to not matching any IP filter.

(Default: Disable)

L Processing a large number of logs may decrease the processing speed.

3 <Apply> 

Click to apply the settings.

4 <Reset> 

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

4-16
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

IP Filter screen
Router Settings > IP Filter
 IP Filter
The settings to pass or block the packets that match the registered filtering settings. L When [LAN Port] is set in Connection type, this setting cannot be changed. L Icom is not responsible for any results caused by a decline in security due to changing the IP filter.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8

9

10

11

12 13

L This is an example of setting "TCP" as the protocol.

1 No.  2 Entry 

Select the filtering order.

· Range: 1 ~ 64

(Default: 1)

L The number registered in [List of IP Filter Entries] cannot be selected.

The filter function checks the packets in the selected order according to

the filter setting in [list of IP Filter Entries].

Select "Enable" to apply the filter setting.

(Default: Enable)

Select "Disable" in the unused filter entry.

If the filter is registered in "Disable," (OFF) is displayed in [No.] of [List of

IP Filter Entries].

L This is an example when number "1" is disabled.

3 Action 

Select the filtering method.

(Default: Pass)

· Block: Blocks all packets that match the filtering settings.

· Pass: Passes all packets that match the filtering settings.

4-17
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

IP Filter screen
Router Settings > IP Filter  IP Filter

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12 13

L This is an example of setting "TCP" as the protocol.

4 Direction  5 Source IP Address 6 Destination IP Address  7 Protocol 

Set the filtering direction.

(Default: In)

· In: Filters the incoming packets from the WAN interfaces.

· Out: Filters the outgoing packets to the WAN interfaces.

Enter the source IP address (and mask) to filter. All the packets sent from the entered IP address are filtered (blocked or passed.) · Mask range: 1 ~ 32

Enter the destination IP address (and mask) to filter. All the packets sent to the entered IP address are filtered (blocked or passed). · Mask range: 1 ~ 32

Select the transport layer protocol of the packet targeted to be filtered. (Default: Any)

· Any: All protocols.

· TCP: Only TCP. Enter [Source Port], [Destination Port], and [TCP Flags].

· UDP: Only UDP. Enter [Source Port] and [Destination Port].

4-18
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

IP Filter screen
Router Settings > IP Filter  IP Filter

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12 13

L This is an example of setting "TCP" as the protocol.

7 Protocol (Continued) 

· TCP/UDP: TCP and UDP. Enter [Source Port] and [Destination Port].

· ICMP:

Only ICMP. Enter [Type] and [Code].

[Type] Enter the type of ICMP header to filter between 0 and 255. L When the type is not specified, all header types are filtered.

[Code] Enter the type of ICMP code to filter between 0 and 255. L When the type is not specified, all code types are filtered.

· IGMP: Only IGMP.

· Custom:

Specified by the potocol number. Enter the upper IP layer protocol number into the [Cunstom Value]. Range: 0 ~255

4-19
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

IP Filter screen
Router Settings > IP Filter  IP Filter

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12 13

L This is an example of setting "TCP" as the protocol.

8 Source Port  9 Destination Port 

Specify the source port, or enter the TCP/UDP source port number. (Default: Any)
There are 2 ways to specify the port number. · Specifying by number 1. Select "Custom." 2. Enter the custom port number in "Custom Value:[(Start)] - [(End)]."
When you use a specific port, enter only the "[(Start)]", or enter the same number in both the "[(Start)]" and the "[(End)]." Port number range: 1 ~ 65535
· Specifying by mnemonic Select a source port other than "Any" or "Custom." "DNS," "Finger," "FTP," "Gopher," "NEWS," "POP3," "SMTP," "Telnet," "Web," "Whois" are selectable. L When "Any" is selected, all of the port number types are filtered.
Select the destination port, or enter the TCP/UDP destination port number. (Default: Any)
There are 2 ways to specify the port number. · Specifying by number 1. Select "Custom." 2. Enter the custom port number in "Custom Value:[(Start)] - [(End)]."
When you use a specific port, enter only the "[(Start)]", or enter the same number in both the "[(Start)]" and the "[(End)]." Port number range: 1 ~ 65535
· Specifying by mnemonic Select a source port other than "Any" or "Custom." "DNS," "Finger," "FTP," "Gopher," "NEWS," "POP3," "SMTP," "Telnet," "Web," "Whois" are selectable. L When "Any" is selected, all of the port number types are filtered.

4-20

https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS
IP Filter screen
Router Settings > IP Filter
 IP Filter
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

12 13

10 TCP Flags

Select the TCP flags.

(Default: None)

You can select the TCP flags from "URG," "ACK," "PSH," "RST," "SYN,"

and "FIN."

L The selected flag's first character is displayed in [List of IP Filter Entries].

(Example: RST is selected)

11 SYSLOG 
12 <Apply>  13 <Reset> 

L When "None" is selected, the packet is filtered regardless of the TCP flags.

Select "Enable" to output the SYSLOG.

(Default: Disable)

L The log information is displayed on the SYSLOG screen.

(Information > SYSLOG)

L Processing a large number of logs may decrease the processing speed.

Do not use this function except for the operation check and the test

operation to ensure the call quality.

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

4-21
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS
IP Filter screen
Router Settings > IP Filter
 List of IP Filter Entries
Lists the IP filter entries registered in [IP filter] setting.

1 2

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 

Click to edit the entry. L The entry contents are loaded to the IP Filter Setting.

Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.

About the default IP filter packets

· No. 59-64:

These filtering conditions prevent the Windows applications

from the remote access and leaking information caused by

the File Sharing.

L The * mark matches all values.

4-22
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS
Simple DNS screen
Router Settings > Simple DNS
 Simple DNS Server Setting
The settings to use the RoIP Gateway as a simple DNS server.
Enter the combination of the terminal host name and the IP address corresponding to the host and click <Add>. When the combination is registered, the RoIP Gateway can respond to both DNS forward lookup and DNS reverse lookup. L Up to 32 combinations can be registered. L This setting is effective when using the DNS proxy response function of the RoIP Gateway. L We recommend that you use a static DHCP server to fix the combination of the MAC address and the IP address when
registering the local IP address and its host name. L If you register "Host Name.Domain Name" as the host name, the RoIP Gateway can respond to the request, even if
only the host name matches.
Router Settings > Simple DNS
 List of Simple DNS Server Settings
Lists the simple DNS Server entries. Click <Delete> to delete the entry.
4-23
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

VPN screen
Router Settings > VPN
 IPsec Settings
Set the virtual private network (VPN) connection using the IPsec protocol.

1

2 3

1 IPsec 
2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

Set the IPsec function.

(Default: Disable)

When "Enable" is set, a VPN connection using the IPsec tunnel can be

used.

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

4-24
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

VPN screen
Router Settings > VPN
 IPsec Tunnel Settings
Set the virtual private network (VPN) connection using the IPsec tunnel.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

1 Tunnel Interface  2 Tunnel  3 Tunnel Name  4 Interface 
5 Authentication Key (Pre-Shared Key) 
6 Remote Address 

Specifying the interface to register the IPsec tunnel. Range: vti0 ~ vti31
Select "Enable" to use the IPsec tunnel to register. (Default: Enable) Select "Disable" when it is registered but not used.
Enter the name to identify the IPsec tunnel of up to 31 characters.
Select the interface to connect with Remote Address. (Default: eth0)
· eth0 Select this interface when "Static IP" or "DHCP client" is set in the "Connection Type" setting (Router Settings > WAN > Connection Type).
· ppp0(WAN01) ~ ppp7(WAN08) Select this interface when "PPPoE(WAN01 ~ WAN08)" is set in the "Connection Type" setting (Router Settings > WAN > Connection Type).
L "WAN01 ~ WAN08" are the nicknames.
To authenticate the VPN Remote peer, enter the same character strings as the connected device of up to 128 alphanumeric characters.
Enter the IP address or the host name of the VPN connection destination. When the IP address or the host name is entered, the RoIP Gateway initiates a VPN connection to the connected device. L If this item is not set, the RoIP Gateway only works as a responder that waits
for a connection from other devices.

4-25
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

VPN screen
Router Settings > VPN
 IPsec Tunnel Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10

7 Remote ID 
8 Local ID 
9 <Apply>  10 <Reset> 

Set the ID to identify the connected device. Select the IP type from "IP Address," "KEYID," "FQDN," or "USER-FQDN."
(Default: IP Address) IP Address: IP address format KEYID: Up to 256 alphanumeric characters FQDN: Domain name up to 253 characters USER-FQDN: Mail address format up to 254 characters Example: user@xxxx.yyyy.zzzz

1.

2.

1. Up to 64 characters 2. Up to 63 characters for each part

Set the ID to identify the local device.

Select the IP type from "IP Address," "KEYID," "FQDN," or "USER-FQDN."

(Default: IP Address)

· IP Address: IP address format

· KEYID:

Up to 256 alphanumeric characters

· FQDN:

Domain name up to 253 characters

· USER-FQDN: Mail address format up to 254 characters

Example: user@xxxx.yyyy.zzzz

1.

2.

1. Up to 64 characters 2. Up to 63 characters for each part

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

4-26
https://manual-hub.com/

4 ROUTER SETTINGS

VPN screen
Router Settings > VPN
 List of IPsec Tunnel Settings
Lists the connections settings.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8

1 Tunnel Interface  2 Interface  3 Status 
4 Remote Address 
5 Remote ID  6 Local ID  7 <Edit>  8 <Delete> 

The interface name (tunnel name) is displayed.

The interface name of the tunnel source is displayed.

The IPsec tunnel status is displayed.

· Connected:

Connected.

· Waiting:

Connection ready.

· Connecting:

Connection in progress.

· Disable:

IPsec is enable but Tunnel Setting is disable.

· IPsec is Disabled: The RoIP Gateway's IPsec function is disabled.

The IP address set as the connection destination or the host name is displayed. "-" is displayed when this item is not set in a Responder. The destination IP address is displayed while connecting. L When a VPN connection is made while the Responder function is ON, the
Remote Address is displayed in parentheses, as in (172.16.***.***).

The peer ID is displayed.

The local ID is displayed.

Click to edit the entry.

Click to delete the entry. L You cannnot restore after clicking <Delete>.

4-27
https://manual-hub.com/

BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

5 Section

Bridge Connection screen ......................................................................................................... 5-2 M Bridge Connection ............................................................................................................ 5-2 M Bridge Connection Entry List (For Combination) .................................................................. 5-11 M Bridge Connection Entry List (For Custom Bridge Connection) ............................................................ 5-12 M AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment .......................................................................................... 5-13
SelCall in Bridge Connection screen.......................................................................................... 5-15 M Save or Write the Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge Connection ............................................. 5-15 M Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge Connection ..................................................................... 5-16 M List of Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge Connection ............................................................ 5-17

5-1
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection
 Bridge Connection
Sets the transceiver port bridge connection combination. L The transceiver port assigned as a bridge connection source or a destination is no longer usable as a call
destination. L The EXT 1 and MIC ports are not usable at the same time. The EXT 1 port is disabled while a microphone is connected
to the MIC port on the front panel.
Unicast mode

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Custom Bridge Connection." Multicast mode
3

8

9 10

1

2

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2)."

1 Bridge Connection Source

Select the port for the bridge connection.

2 Bridge connection Destination

Select the destination port for the bridge connection. L Only the ports that can be connected to the source port (1) are listed in this
setting.

NOTE: When you set a combination of a Digital Transceiver and an analog transceiver (EXT(I/O) Port,) enter [AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment] settings below on the same screen.

5-2
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection  Bridge Connection
Unicast mode

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Custom Bridge Connection." Multicast mode

1 2 3

8

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2)."

3 Transmission Mode  4 SelCall in Bridge Connection

Set the transmission mode for Bridge Connection with the RoIP Gateway by either Unicast or Multicast.
Set whether or not you can make an Individual call to a device that is connected to the same network as this RoIP Gateway.
(Default: Disable) L If this setting is enabled, The RoIP Gateway connects to the destination
device according to the List of Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge Connection. (Bridge Connection Setttings > SelCall in Bridge Connection > List of Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge Connection) L This setting is displayed when the combination of Digital Transceiver (D-TRX1 ~ 4) and the Custom Bridge Connection are set.

5-3
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection  Bridge Connection
Unicast mode

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Custom Bridge Connection." Multicast mode

1 2 3

8

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2)."

5 Destination Address 

Set the IP address as follows. L When "Enable" is selected in the SelCall in Bridge Connection (4), this item
is not displayed.

· When the Transmission mode is "Unicast": Enter a Destination Address, or its domain name of up to 63 characters.

· When the Transmission mode is "Multicast": Enter the same multicast address as the setting in the Bridge Connection Destination. The settable range: 244.0.0.0 ~ 239.255.255.255 (Default: 239.255.255.1)

5-4
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection  Bridge Connection
Unicast mode

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Custom Bridge Connection." Multicast mode

1 2 3

8

9 10

6 Destination Port Number 

Set the same port number as the Source Port Number (7). · Range: An even number from 1024 to 65534. L Do not duplicate other connection port settings. L When "Enable" is selected in the SelCall in Bridge Connection (4), this item
is not displayed.

 The Default port settings in the Unicast mode

Options Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1) Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2) Digital Transceiver 3 (D-TRX3) Digital Transceiver 4 (D-TRX4) EXT Input 1 (EXT1) / EXT I/O 1 (EXT1) EXT Output 1 (EXT1) EXT Input 2 (EXT2) / EXT I/O 2 (EXT2) EXT Output 2 (EXT2) EXT Input 3 (EXT3) / EXT I/O 3 (EXT3) EXT Output 3 (EXT3) EXT Input 4 (EXT4) / EXT I/O 4 (EXT4)

Default 23000 23002 23004 23006 23100 23102 23104 23106 23108 23110 23112

Options EXT Output 4(EXT4) Emergency Notification Microphone (MIC) RoIP Gateway1 RoIP Gateway2 RoIP Gateway3 RoIP Gateway4 RoIP Gateway5 RoIP Gateway6 RoIP Gateway7 RoIP Gateway8

Default 23114 23116 23150 24300 24302 24304 24306 24308 24310 24312 24314

5-5
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection  Bridge Connection
Unicast mode

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Custom Bridge Connection." Multicast mode

1 2 3

8

9 10

6 Destination Port Number (Continued)  The Default port settings in the Multicast mode

Options Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1) Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2) Digital Transceiver 3 (D-TRX3) Digital Transceiver 4 (D-TRX4) EXT Input 1 (EXT1) / EXT I/O 1 (EXT1) EXT Output 1 (EXT1) EXT Input 2 (EXT2) / EXT I/O 2 (EXT2) EXT Output 2 (EXT2) EXT Input 3 (EXT3) / EXT I/O 3 (EXT3) EXT Output 3 (EXT3) EXT Input 4 (EXT4) / EXT I/O 4 (EXT4)

Default 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510

Options EXT Output 4(EXT4) Emergency Notification Microphone (MIC) RoIP Gateway1 RoIP Gateway2 RoIP Gateway3 RoIP Gateway4 RoIP Gateway5 RoIP Gateway6 RoIP Gateway7 RoIP Gateway8

Default 22510 23116 22510 22530 22530 22530 22530 22530 22530 22530 22530

5-6
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection  Bridge Connection
Unicast mode

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Custom Bridge Connection." Multicast mode

1 2 3

8

9 10

7 Source Port Number 

Set the port number to receive the audio signal. · Range: An even number from 1024 to 65534. L This setting is also used to the source port number to transmit the audio signal. L For communication, the set port number (RTP) and the set port number +1
(RTCP) are used. L Do not duplicate other connection port settings, when using in the Unicast
mode. L The default settings differ, depending on the EXT I/O Port Mode setting.
(Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode)

 The Default port settings in the Unicast mode

Options Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1) Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2) Digital Transceiver 3 (D-TRX3) Digital Transceiver 4 (D-TRX4) EXT Input 1 (EXT1) / EXT I/O 1 (EXT1) EXT Output 1 (EXT1) EXT Input 2 (EXT2) / EXT I/O 2 (EXT2) EXT Output 2 (EXT2) EXT Input 3 (EXT3) / EXT I/O 3 (EXT3) EXT Output 3 (EXT3) EXT Input 4 (EXT4) / EXT I/O 4 (EXT4)

Default 23000 23002 23004 23006 23100 23102 23104 23106 23108 23110 23112

Options EXT Output 4(EXT4) Emergency Notification Microphone (MIC) RoIP Gateway1 RoIP Gateway2 RoIP Gateway3 RoIP Gateway4 RoIP Gateway5 RoIP Gateway6 RoIP Gateway7 RoIP Gateway8

Default 23114 23116 23150 24300 24302 24304 24306 24308 24310 24312 24314

5-7

https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection  Bridge Connection
Unicast mode

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Custom Bridge Connection." Multicast mode

1 2 3

8

9 10

7 Source Port Number (Continued)

 The Default port settings in the Multicast mode

Options Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1) Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2) Digital Transceiver 3 (D-TRX3) Digital Transceiver 4 (D-TRX4) EXT Input 1 (EXT1) / EXT I/O 1 (EXT1) EXT Output 1 (EXT1) EXT Input 2 (EXT2) / EXT I/O 2 (EXT2) EXT Output 2 (EXT2) EXT Input 3 (EXT3) / EXT I/O 3 (EXT3) EXT Output 3 (EXT3) EXT Input 4 (EXT4) / EXT I/O 4 (EXT4)

Default 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510

Options EXT Output 4(EXT4) Emergency Notification Microphone (MIC) RoIP Gateway1 RoIP Gateway2 RoIP Gateway3 RoIP Gateway4 RoIP Gateway5 RoIP Gateway6 RoIP Gateway7 RoIP Gateway8

Default 22510 22510 22510 22530 22530 22530 22530 22530 22530 22530 22530

5-8
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection  Bridge Connection
Unicast mode

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Custom Bridge Connection." Multicast mode

1 2 3

8

9 10

8 Multicast TTL 

Displayed only when the Transmission Mode (3) is set to "Multicast."

As the expiration date of the voice packet, set the TTL (Time To Live)

until the voice packet reaches the communication destination.

The TTL value decreases every time it passes through a router, the

voice packets transmission expires when the TTL value reaches zero.

Therefore you can prevent a packet transmission loop.

(Default: 1)

· Range: 1 ~255

5-9
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection  Bridge Connection
Unicast mode

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

9 10

L The above example shows when the Bridge Connection Destination (2) is set to "Custom Bridge Connection." Multicast mode

1 2 3

8

9 10

9 <Apply>  10 <Reset> 

Click to apply the entries. L When you select other than Custom Bridge Connection for a combination,
the connection is activated as soon as you click <Apply>. The entries are displayed in [Bridge Connection Entry List (For Combination)] screen. L When "Custom Bridge Connection" is selected in the Bridge Connection Destination, the entries are displayed in [Bridge Connection Entry List (For Custom Bridge Connection)] screen. Click <Activate> in the list to activate the bridge connection.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot restore after clicking <Apply>.

5-10
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection
 Bridge Connection Entry List (For Combination)
Lists the combination entries of the bridge connection. See the " Bridge Connection Entry List (For Custom Bridge Connection)" below when the Bridge Connection Destination is set to "Custom Bridge Connection."

1 2

1 <Delete>  2 <Delete All> 

Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete all the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

5-11
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection
 Bridge Connection Entry List (For Custom Bridge Connection)
Lists the combination entries of the bridge connection when the Bridge Connection Destination is set to "Custom Bridge Connection."
1
2 34
5

1 <Refresh>  2 <Activate> 
3 <Edit>  4 <Delete>  5 <Delete All> 

Click to reload the list.
Click to connect the set devices. After they are successfully connected, the button changes to "Deactivate." L When this button is grayed out, you also need to enter the "AMBE+2
Vocoder Assignment" settings.
Click to edit the entry. L You can edit the settings in "Bridge Connection" on the above screen. L Disconnect the connection before editing an entry.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete all the settings in the list. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

5-12
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection
 AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment
Assigns the Voice Protocol and the AMBE+2 Vocoder to each port.

2

3

4

5

1

1 Port Name 
2 Route Setting Screen 
3 Voice Protocol (For Custom Bridge Connection) 

Lists the transceiver port of the RoIP gateway. Click to open to the Connection Port Settings screen of the port. L The Converter Bridge setting screen (PBX extension > Converter Bridge) is
displayed when a converter bridge`s port name is clicked.
The screen setting the route of the destination is displayed. When the entry is set as a combination by the bridge connection, "Bridge Connection" is displayed. Otherwise, "Destination Settings" is displayed. L Click the "Destination Settings" link to open the Destination Settings screen.
Displayed only when the Bridge Connection Destination (see above on this setting screen) is set to "Custom Bridge Connection." Set the voice protocol for the custom bridge connection to "G.711u," "Bridge Protocol," or "AMBE+2."

5-13
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection  AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment

2

3

4

5

1

6 7

4 Voice Protocol (For Port Connection) 
5 AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment 
6 <Apply>  7 <Reset> 

Set the voice protocol for the port connection to "G.711u," "Protocol for Transceiver and SIP Phone Connection," "Bridge Protocol," or "AMBE+2."
(Default for RoIP Gateway 1 ~ 8: G.711u, for Converter Bridge 1 ~ 20: G.711u)
L "Protocol for Transceiver and SIP Phone Connection" can be selected only with the Converter Bridge 1 ~ 20.
L If you connect to the IP1000C, set this item to "Protocol for Transceiver and SIP Phone Connection."
L If you connect to the VE-PG4, set this item to "Bridge Protocol."
Settable only when the Voice Protocol (4) is set to AMBE+2. Select an AMBE+2 Vocoder from "Not Assigned," "Internal," or "CT-24."
(Default for Digital Transceiver 1 ~ 4 (D-TRX1 ~ 4) : Internal)
· Internal: Assignable up to 4 ports. · CT-24: Assignable up to 2 ports. (The optional CT-24 is required.)
L The AMBE+2 Vocoder for the Digital Transceiver 1 ~ 4 (D-TRX1 ~ 4) is fixed to the internal vocoder.
L When the settings of Bridge Connection Source and Bridge Connection Destination are set as the digital transceiver in [Bridge Connection] setting (Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection > Bridge Connection), this item is not displayed.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot restore after clicking <Apply>.

5-14
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

SelCall in Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > SelCall in Bridge Connection
 Save or Write the Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge Connection
You can save or load the settings in "Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge Connection" to or from a CSV format file.

1 2

1 Load Setting from File  2 Save to File 

You can load the saved SelCall rule settings from a CSV format file. Click <Browse> and select the setting file (bridge_route.csv) from the displayed list, and then click <Open>. Confirm the correct file is selected, and then click <Write> to load the settings from the selected file. L Note that the previous settings are deleted when the setting file is loaded.
Saves the settings in the "Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge Connection settings" to a CSV format file. Click <Save> and select a folder to save the file into. You can edit the saved file on a spreadsheet.

5-15
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS

SelCall in Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > SelCall in Bridge Connection
 Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge Connection
Sets the rules to make a individual call from a Digital transceiver that is connected to the RoIP Gateway, through a Bridge Connection.

1 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1 Index 

The index assigned for entry. Setting range: 1 ~ 1000

2 Name 

Enter a name of up to 31 characters.

3 Call Type 

Select the type of call.

· Individual : Call only a specified radio.

· Group : Call all transceivers that belong to the specified group.

· All :

Call all transceivers.

4 Prefix ID 

Enter the prefix ID of the SelCall destination. ID range: (Depending on the system mode)

5 Destination ID 

Enter the ID of the SelCall destination. ID range: (Depending on the system mode)

Destination SelCall in Bridge Connection

6 Address 

Enter the RoIP Gateway's IP address which is connected to the

transceiver that will communicate with the SelCall destination.

7 Port Number 

Enter the RoIP Gateway's port number which is connected to the transceiver that will communicate with the SelCall destination.

8 <Add> 

Click to add a SelCall rule to the List of Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge Connection.

5-16
https://manual-hub.com/

5 BRIDGE CONNECTION SETTINGS
SelCall in Bridge Connection screen
Bridge Connection Settings > SelCall in Bridge Connection
 List of Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge Connection

1 2 3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete>  3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit the entry. L The registered contents are displayed on the Rule Settings for SelCall in Bridge
Connection screen.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete all the settings. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

5-17
https://manual-hub.com/

TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

6 Section

RoIP Settings screen ............................................................................................................... 6-3 M Additional Controller Settings ............................................................................................. 6-3 M Advanced Settings ............................................................................................................ 6-4
Tenant (Fleet) Settings screen ................................................................................................... 6-7 M Tenant (Fleet) .................................................................................................................. 6-7
RoIP Server screen .................................................................................................................. 6-8 M Call Type Priority ............................................................................................................... 6-8
Additional Controller Link screen ................................................................................................ 6-9 M Link Setting ..................................................................................................................... 6-9 M Linked Controller List ...................................................................................................... 6-10
Area Call screen .................................................................................................................. 6-11 M Area Setting .................................................................................................................. 6-11 M Access Point Search ...................................................................................................... 6-12 M Area Entry List ............................................................................................................... 6-14
Transceiver Management screen ............................................................................................. 6-15 M Transceiver Management ................................................................................................ 6-15
Transceiver Registration screen ............................................................................................. 6-17 M Transceiver Settings ...................................................................................................... 6-17 M Transceiver Setting Entry List .......................................................................................... 6-19 M TRX Batch Setting ......................................................................................................... 6-20
Transceiver Settings screen ................................................................................................... 6-21 M Transceiver Settings ...................................................................................................... 6-21 M Copy Transceiver Settings................................................................................................ 6-53 M Transceiver Setting List ................................................................................................... 6-53
Wireless LAN screen ............................................................................................................ 6-54 M Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................... 6-54 M List of Wireless LAN Entries ............................................................................................. 6-61
ID List screen ..................................................................................................................... 6-62 M ID List Common Settings ................................................................................................ 6-62 M ID List Advanced Settings ................................................................................................ 6-62 M Save or Write the ID List Setting ....................................................................................... 6-63 M ID List ........................................................................................................................ 6-65 M ID List Entries ............................................................................................................... 6-67
6-1
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Messages screen .................................................................................................................. 6-68 M Message Group ............................................................................................................ 6-68 M Message Group Detail ................................................................................................... 6-68 M Save or Write the Message Setting .................................................................................... 6-69 M Message List ............................................................................................................... 6-71
Status screen ..................................................................................................................... 6-72 M Status Settings............................................................................................................... 6-72
Profile screen ..................................................................................................................... 6-73 M Profile List..................................................................................................................... 6-73 M Profile ........................................................................................................................ 6-74 M Profile Batch Setting ...................................................................................................... 6-83
6-2
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

RoIP Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > RoIP Settings
 Additional Controller Settings
Configure the Additional Controller Settings. You can communicate with the IP100Hs and the IP100FS that are registered to additional controllers.

1 2

1 Controller Mode  2 Service Port Number 

Select "Master" for one Master Controller. Select "Sub" for the other Controllers (up to 10 Sub Controllers can be set up). (Default: Sub) When several Controllers are linked, and use All call or Group call
between the controllers, set a controller as shown below.

· Sub: One Master Controller can be set up. · Master: Up to 10 Sub Controllers can be set up.

Enter the port number for receiving audio signals.

(Default: 32000)

· Range: "1024" ~ "65534" (only even numbers)

The port number (RTP) and the port number +1 (RTCP) are used for

communication.

L This number is also used for the caller port number.

L Do not set a port number that has already been used by another connection

setting.

6-3
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

RoIP Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > RoIP Settings
 Advanced Settings
Set the V/RoIP details. The items on the RoIP Settings screen differ, depending on the TOS type setting.

1

TOS Type: Not used

2 3

56

1

2

TOS Type:

3

TOS

4

56

1

2

TOS Type:

3

Diffserv

4

56

(These are examples of when the [Buffering Type] (1) is set to "Static.")

1 Buffering Type  2 Receive Buffer Size 

Select the buffer type to control any interrupted sound. (Default: Dynamic)
· Static: The buffer time is set in [Receive Buffer Size] (2).
· Dynamic: The buffer time changes, depending on the audio fluctuation.
Select the buffer time to keep the audio from breaking up. (Default: 40)
· Range: "20" ~ "1000" (milliseconds) A shorter value improves the delay, but it may frequently break the audio signal. L This item is displayed when [Buffering Type] (1) is set to "Static."

6-4
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

RoIP Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > RoIP Settings  Advanced Settings

TOS Type:

1

Not used

2

3

56

1

2

TOS Type:

3

TOS

4

5 6

1

2

TOS Type:

3

Diffserv

4

5 6

(These are examples of when the [Buffering Type] (1) is set to "Static.")

3 TOS type 

Select the TOS (Type-Of Service) format.

(Default: Not used)

· Not used: Does not use the TOS function.

· TOS:

Sends the VoIP packets to the TOS field (8 bits) in the IP header using the TOS format. Sets to between 1 (lowest) and 3 bits (Priority level) or 4 and 7 (highest) bits (Type of Service) based on the RFC1349. The 1 bit remaining is not used and is fixed as 0.

· Diffserv: Sends the VoIP packets to the TOS field (8 bits) in the IP header using the Diffserv (Differentiated Service) format. Sets to between 1 and 6 bits (DSCP). The 2 bits remaining are not used and are fixed as 0.

6-5
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

RoIP Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > RoIP Settings  Advanced Settings

TOS Type:

1

Not used

2

3

56

1

2

TOS Type:

3

TOS

4

5 6

1

2

TOS Type:

3

Diffserv

4

5 6

(These are examples of when the [Buffering Type] (1) is set to "Static.")

4 Media (RTP) 
5 <Apply>  6 <Reset> 

Select the Priority level and Service type of the sent VoIP packets.

· Media (RTP) Priority Level
Set the TOS priority level to between 0 (lowest) and 7 (highest). (Default: 7)

· Media (RTP) Service Type Set the TOS service type code to between 0 and 15.

(Default: 0)

· Media (RTP) DSCP

Set the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) code to between

0 and 63.

(Default: 56)

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-6
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Tenant (Fleet) Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Tenant (Fleet) Settings
 Tenant (Fleet)
The tenant (fleet) divides the IP100Hs or IP100FSs that belong to the RoIP Gateway, for system management purposes. (Example: Security company/Management company) L The terminals cannot communicate among different tenants (fleets). L Select the tenant (fleet) number between 1 to 10. L All IP100Hs and IP100FSs that belong to the RoIP Gateway are activated in one tenant (fleet).

1

23

1 Tenant (Fleet) Number 

Select the tenant (fleet) number that is used.

(Default: 1)

The tenant (fleet) number is displayed in the following menus. - RoIP Server Settings - Transceiver Settings - Common Settings (Except Wireless LAN menu) - Destination Settings

2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

(This is an example when [Tenant (Fleet) Number] (1) is set to "1.") Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-7
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
RoIP Server screen
Transceiver Controller > RoIP Server Settings > RoIP Server
 Call Type Priority
Select the priority level of the call types.
1

2 3

1 Call type Priority (High to low)

Select the priority level of the call types.
(Default: Telephone  All  Individual  Group) L The setting value are shown below.

2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-8
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Additional Controller Link screen
Transceiver Controller > RoIP Server Settings > Additional Controller Link
 Link Setting
This is a setting to link with IP1000Cs, VE-PG3s (Bridge mode), or VE-PG4s.

1

2

3

4

56

1 No.  2 Name  3 Destination Address  4 Destination Port Number 
5 <Apply>  6 <Reset> 

Select a number between 1 and 100 to register the other transceiver

controllers.

(Default: 1)

Enter the group name of up to 31 characters.

Enter the destination device's IP address or domain name of up to 63 characters.

Enter the destination controller's service port number in [Additional Controller Link].
(Default: 32000) Range: "2" ~ "65534" (only even numbers) L The set port number (RTP) and the port number +1 (RTCP) are used for
communication.

Click to apply the entries. L The entries are displayed in [Linked Controller List].

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-9
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Additional Controller Link screen
Transceiver Controller > RoIP Server Settings > Additional Controller Link
 Linked Controller List
Display a list of the destination addresses and destination port numbers registered to the RoIP Gateway.
1 2 3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 
3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit the entry in [Link Setting].
Click to delete the selected entry. L After clicking <Delete>, the entry cannot be recalled.
Click to delete all the entries. L After clicking <Delete All>, the entries cannot be recalled.

6-10
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Area Call screen
Transceiver Controller > RoIP Server Settings > Area Call
 Area Setting
The Area call function limits communication with the devices in the specified area. When an IP100H makes an All call or Group call using the Area call function, it calls other IP100Hs or IP100FSs in the same area. L If you want to use the Area call from an IP100FS, specify the area by selecting the desired access points.
1 2 3
45

1 No. 

Select the number that is registered to the Area call. L Up to 20 calls can be registered.

(Default: 1)

2 Name 

Enter the area name of up to 31 characters.

3 BSSID 

Enter the 12 digit BSSID of the wireless access point in the area. When several access points are added, they are recognized as one area. L Up to 20 access points can be registered to the area.

4 <Apply> 

Click to add the entries. L The entries are displayed in [Area Entry List].

5 <Reset> 

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

The IP100H makes All calls in the area
Example: The wireless access points "Sales" and "Accounts" are registered in the same area. The access point "Parts" is registered in a different area. In that case, two IP100Hs in the same area receive the call, but the IP100H in the different area will not receive it.

VE-PG4

Sales

Accounts

Parts

Wireless access point

IP100H
6-11

All call

The settings of the "Transceiver Settings" item are necessary to use the Area call function for the each IP100H.

https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Area Call screen
Transceiver Controller > RoIP Server Settings > Area Call
 Access Point Search
The RoIP Gateway can search for access points the network, and register access points for Area Calls. L Icom guarantees this function only for the AP-90M and AP-95M. (As of May, 2019)

1 2

4

3

5

6

1 IP Address Range 

Click the <Search> button after entering the IP address range of the access points. When starting a search, the button changes to both <Refresh> and <Cancel>. The discovered access point information will be displayed in a list. L When only IP start address is entered, a search starts. L If BSSID is already registered in the Area Entry List, it is not displayed. L When the [IP Advanced Radio System] setting of an access point that is set
to "Enable" in [Notification] that is same Tenant (Fleet) Number with the RoIP Gateway, and a name is registered, you can search for the BSSID and
name. When it is set to "Disable," you cannot search with the RoIP Gateway.

2 Check Box  3 Name 

(AP-95M Wireless LAN1 IP Advanced Radio System screen)
Click a Check Box to add a check mark for registering a discovered access point. L By clicking [All], you can select or cancel all access points in the list.
The name that is set in [IP Advanced Radio System] of an access point is displayed. L An area name is registered on [Number] in [Area Setting].

6-12
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Area Call screen
Transceiver Controller > RoIP Server Settings > Area Call  Access Point Search

1 2

4

3

5

6

4 No. 
5 <Add>  6 <Apply selection> 

Select an area to register from a "Number" in [Area Setting]. When an area number that is already registered is selected, BSSID is added to the area number. L If the area number is already registered in [Area Call], it cannot be selected. L An area number is selected, depending on the name that is registered
with the same Tenant (Fleet) Number in [IP Advanced Radio System] of an access point, as shown below. · When the area number's name is already registered in [Area Setting], the
area number is selected (A blank is also recognized as a part of the name). · When the area number's name is not registered in [Area Setting], an
unused and initial area number is selected.
Click to register a discovered access point in [Access Point Search].
Click to register a selected access point in [Check Box] (2).

6-13
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Area Call screen
Transceiver Controller > RoIP Server Settings > Area Call
 Area Entry List
Display the list of the registered [Area Setting] or [Access Point Search].
12
3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 
3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit the setting in [Area Setting].
Click to delete the selected entry. L After clicking <Delete>, the entry cannot be recalled.
Click to delete all the entries. L After clicking <Delete All>, the entries cannot be recalled.

6-14
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Management screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Management
 Transceiver Management
The RoIP Gateway can monitor the registered IP100Hs and IP100FSs. And if necessary, the RoIP Gateway can reboot the registered all IP100Hs.

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

9 10
L An IP100H is displayed in bold when a setting is changed and a reboot is required.

1 Check Box  2 Registration Status 
3 IP Address  4 Current Status 

Click a Check Box to add a check mark to the IP100H that you want to reboot. L You cannot select an IP100FS, or an IP100H that has "Disconnected"
displayed in [Registration Status]. L By clicking the [All] box, you can select or cancel all IP100Hs in the list.
Displays the IP100Hs' or IP100FSs' Registration Status as either "Connected" or "Disconnected." L Displays "Disconnected" if the IP100H is turned OFF or the IP100FS's
application is not running. L When the RoIP Gateway sends the reboot command to an IP100H from the
[Transceiver Management] menu, the following status are displayed: "Receiving reboot command," "Reboot command reception success," "Reboot command reception failed," "Ready to reboot" "Rebooting," "Updating," "Update failed," "Downloading," "Status notification failed," and "Low battery."
Displays the IP Addresses of the IP100Hs or IP100FSs. L When [Registration Status] displays "Disconnected," "" is displayed.
Displays the Current Status of the IP100Hs. (Example: In a meeting)
L Information · If the Status function is set to OFF, "" is displayed. · If you click the <Refresh> (7) button, the latest status will be displayed. · When the IP100H is remotely locked by the IP100FS, and it cannot
communicate with others or cannot transmit, "Transmit and receive disabled" or "Transmit disabled" is displayed. · If the IP100H is sending an emergency call, "Emergency" is displayed.

6-15
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Management screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Management  Transceiver Management

1

2

3

4

5

7

6

8

9 10 L An IP100H is displayed in bold when a setting has been changed and a reboot is required.

5 Talkgroup  6 Location  7 <Refresh>  8 Version  9 Manual Update 
10 Manual Reboot 

Displays the Talkgroup IDs that are selected by the IP100Hs or IP100FSs. L When a Talkgroup name is registered, a Talkgroup number (name) is
displayed. L While a IP100H or IP100FS does not select a Talkgroup, or [Registration
Status] displays "Disconnected," "" is displayed.

Displays the BSSIDs of the wireless access points that the IP100Hs are
connected to. L When [Registration Status] displays "Disconnected," "" is displayed.

Click to reload the Registration Status. L The connection status of the IP100H or IP100FS, or the activation status
check of when the IP100H or IP100FS reboots are renewed.

Displays the version of the IP100Hs or IP100FSs that are registered to
the RoIP Gateway. L When [Registration Status] displays "Disconnected," "" is displayed.

Enable to manually update the IP100H firmware when the RoIP Gateway sends Manual Reboot (10) to the IP100H.
When the IP100H is ready to update the firmware, "F" blinks on the

Blinks

F 1/24 16:57 Sales8

Updating

display, and then the IP100H automatically reboots and starts the firmware update. L When the IP100H has failed to prepare a firmware update, the IP100H
does not automatically reboot. If necessary, send a reboot command to the IP100H.
Click <Execute> to reboot all of the IP100Hs that are selected in [Check Box] (1).
6-16

https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Registration screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Registration
 Transceiver Settings
Register the IP100H or IP100FS settings. L After the registration is completed, you must reboot the IP100H.

1 2 3 4
5
6 7 8
9 10

1 TRX No. 
2 Transceiver Model  3 Name  4 Unit ID  5 Password 
6 Transceiver Port Number

Selects the number that the IP100H or IP100FS is registered to.
(Default: 1) L Up to 50 terminals can be registered.

Select either the IP100H or IP100FS.

(Default: IP100H)

Enter a transceiver name of up to 31 characters.

Enter the 4 digit individual number between 0001 and 9999. (Default: 0001)

Enter a password to access to the RoIP Gateway.

(Default: iptrx)

L Up to 12 characters, lower or upper letters, numbers, and symbols can be

used.

Enter the port number (UDP port) that the IP100H will use to communicate with the RoIP Gateway.

L Information
· The set port number (RTP) and the port number +1 (RTCP) are used for communication.
· We basically recommend that you use the default port number. · The default number differs, depending on [TRX No.], as shown below.
Default: TRX No. 1 (30000), TRX No. 2 (30002), TRX No. 3 (30004), TRX No. 4 (30006), .............................., TRX No. 50 (30098)
· Setting range: Even numbers between 2 and 59998. Some numbers may not be usable.
· Do not set the port number that has already been used by another connection setting.
· When [Transceiver Model] (2) is set to "IP100FS," the port number is not displayed.

6-17
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Registration screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Registration  Transceiver Settings

1 2 3 4
5
6 7 8
9 10

7 Server Port Number 
8 Profile  9 <Add>  10 <Reset> 

Enter a port number (UDP port) that the RoIP Gateway will use to communicate with the IP100H or IP100FS.
L Information · The set port number (RTP) and the port number +1 (RTCP) are used for
communication. · We basically recommend that you use the default port numbers. · The default number differs, depending on the [TRX No.] as shown below.
Default: TRX No. 1 (30000), TRX No. 2 (30002), TRX No. 3 (30004), TRX No. 4 (30006), .............................., TRX No. 50 (30098)
· Setting range: Even numbers between 2 and 65534. Some numbers may not be usable.
· Do not set a port number that has already been used by another connection setting.
Select the Profile number that the IP100H or IP100FS belongs to. (Default: 1)
L The numbers 1 to 50 are selectable. L Set the Profile setting in the [Common Settings] menu, such as ID list,
message, or Receive notification tone settings.
Click to add the entries. L The entries are displayed in [Transceiver Setting Entry List].
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Add>.

6-18
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Registration screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Registration
 Transceiver Setting Entry List
The list of the registered IP100Hs or IP100FSs.
1 2

34

5

6

1 Check Box  2 <Delete>  3 <Apply>  4 <Reset>  5 <Delete Selected>  6 <Delete All> 

Click a Check Box to add a check mark to delete an entry. L By clicking the [All] box, you can select or cancel all entries in the list.
Click to delete the selected entry. L After clicking <Delete>, the entry cannot be recalled.
Click to apply the entries. L The entries that are edited in [Transceiver Setting Entry List] are registered.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.
Click to delete an entry that you select in the Check Box (1). L After clicking <Delete Selected>, the entry cannot be recalled.
Click to delete all the entries. L After clicking <Delete All>, the entries cannot be recalled.

6-19
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Registration screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Registration
 TRX Batch Setting
You can register consecutive Destination IDs collectively. Or you can copy the Destination ID contents to another ID.
1 2 3

1 Range 
2 Refer to  3 Profile 

Enter a range of collective Destination IDs.
Click <Add> to register consecutive Destination IDs collectively in the box. L If a Destination ID is already registered, "Overwrite the following entry" is
displayed.
Select the default settings or the programmed settings to refer to. (Default: Default)
Select the profile number that IP100Hs or IP100FSs belong to. (Default: 1)
L The numbers 1 to 50 are selectable. L You can set an ID List, Message List, or Notification beep setting for each
profile in the [Common Settings] menu.

6-20
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings
 Transceiver Settings
Individually assign the functions, or set the receive notification tone to a registered IP100H. L After the setting is completed, you must reboot the IP100H.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 Unit ID  2 Display Item 
3 BackLight 4 Tx Inhibit 

Select the IP100H's Individual number (Name) that you want to edit. L Only the individual numbers of the IP100H are selectable.
The individual number that the [Transceiver Model] on the [Transceiver
Registration] screen is set to "IP100FS," cannot be selected.

Select whether or not the IP100H displays the Date and Time or its

Name in the standby mode.

(Default: Date and Time)

10/8 1657 Sales 8
(Date and Time)

Sales 1 Sales 8
(Name)

L If the [Name] on the [Transceiver Registration] screen has not been entered, and this setting is set to [Name], the IP100H displays the individual number.

Select the IP100H backlight function.

(Default: Auto)

· OFF: The backlight does not light.

· ON:

The backlight lights continuously.

· Auto: The backlight lights when an operation is performed, and goes out after 5 seconds.

Select "Enable" to inhibit the IP100H's transmission. (Default: Disable) L When this setting is set to "Enable," the IP100H also cannot transmit with an
optional microphone, or using the VOX function.

6-21
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

5 PTT Lock  6 PTT Call at Stand-by 

Select "Enable" to lock the IP100H's PTT switch.

(Default: Disable)

L When this setting is set to "Enable," the IP100H cannot transmit by holding

down its PTT switch, but it can transmit with an optional microphone or using

the VOX function as well.

Select whether or not the IP100H displays the Destination ID (Call type)

in the standby mode.

(Default: Enable)

· Disable: The Destination ID (Call type) is not displayed in the
standby mode. L The Destination ID (Call type) is displayed when you select the
ID using the function keys.

· Enable:

The Destination ID (Call type) is displayed in the standby mode. L When the PTT on the IP100H is pushed, the IP100H calls the
displayed ID (Call type).

6-22
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

7 Use ID List 
(Address) key

Select whether or not the IP100H uses the ID list. (Default: Disable)

· Disable:

The call type is fixed to that which is selected in the [Call Type], as

shown below, even if you push the [ ] key on the IP100H.

L If you set the Call Type to "Individual" or "Group," enter the 4 digit

destination ID in the [Destination ID].

(Default: All)

L Even if "Disable" is selected, the IP100H displays a received ID in the ID list.

· Enable:
The call type is changed by pushing the [ ] key on the IP100H. Select First Call ID from All, or an ID number (1 to 50) that is displayed when the IP100H is turned ON, in [Call type]. L The ID list is selected on the [Common Setting] screen.

6-23
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

8 Add All Call to ID List  9 Default Talkgroup 

Select whether or not to display All Call in the ID list of the IP100H. (Default: Enable)

· Disable
Does not display "All" in the ID list. L When "Disable" is selected in [Add All Call to ID List], you cannot select an
All call using the [ ] key.

· Enable L When [User ID List] (7) is set to "Enable," set [Add All Call to ID List] and [Startup Talkgroup].

Select a Talkgroup if you want to set the IP100H to join a Talkgroup

when you turn ON the power.

(Default: Disable)

· Disable
The IP100 starts up without joining any Talkgroup. The ID that is set in the "First Call ID" in [User ID List] (7) is displayed when the IP100H is turned ON.

· Enable
The IP100 joins the selected Talkgroup when it is turned ON. L When [User ID List] (7) is set to "Disable," this item is not displayed.

6-24
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

10 11
12
13 14 15 16

17 18
L The screen shows when the Message (16) is set to "enable."

10 Volume 

Set the beep level when the IP100H receives a Call or message to

between 0 and 32.

(Default: 10)

L When this setting set to "0," the notification beep is turned OFF.

L The notification beep is individually set for the Call type or message in

[Notification Tone] on the [Common Settings] screen.

11 Ringer and Vibration

Set the action when the IP100H receives a Call or message to
"Notification Beep," "Vibration" or "Notification Beep + Vibration." (Default: Notification Beep)

· Notification Beep When the IP100H receives a Call or message, the specified Notification beep sounds, depending on the Call or message. The notification beep is set in [Notification Tone] on the [Profile] screen in the [Common Settings] menu.

· Vibration
When the IP100H receives a Call or message, it vibrates for notification.

· Notification Beep + Vibration When the IP100H receives a Call or message, it vibrates and the
Notification beep sounds for notification.

6-25
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

10 11
12
13 14 15 16

17 18
L The screen shows when the Message (16) is set to "enable."

12 Volume (Except Reception Notice)

Set the beep level when the IP100H is transmitting a Call or connecting

to the RoIP Gateway, to between 0 and 32.

(Default: 10)

L When this setting is set to "0," the notification beep is turned OFF.

L Depending on the [Common Settings], the IP100H sounds a beep when the

IP100H is transmitting or connecting to the RoIP Gateway.

13 Communication Method 

Select the communication method that the IP100H uses. (Default: Full-Duplex)
· Simplex: Toggles the transmission (Talker) and reception (Listener) for
communication.

· Full-duplex: Simultaneously transmits and receives, like a telephone. L When connecting the optional microphone to the IP100H, you can operate
the IP100H like a telephone.

Simplex and Full-duplex
VE-PG4
Simplex
IP100H

Full-duplex

Wireless access point

6-26
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

10 11
12
13 14 15 16

17 18
L The screen shows when the Message (16) is set to "enable."

14 Priority Call 

Select whether or not the IP100H uses Priority Call. (Default: Disable)
The priority levels of the Call types are in the following order.

Priority level High

Priority Fixed

Call type Telephone Emergency (High)

Priority Call

Remarks

--

For telephone communication

Enable --

Emergency (Normal) Disable --

All Call (High) Individual Call (High) Selectable * Group Call (High)

Enable Enable Enable

Includes the Area Call or using an IP100FS Includes using an IP100FS Includes the Area Call or using an IP100FS

All Call (Normal)

Disable Includes the Area Call

Individual Call (Normal) Disable --

Low

Group Call (Normal) Disable Includes the Area Call

* Selectable in the Call Type Priority in the [RoIP Server] screen in the
[RoIP Server settings] menu. L Priority is given to the first call between calls with the same priority level. L When a call is taken, priority is given to the setting of the caller.

Example: Even while B and C are talking on a Group Call from A, B can make an Individual Call (High) to C. In this case, the Group Call is canceled.
6-27
https://manual-hub.com/

Group Call

A

B

VE-PG4

Wireless access point

C
Individual Call (High)

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

10 11
12
13 14 15 16

17 18
L The screen shows when the Message (16) is set to "enable."

15 Area Call 

Select whether or not the IP100H uses Area Call. (Default: Disable)
When the IP100H calls All Call or Group Call using the Area Call
function, it calls only other IP100Hs or IP100FSs in the area that is
connected to the same wireless access point. When the BSSID that IP100H is connecting is registered in [Area Setting] (Transceiver Controller > RoIP Server Settings > Area Call), this function is activated.

IP100H makes an All Call with the Area Call function

VE-PG4

Sales All Call

Accounts

IP100FS calls the All Call with the Area Call function

Parts

Wireless access point

IP100H
The wireless access points that the IP100H is included in with the Area Call function are set on the [Area Call] screen in the [RoIP Server Settings] menu. (Example: For Sales and For Accounts)

When the IP100FS uses Area Call function, the IP100FS can call IP100Hs that are in the communication range of the access points assigned to the Area Call. When the access point is selected in the [Location], the Call type (Individual, Group, All, Area, or Telephone) and names are displayed.

6-28
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

10 11
12
13 14 15 16

17 18
L The screen shows when the Message (16) is set to "enable."

16 Message 

Select whether or not the IP100H can send messages. (Default: Disable)
When "Enable" is selected, push the [FUNC] key on the IP100H once to enter the Message selection screen. L Up to 10 messages of 32 characters or less can be programmed on the
[Messages] screen in the [Common Settings] menu. L Select the message number 1 to 10 in [Default Message] that is registered
on the [Message] screen.

IP100H transmits a message

VE-PG4

Message All Gather immedi
Message selection screen (TX)

IP100H

Wireless access point
All Call

Blinks

Scrolls

1/25 12:57 All Gather imme
Received message screen (RX)

IP100FS transmits a message

Selected Call type

Selected or edited message

The IP100FS can store up to 100 messages in each site. You can edit the stored messages.

6-29
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

10 11
12
13 14 15 16

17 18
L The screen shows when the Message (16) is set to "enable."

17 Status 

Select whether or not the IP100H can send Status information.

(Example: At lunch, Meeting, Waiting)

(Default: Disable)

When "Enable" is selected, push the [FUNC] key on the IP100H twice

to enter the Status selection screen.

L Up to 10 statuses of 32 characters or less can be entered on the [Status]

screen in the [Common Settings] menu.

L The status that the IP100H sends can be displayed on the [Transceiver

Management] screen in the [Transceiver Settings] menu or the one-Touch

button of the IP100FS.

IP100H sends the Status
VE-PG4

IP100FS One-Touch button

Status At lunch

Wireless access point

Status selection screen (TX)

IP100H

At lunch
Name, Destination ID, Status number and Status information

VE-PG4 Transceiver Management screen

Status
6-30
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

10 11
12
13 14 15 16

17 18
L The screen shows when the Message (16) is set to "enable."

18 Mixing of Low Priority Call

Select whether or not the IP100H receives Mixed audio. (Default: Disable)
When this setting is set to "Enable," the RoIP Gateway sends the mixed audio of all calls that call the IP100H. L The IP100H displays the called station that has the highest priority in the
mixed audio. See page 6-26 for details of the Priority level.

· Mixing of Low priority call
VE-PG4
Wireless access point

IP100H

Priority: High

Priority: Low

When the IP100H is set the [Mixing of Low priority call] setting, several calls are heard at same time, but the highest priority call is displayed.

Group Call

6-31
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

19
20 21 22

19 Fix Call Destination 

1/24 16:57 Sales8

All Sales8

2nd line 3rd line

Call type is set to All

Select whether or not the IP100H uses the Fix Call Destination function. (Default: Disable)
When this setting is set to other than "Disable," the IP100H calls the preset destination instead of the selected destination that is displayed on the third line. The Fix Call Destination function separates the fixed call from the general calls by the specified method to start transmission.
· Disable The Fix Call Destination is not specified, and the IP100H calls the selected destination.
· PTT The Fix Call Destination is specified as PTT transmission. When [PTT] is held down, the IP100H calls the preset destination.

Seles group1 Sales8

2nd line 3rd line

Call type is set to Group

(Example: All call is specified to the PTT)
· Earphone Mic or Headset The Fix Call Destination is specified as the external Mic transmission. When the external microphone's PTT switch is held down, or its VOX function is active, the IP100H calls the preset destination.

(Example: Group call is specified to the Earphone Mic or Headset)
L Information · Set the Call type to "Individual," "Group," or "All." · When the "Call Type" is set to "Individual" or "Group," enter the 4 digit number
of the Individual ID or Group ID in the [Destination ID]. · The Destination ID, Name (if [Name] is selected in the [Display Item] (2)) or
Call type of the Fix Call Destination is displayed on the 2nd line. (Usually Date and Time or Own Name is displayed on the 2nd line.) · When the IP100H receives a call with this setting, it does not display the Caller's ID or Call type on the 3rd line. · When both of the IP100H's [PTT] and external microphone's PTT switch are held down, the external PTT has priority and the internal microphone will be muted.
6-32
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

19
20 21
22

20 Option Key 

Assign "Message," "One Touch," "Clear Down," "Mute," "Emergency," or

"No Function" to the IP100H's [Option] key.

(Default: No Function)

L When this setting is set to "No function," nothing changes by pushing the

[Option] key on the IP100H in the standby mode.

· Message
Pushing the [Option] key on the IP100H displays the Message selection screen. L Select the message number 1 to 10 in the [Message No.] that is displayed
on the [Message] screen.

Push [Option] key

Message All Gather immedi

6-33
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

19
20 21
22

20 Option key ........................

· One Touch
Pushing the [Option] key on the IP100H selects a specified Call type and destination ID or phone number. Select the "Individual," "Group," "All," or "Telephone" Call type. L When "Individual" or "Group" is selected, enter the 4 digit Individual ID or
Group ID in the [Destination ID]. L When "Telephone" is selected, enter up to 31 numbers and symbols (#, )
in the [Destination Phone Number].

Push [Option] key

1/24 16:57 Sales8

6-34
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

19
20 21
22

20 Option key ........................

· Clear Down
Pushing the [Option] key on the IP100H terminates the phone call with an IP phone. L You can assign another function if you select "Enable" on [Clear Down
during Telephone Call] (21).

Push [Option] key

When the [Option] key is pushed before a phone call is received, or during telephone call, the phone call is terminated. L The phone call is terminated
from the IP100H, only when the
IP100H is individually called from
a telephone, or when the IP100H calls a telephone.

6-35
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

19
20 21
22

20 Option key ........................

· Mute

Hold down the [Option] key for 1 second on the IP100H when you want to

mute the received audio. (The Notification beep cannot be muted.)

Hold down the [Option] key for 1 second to turn the Mute function ON or OFF.

L You can turn OFF the Mute function by pushing [PTT]. However, selecting "Enable" in the [Clear Down during Telephone Call] (21), terminates the

phone call.

L If you select "Enable" in [Mute Automatic Release], turn OFF the Mute

function after a specified period of time has passed.

(Default: Disable)

If you select "Enable," set the period of time to release the Mute function to

between 10 to 600 (seconds).

(Default: 60 (seconds))

Push [Option] key

MUTE All

6-36
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

19 20 21
22

20 Option key ........................

· Emergency
Hold down the [Option] key until "Emergency" is displayed to send an Emergency call. When the Emergency call is sent, an alarm sounds. The Emergency call is canceled and the alarm stops when the transceiver receives a
response, or the [Option] key of the transceiver is held down. L You can set the period of time to send the Emergency call, and sound the
alarm, in [Emer SW ON Timer] (35). L When "Enable" is selected in [Emer SW OFF] (36), you can set the period
of time to cancel the Emergency call and stop the alarm.

Push [Option] key

Emergency All

NOTE: The RoIP Gateway should not be used when high reliability is necessary. The communication cannot be made, depending on the environment around the RoIP Gateway, such as the consumption of a battery, the signal environment, or the access point or network status. Use the [Emergency] and [Lone Worker] functions as a supplementary function.
6-37
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

19
20 21 22

21 Clear Down during Telephone Call

Select "Enable," if you want to terminate a phone call by pushing the

IP100H's [Option] key.

(Default: Enable)

L When "Clear Down" is selected on the [Option Key] (20), this item is not

displayed.

Push [Option] key

Before the target telephone is picked
up, or during a phone call, pushing the [Option] key terminates the phone call. L The IP100H can terminate the phone
call, when a telephone calls the IP100H individually, or when the IP100H calls a telephone.

22 Target Availability Check 

Select whether or not the IP100H displays a confirmation after it makes

an Individual Call.

(Default: Enable)

When "Enable" is selected, the IP100H displays the "Connected,"

"Busy" or "No response" connection status.

1/24 16:57 Connected
L When the target station is out of range, "No response" is displayed. L If the [Connection Notice Tone] is set to "Enable," the Success Tone or
Failure Tone sounds to notify its connection status. (Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile > Profile > Connection Notice Tone)

6-38
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

23
24 25

23 Key-Touch Beep
24 Gain  25 Monitor 

Select whether or not the IP100H sounds the Key-Touch beep. (Default: Enable)
When "Disable" is selected, the IP100H does not sound the confirmation beep when a key is pushed.

· Key-Touch Beep Level

Set the volume level of the notification beeps when the IP100H's key

is pushed.

(Default: 10)

The selectable range is between 0 and 32.

L When "0" is selected in this setting, the IP100H does not sound any beep,

even if the volume level is set.

L When "Disable" is selected, this setting is grayed out and the volume level

cannot be changed.

Adjust the microphone sensitivity.

(Default: 0 (dB))

· Range: 12 (low) ~ 12 (high) dB, in 3 dB steps.

L When the noise level around the IP100H is high, set to low sensitivity and

speak in a slightly louder voice that makes listening easier. Or when the

noise level around the IP100H is quiet, set to high sensitivity and speak in

smaller voice that makes listening easier.

Select whether or not the IP100H with an earphone microphone uses

the Monitor function.

(Default: Disable)

When this setting is set to "Enable," you can hear your transmit audio

from the earphone. Set the monitor level to between 0 and 32.

(Default: 10)

L When "0" is set, your voice is not heard from an earphone microphone,

regardless of the audio setting in the IP100H.

L To prevent howling, set this setting to "Disable" when using a speaker

microphone, such as the HM-186LS.

6-39
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

26 27 28 29 30 31 32
(This is an example of when the [VOX] (26) is set to "Enable.")

26 VOX 

Select whether or not the IP100H can use the VOX (voice operated

transmission) function.

(Default: Disable)

The transceiver has a VOX function, which allows hands-free operation.

L Information
· The VOX function requires an optional headset and connection cable, such as the HS-94, HS-95, or HS-97 headset and OPC-2006LS cable, or the HS-102 headset and OPC-2359 cable.
· The VOX function starts transmission when you speak into the microphone,
without needing to push [PTT]; then, automatically returns to reception when you stop speaking. · Be sure to turn OFF the IP100H's power, before connecting or disconnecting optional equipment to or from the [ / ] jack. · When "Enable" is selected, the [Attack Time] (27) through [Sidetone Volume] (32) is displayed.

OPC-2006LS Purchases separately

HS-94 Purchases separately

To the [ / ] jack
· The HS-85 has the VOX function, so if you connect the HS-85 to the IP100H through the OPC-2144, set the [VOX] (26) to "Disable."

OPC-2144 Purchases separately
To the [ / ] jack

HS-85 Purchases separately

6-40
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

26 27 28 29 30 31 32
(This is an example of when the [VOX] (26) is set to "Enable.")

27 Attack Time 
VOX: Enable
28 Release Time 
VOX: Enable
29 Voice Delay 
VOX: Enable
30 Voice Threshold 
VOX: Enable
31 Sidetone 
VOX: Enable
32 Sidetone Volume 
VOX: Enable

Adjust the Attack time

(Default: 50)

· Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

When audio from a headset microphone is input for this specified time,

the IP100H starts transmitting.

Adjust the Release time.

(Default: 200)

· Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

The release time is amount of time the transmitter stays ON after you

stop speaking.

Adjust the Voice Delay time to prevent clipping of the first few syllables

after you begin speaking.

(Default: 200)

· Range: 0 ~ 500 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

Adjust the VOX Threshold level.

(Default: 40)

· Range: 0 ~ 100 (%)

L The higher values make the VOX function more sensitive to your voice.

Select whether or not to use the Sidetone function. (Default: Disable) When "Enable" is selected, you can hear your voice from the headset.

Adjust the Sidetone level. · Range: 0 (minimum) ~ 32 (maximum)

(Default: 10)

6-41
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

33 34 35 36
37
38 39 40
L (This is an example of when the Emergency (33), Emer SW OFF (36), and Cancel by Time (40) are set to "Enable.")

33 Emergency 
34 Assign Emergency to Log Key (long press) 
Emergency: Enable
35 Emer SW ON Timer 
Emergency: Enable
36 Emer SW OFF 
Emergency: Enable

Select whether or not to use the Emergency function. (Default: Disable) Holding down the [Option Key] (20) or [Assign Emergency to Log Key (long press)] (34) until "Emergency" is displayed turns ON the
Emergency function, and sends an Emergency call to the previously set
User ID.
The Emergency call is canceled when an RX code is received, or
holding down the [Option] key or [Log] key for a set period of time in the [Emer SW OFF Timer] (36). · The period of time that the key must be held down to turn the
Emergency function ON or OFF is set in the [Emer SW ON Timer] (35) or in the [Emer SW OFF Timer] (36).

Select whether or not to use the [ ] key to send an Emergency call. (Default: Enable)

Enter the period of time for which the [Option] key or [Log] key must be held down to turn the Emergency function ON. (Default: 5 seconds)

Select whether or not to cancel the Emergency call by pushing the

[Option] key or [Log] key.

(Default: Disable)

When "Enable" is selected, enter the period of time for which the

[Option] or [Log] key must be held down to turn OFF the Emergency

function, between 1 and 10 seconds.

(Default: 2 seconds)

6-42
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

33 34 35 36
37
38 39 40

37 Emergency Alert Tone 
Emergency: Enable
38 Call type 
Emergency: Enable
39 Cancel on Reply 
Emergency: Enable
40 Cancel by Time 

Select whether or not to sound an alarm when an Emergency call is sent.

When this item is set to "Disable," "Emergency" is not displayed on the

screen, and IP100H sends the Emergency call.

(Default: Enable)

When "Enable" is selected, set the [Emergency Alert Tone Volume]

(audio level) of the alarm to between 0 and 32.

(Default: 32)

Select the call type of Emergency call from Individual, Group, All, or

Telephone.

(Default: All)

If you select "Individual" or "Group," enter the 4 digit Destination ID. If

you select "Telephone," enter a Destination Phone Number of up to 31

characters (09, #, and *).

Select whether or not to cancel the Emergency call when any RX code

is received.

(Default: Enable)

Select whether or not to cancel the Emergency call after the set period

of time has passed.

(Default: Disable)

If you select "Enable," enter a period of time to between 1 and 255 seconds.

(Default: 60 (seconds))

6-43
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

41

42 43 44 45

(This is an example of when the [Lone Worker] (42) is set to "Enable.")

41 Alert Tone
Emergency: Enable
42 Lone Worker 
Emergency: Enable
43 Lone Worker ON Timer
Lone Worker: Enable

Select whether or not to cancel an Emergency call after the set period

of time has passed.

(Default: Enable)

If you select "Enable," set the Volume (audio level) to between 0 and

32, and select the action. (Default: 32, Notification Beep+Vibration)

L In the [Alert Tone Action], select "Notification Beep," "Vibration," or

"Notification Beep + Vibration" to activate when an Emergency call is

received.

If the Lone Worker function is activated, the Emergency function is

automatically turned ON after the set period of time has passed with no

operation.

(Default: Disable)

Enter the period of time for starting the Lone Worker function. (Default: 60 (minutes))
· Range: 1 ~ 255 (minutes) in 1 second steps L When the IP100H is operated within the period of time in this item, the times
for [Lone Worker ON Timer] (43) and [Lone Worker Reminder Timer] (44) are reset.

6-44
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

41

42 43 44 45

(This is an example of when the [Lone Worker] (42) is set to "Enable.")

44 Lone Worker Reminder Timer
Lone Worker: Enable
45 PTT Delay
Lone Worker: Enable

Enter the period of time to start the Emergency call transmission

after the period of time that is set in [Lone Worker ON Timer] (43) has

passed.

(Default: 60 (seconds))

When the transceiver is not operated after the period of time has

passed, the Emergency call automatically starts.

· Range: 1 ~ 255 (seconds) in 1 second steps

L When the transceiver is operated by the [Emergency] function activation,

[Lone Worker ON Timer] and [Lone Worker Reminder Timer] are reset.

L When the [Lone Worker Reminder Timer] is activated, beeps sound every 2

seconds until the timer is reset.

Enter the period of time for the delay time to transmit by pushing [PTT]

while [Lone Worker On Timer] and [Lone Worker Reminder Timer] are

activated.

(Default: Enable, 10)

· Range: 1 ~ 255 (×100 milliseconds)

L If this item is set to a longer period of time, you can reset [Lone Worker On

Timer] and [Lone Worker Reminder Timer] by momentary pushing [PTT]

without transmitting.

L Hold down [PTT] for more than the set period of time in this item to transmit.

NOTE: The RoIP Gateway should not be used when high reliability is necessary. The communication cannot be made, depending on the environment around the RoIP Gateway, such as the consumption of a battery, the signal environment, or the access point or network status. Use the [Emergency] and [Lone Worker] functions as a supplementary function.
6-45
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

46 47 48
49 50

46 Buffer Type 

Select the buffer type to control any interrupted sound. (Default: Dynamic)
· Static
The buffer time is set [Receive Buffer Size]. Set the buffer time to between 20 and 500 milliseconds to keep the audio from breaking up. A shorter value improves the delay, but it may frequently break the audio signal.

· Dynamic The buffer time changes according to the audio fluctuation.

6-46
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

46 47 48
49 50

47 TOS type 

Select the TOS (Type-Of Service) format.

(Default: TOS)

· Not used: The TOS function is disabled.

· TOS:

Sends the 8 bit VoIP packets to the TOS field in the IP header using the TOS format. Sets to between 1 (lowest) and 3 bits (Priority level) or 4 and 7 (highest) bits (Type of Service), based on the RFC1349. The 1 bit remaining is not used, and is fixed as 0.

· Diffserv: Sends the 8 bit VoIP packets to the TOS field in the IP header using the Diffserv (Differentiated Service) format. Sets to between 1 and 6 bits (DSCP). The 2 bits remaining are not used, and are fixed as 0.

6-47
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

46 47 48
49 50

48 Media (RTP) 

Select the Priority level and Service type of the sent VoIP packets. L The item is not displayed when [TOS Type] (47) is set to "Not used."

· Media (RTP) Priority Level Set the TOS priority level to between 0 (lowest) and 7 (highest). (Default: 7)

· Media (RTP) Service Type Set the TOS service type code to between 0 and 15.

(Default: 0)

· Media (RTP) DSCP

Set the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) code to between

0 and 63.

(Default: 56)

- This item is displayed when the [TOS Type] (47) is set to "Diffserv."

6-48
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

46 47 48
49 50

49 Antenna Type  50 IP Address Settings 

Select the antenna that the IP100H will use. (Default: Transceiver's Setting)

· Transceiver's Setting Uses the last antenna set by the CS-IP100H or the RoIP Gateway.

· Internal Antenna
Uses the internal antenna when you want to: · Reduce the communication range. · Limit the communication area and improve security. · Reduce electrical interference among Wireless LAN transceivers. · Control the communication speed in an environment where some
access points are installed in a comparatively small area.

· External Antenna
Uses the external antenna. The external antenna extends the communication range.

Select the IP100H's IP settings.

(Default: Transceiver's Setting)

· Transceiver's Setting Uses the last IP setting set by the CS-IP100H or the RoIP Gateway.

· DHCP Client Selects the DHCP Client when the IP address is automatically obtained by a DHCP server.

L If necessary, enter the [Primary DNS Server] or [Secondary DNS Server] settings.
6-49
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

46 47 48
49 50

50 IP Address Settings ............

· Static IP Selects the Static IP address, if it is specified according to your network environment.

L Enter the default gateway address, if your network connects to a different
network. L If necessary, enter the [Primary DNS Server] or [Secondary DNS Server]
settings.

6-50
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

51 52

53 54 55

56 57

58

59 60

51 Provisioning Server 

Enter an IP address or Host name of the Provisioning Server for the

IP100H, of up to 63 characters.

L When the RoIP Gateway is used as its Provisioning Server, this entry is not

necessary.

52 Accept Reboot Command from

Other than the Master Controller Select whether or not the IP100Hs can be rebooted by the other than

the specified Provisioning server (51).

(Default: Disable)

L The RoIP Gateway and IP1000C are compatible with this function.

(As of May, 2019)

53 SNTP Server 
54 Automatic Firmware Updating at Power ON 

Enter the IP address of the device that is specified as the SNTP server for the IP100H. L When the RoIP Gateway is used as its SNTP Server, this entry is not
necessary.
Select whether or not the IP100H will use the Automatic Update function. (Default: Enable (with Automatic Reboot))
· Disable Disables the automatic firmware updating when the IP100H is turned ON.
· Enable (without Automatic Reboot) When this setting is set to "Enable (without Automatic Reboot)," the IP100H works as follows. 1. The IP100H confirms the latest firmware in the RoIP Gateway when it is turned ON. 2. The IP100H automatically downloads the firmware if it needs to be updated. 3. The IP100H will be updated when it is turned ON again.
· Enable (with Automatic Reboot) When this setting is set to "Enable (with Automatic Reboot)," the IP100H works as follows. 1. The IP100H confirms the latest firmware in the RoIP Gateway when it is turned ON. 2. The IP100H automatically downloads the firmware if it needs to be updated. 3. The IP100H is updated automatically, and then it is rebooted. L You can check the firmware version of the IP100H on the [TOP] menu.

6-51

https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings  Transceiver Settings

51 52

53 54 55

56 57

58

59 60

55 Firmware Server 56 SYSLOG Host IP Address 57 SYSLOG Severity  58 Read/Write Password 
59 <Apply>  60 <Reset> 

Enter an IP Address or Host name of the Firmware Server for the
IP100H, of up to 63 characters. L When the RoIP Gateway is used as its Firmware Server, this entry is not
necessary.

Enter the SYSLOG host's address. L The host device must have the SYSLOG server function.

Select the log information to send to the SYSLOG host. The SYSLOG

host is sent to another host that is set in the [SYSLOG Host IP Address]

(56).

(Default: M DEBUG M INFO M NOTICE)

L Enter a check mark to send the log entries.

Enter a password of up to 16 characters. The password is used when reading from, or writing to the IP100H, or updating the firmware using
the CS-IP100H*. * CS-IP100H is the cloning software for the IP100H, and can be
downloaded from the Icom website.

Click to apply the entries. L Some parts of the entries are displayed in [Transceiver Setting List], such
as the Transceiver Model, Name, Unit ID, Use ID List, Area Call, Message, Status, and Option Key.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-52
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Transceiver Settings screen
Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings
 Copy Transceiver Settings
The individual settings in the [Transceiver Settings] screen can be copied to another IP100H. L IP address settings are not copied.

1 23

1 Check Box  2 <Apply> 
3 <Reset> 

Enter a check mark to [All] or the [Unit ID] that you want to copy the settings to.
Click to apply the entries. L The entries in the [Transceiver Settings] of the Source Transceiver are
copied to the transceiver settings that have a check mark in [Check Box] (1).
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset, after clicking <Apply>

Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Settings
 Transceiver Setting List
Display the list of the registered IP100Hs. L When verifying the contents, or editing the settings, select the individual number in the Unit ID.

6-53
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Wireless LAN screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Wireless LAN
 Wireless LAN
Register wireless LAN settings that are commonly used by the IP100Hs. You can individually set the common settings to each registered group in [Profile] on the [Common Settings] screen. If any setting in this screen has been changed, you must reboot the IP100Hs.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7

8

9

10 11 12

1 No. 
2 Name  3 Scan Mode 

Select a group number between 1 and 20 to assign to the IP100Hs.

Up to 20 groups can be registered.

(Default: 1)

Enter a Group name of up to 31 characters.

(Default: Blank)

Select the frequency band that the IP100H uses. (Default: M 11g, M11a (M W52, M W53, M W56))
Selecting "11g" includes "11b." L Access points that comply with the wireless LAN standards can be used with
the IP100H.

6-54
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Wireless LAN screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Wireless LAN  Wireless LAN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7

8

9

10 11 12

4 Channel 

Select the channel that you want to scan when the IP100H uses 2.4

GHz (11g).

(Default: Automatic (1-13))

L When you specify a channel, select "Static" in the [Channel], and specify a

channel that you use in [Static Channel].

5 Power Level

Set the IP100H transmit power level to High, Middle or Low. (Default: High)
L When "High" is set, the transmission distance of the IP100H is maximum. Or when setting to a lower level, the distance will be reduced.
L Power Level is set to a lower level when you want to: · Reduce the communication range. · Limit the communication area and improve security. · Reduce electrical interference among Wireless LAN transceivers. · Control the communication speed in an environment where some access
points are installed in a comparatively small area.

6-55
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Wireless LAN screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Wireless LAN  Wireless LAN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7

8

9

10 11 12

6 Roaming Threshold  7 SSID 

Set the received signal strength level when the IP100H starts roaming. The settable level is between 1 and 100 dBm. (Default: 75 (dBm)) L When setting to a high level (example: 50 dBm), it becomes easy to start
roaming. Or when setting to a low level (example: 90 dBm), it becomes difficult to start roaming.
Enter an SSID that is the same as that of the wireless access point. Enter up to 32 characters, using numbers, symbols and letters (both lower and upper case). Be careful of the difference between lower and upper case letters.

L Information · Up to 10 SSIDs can be registered. · The SSID is used to separate the wireless network groups.
You cannot connect to different SSID groups. · If two or more wireless access points exist in the same area, each wireless
network group is identified by the SSID (wireless network name). · If you register two or more SSIDs, the IP100H connects to the SSID which
has the strongest radio signal. · For any other wireless device, this may be called ESSID. · The setting data before version 2.04 automatically moves to the top of the
SSID setting.
NOTE: You cannot apply the Wireless LAN settings when: · The setting for the same "SSID"(6) and "Encryption" (7) as that you
entered already exists. · The top of the SSID setting overlaps with other Wireless LAN (a different
value is set in "No." (1)) settings.

6-56
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Wireless LAN screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Wireless LAN  Wireless LAN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7

8

9

10 11 12

8 Authentication 

Select the authentication method that is the same as that of the

wireless access point.

(Default: Open System/Shared Key)

L Be sure to verify the Access point setting, because the terminals and access

points cannot communicate using different authentication methods.

About authentication methods
· Open System/Shared Key
When accessing a wireless access point, "Open System" and "Shared Key" are automatically recognized. If the Encryption key matches the key in the Access point, they can communicate.

· Open System
When accessing a wireless access point, confirming the encryption is not necessary.

· WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
The "WPA-PSK" and "WPA2-PSK" authentications are automatically recognized.

The combination of the Authentication and Encryption

None WEP RC4 TKIP/AES

Open System
  

Open System/ Shared Key 



WPA-PSK WPA2-PSK
 


6-57
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Wireless LAN screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Wireless LAN  Wireless LAN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7

8

9

10 11 12

9 Encryption 

Select the encryption type that is the same as that of the wireless

access point.

(Default: None)

L Be sure to verify the access point setting, because the terminals and access

points cannot communicate using different encryption.

About the encryption types
· None
No data is encrypted. L This option can be selected when [Authentication] (8) is set to "Open
System" or "Open System/Shared Key."

· WEP RC4
It is an encryption type that can communicate when the encryption
keys match. L You can set the encryption key length to between 64 (40) and 128 (104) bits. L You can select this option when [Authentication] (8) is set to "Open
System" or "Open System/Shared Key."

· TKIP/AES
Either the "TKIP" or "AES" encryptions are automatically recognized when connecting to a wireless access point. L You can select this option when [Authentication] (8) is set to "WPA-PSK/
WPA2-PSK."

6-58
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Wireless LAN screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Wireless LAN  Wireless LAN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7

8

9

10 11 12

10 WEP Encryption Key or PSK (Pre-Shared Key) 

· WEP Encryption Key Enter the encryption key that is the same as that of the wireless access point.

L This option can be selected when [Authentication] (8) is set to "Open System" or "Open System/Shared Key."
L Enter hexadecimal numbers with numbers (0 to 9) and letters (A to F). Or enter ASCII characters. The key length is same as the displayed digits, 10 or 26 using hexadecimal numbers, or half of the displayed digits, 5 or 13 characters using ASCII characters.
· PSK (Pre-Shared Key) Enter the pre-shared key that is the same as that of the wireless access point.

L This option can be selected when [Authentication] (8) is set to "WPA-PSK/ WPA2-PSK."
L Enter hexadecimal numbers with numbers (0 to 9) and letters (A to F). Or enter ASCII characters. The key length is 64 digits using hexadecimal number, or 8 to 63 characters using ASCII characters.

6-59
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Wireless LAN screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Wireless LAN  Wireless LAN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7

8

9

10 11 12

11 <Apply>  12 <Reset> 

Click to apply the entries. L The entries are displayed in [List of Wireless LAN Entries].
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-60
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Wireless LAN screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Wireless LAN
 List of Wireless LAN Entries
Display the list of the wireless LAN settings.

12 3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 
3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit the entries in [Wireless LAN].
Click to delete the selected entry. L After clicking <Delete>, the entry cannot be recalled.
Click to delete all the entries. L After clicking <Delete All>, the entries cannot be recalled.

6-61
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
ID List screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > ID List
 ID List Common Settings
Select an ID list that the IP100Hs will use. L You can individually specify an ID list to the groups that the IP100Hs belong to in [Profile] on the [Common Settings]
screen. L If any entries on this screen have been changed, you must reboot the IP100H.

ID List Common Setting Number

Select the group number between 1 and 50, and then enter IDs that the IP100Hs will use. L When the group name or IDs are registered in the group, they are displayed
as shown below.

Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > ID List
 ID List Advanced Settings
Enter the group name that is selected in [ID List Common Settings].

1

23

1 Name 
2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

Enter a group name of up to 31 characters. The group is selected in [ID List Common Setting] on the [ID List] screen. When the group is selected on the [ID List] and [Profile] screens, the group name is displayed.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-62
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

ID List screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > ID List
 Save or Write the ID List Setting
You can save an ID list file on your PC, or load an ID list file to the RoIP Gateway. L If any IP100H settings have been changed, you must reboot it.

1

2
L This is an example of when Group 1 is selected in [ID List Common Setting]. When a name is registered in a group, the name is also displayed.

1 Load Settings from File  2 Save to File 

Load an ID list file, which is saved on [Save to File] (2), to the RoIP Gateway. Click <Browse> to select the file to load. Select the target file on screen, and click <Open>. The selected file is displayed in [Load Settings from File]. Click <Write> after selecting the target file. Then, the selected file is loaded to [ID List Entries]. L When the file is loaded, the previous data in [ID List Entries] is deleted. L If you select the file that is saved on the [Settings Restore] screen in the
[Management] menu, the setting is overwritten.
Save an ID list file, which is listed in [ID List Entries], to your PC. Click <Save>, and then <Save> on the box to save an ID list file (a CSV file) to your PC. L A file name varies, depending on the group number in [ID List Common
Settings]. For example, the file name becomes "tn01_id_list001.csv" when Group 1 of Tenant 1 is selected.

6-63
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
ID List screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > ID List  Save or Write the ID List Setting  About the rules of a CSV file for the ID list
Icom is not responsible for writing another ID list file except a saved ID list file or an ID list file that is edited, as shown below. Format of a CSV file for the ID list file

Column

Title

Description

A Index

Group name: Up to 31 characters, No.: 1 ~ 50 Do not duplicate the number

B Name

Up to 32 characters

C Call Type

indi: Individual, group: Group, tel: Telephone

D Destination ID (Individual/Group) Up to 4 characters

E Destination ID (Telephone)

Up to 31 digits using numbers and symbols (#, )

F Talkgroup

0: Disable, 1: Enable

6-64
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

ID List screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > ID List
 ID List
Enter target IDs in the group that is selected in [ID List Common Settings]. L You can enter up to 50 target IDs in each group.

1

2

3

4

5

67

L This is an example of when "Enter individually" is selected in the "Add Type" (1). When a name is registered in a group, the name is also displayed.

1 Add Type 

Select [Enter Individually] or [Select From List] in the [Add Type]. When [Select From List] is selected, the Destination IDs that are registered on the [Transceiver Registration] screen or [Destination Settings] screen, are displayed. L By selecting [All], you can select or cancel all entries in the list. L When [Select From List] is selected, you can enter a name of up to 32
characters.

2 No.  3 Name 

Select a number to register the destination. Up to 50 destinations can be registered to a group.
Enter a destination name of up to 32 characters.

6-65
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

ID List screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > ID List  ID List

1

2

3

4

5

6 7

L This is an example of when "Enter individually" is selected in the "Add Type" (1). When a name is registered in a group, the name is also displayed.

4 Call Type 

Select the Call type. Options: Individual, Group, Talkgroup, or Telephone

5 Destination ID  6 <Apply> 

Enter a 4 digit target individual ID, group ID or talkgroup ID. When "Telephone" is selected as [Call Type] (4), enter a target phone number of up to 31 digits using numbers and symbols (#, ).
Click to apply the entries. L The entries are displayed in [ID List Entries].

7 <Reset> 

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-66
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

ID List screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > ID List
 ID List Entries
Displays the list of entered Group Calls.

1 2

3

L This is an example of when Group 1 is selected in [ID List Common Settings]. When a name is registered in a group, the name is also displayed.

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 
3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit the entries in [ID List].
Click to delete the selected entry. L After clicking <Delete>, the entry cannot be recalled.
Click to delete all the entries. L After clicking <Delete All>, the entries cannot be recalled.

6-67
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Messages screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Messages
 Message Group
Select to register a message that the IP100Hs will use. L You can individually specify the message group that the IP100Hs belong to in "Message List" in [Profile] on the Profile
screen. (Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile > Profile > Message List) L If any entries on this screen have been changed, you must reboot the IP100H.

Message Group Number 

Select a group number between 1 and 50, and then enter the messages that the IP100Hs will use. L When the group name or messages are registered in the group, they are
displayed as shown below.

Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Messages
 Message Group Detail
Enter the group name that is selected in [Message Group].

1

23

1 Name 
2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

Enter a group name of up to 31 characters. The group is selected in [Message Group] on the [Message] screen. L When the group is selected on the [Messages] screen and [Profile] screen,
the group name is displayed.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-68
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Messages screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Messages
 Save or Write the Message Setting
You can save a message file on your PC, or load a message file to the RoIP Gateway. L If any IP100H settings have been changed, you must reboot it.

1
2 This is an example of when Group 1 is selected in [Message Group]. When a name is registered in a group, the name is also displayed.

1 Load Settings from File  2 Save to File 

Load a message file, which is saved on "Save to File" (2), to the RoIP Gateway. Click <Browse> to select the file to load. Select the target file on screen, and click <Open>. The selected file is displayed in "Load Settings from File". Click <Write> after selecting the target file. Then, the selected file is loaded to [Messages]. L The previous data in [Messages] is overwritten the loaded data. L If you select the file that is saved on the Settings Restore screen in the
[Management] menu, the setting is overwritten.
Save a message file, which is listed in the [Message], to your PC. Click <Save>, and then <Save> on the box to save a message file (a CSV file) to your PC. L The file name varies, depending on the group number in [Message Group].
For example, the file name becomes "tn01_msg_list001.csv" when Group 1 of Tenant 1 is selected.

6-69
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Messages screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Messages  Save or Write the Message Setting  About the rules of a CSV file for the message file
Icom is not responsible for writing another message file except a saved message file or a message file that is edited as shown below. Format of a CSV file for the message file

Column Title A Index B Message

Description
Group name: Up to 31 characters, No.: 1 ~ 10 Do not duplicate the number Up to 32 characters

6-70
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Messages screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Messages
 Message List
Enter messages in the group that is selected in [Message Group]. You can transmit fixed message of up to 32 characters. L You can enter up to 10 messages in each message group.

When a name is registered in a group, the name is also displayed.

12

1 <Apply>  2 <Reset> 

Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-71
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Status screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Status
 Status Settings
Select to register a status that the IP100Hs use. L You can program statuses of up to 32 characters. You can enter up to 10 statuses. L If any entries on this screen have been changed, you must reboot the IP100H.
1

23

1 Check Box 
2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

Click a Check Box to display a status name on the IP100H. L When the box is not checked, the status name is not displayed on the
IP100H, even if you entered it. When the status name is not entered, the status number is displayed on the IP100H only if the box is checked. L You can check or uncheck them all at once by clicking [All].
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-72
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Profile screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile
 Profile List
Display the entries that are entered in [Common Settings].
1

23 4

1 <Add>  2 <Edit>  3 <Delete> 
4 <Delete All> 

Click to add an new profile.
Click to edit the entries in [Profile].
Click to delete the selected entry. L After clicking <Delete>, the entry cannot be recalled.
Click to delete all the entries. L After clicking <Delete All>, the entries cannot be recalled.

6-73
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Profile screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile
 Profile
Individually assign an ID list, message list or receive notification tone to the group that the IP100H belongs to. L After the setting is completed, you must reboot the IP100H.

1
2 3 4 5

1 No.  2 Name  3 Wireless LAN 
4 ID List  5 Message List 

Select a profile between 1 and 50, to assign to the group that IP100H belongs to.

Enter a profile name of up to 31 characters. The profile name is displayed in [Profile List] on the [Profile] screen.

Select the wireless LAN setting that is commonly used by the IP100Hs

in the group.

(Default: Transceiver's Setting)

· Transceiver's Setting
Uses the last wireless LAN setting that was set by the CS-IP100H or the RoIP Gateway.

· 1 (Name) to 20 (Name) Select a number that was entered on the [Wireless LAN] screen.

Select an ID list that is commonly used by the IP100Hs in the group.
(Default: 1) L Select an ID number that is registered on the [ID list] screen.

Select a Message list that is commonly used by the IP100Hs in the group.
(Default: 1) L Select a message number that is registered in [Messages].

6-74
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Profile screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile  Profile
6 7 8 9 10 11

6 Controller IP Address Notify

Enter the IP address or host name of the controller that is selected as
the server of IP100H. Enter an IP address or host name of up to 63 characters. L If you use the RoIP Gateway as a server, you must not set this item.

7 Registration Interval 

Enter the transmit interval for the registration information that the

IP100Hs will use.

(Default: 60)

· Range: 30 ~ 300 (seconds) in 1 second steps

L Generally use the default setting.

L When the interval period is short, and an IP100H goes out of the

communication area, the IP100H registration on the RoIP Gateway can be

updated earlier. Therefore, if the IP100H receives an Individual call, the RoIP

Gateway can quickly reply "No response" as a Target availability check.

8 Registration Retry Interval (If failed) 

Enter a retry interval when the IP100H fails to register to the RoIP

Gateway.

(Default: 10)

· Range: 1 ~ 30 (seconds)

9 Number of Registration Retries (If failed) 

Enter a number of registration retries if the IP100H fails to register to

the RoIP Gateway.

(Default: 2)

· Range: 1 ~ 10

10 Expire Time 

The RoIP Gateway check the IP100Hs connection status in this interval.
(Default: 180) · Range: [Registration Interval] (7) setting +1 ~ 900 (seconds)
L Generally use the default setting. L You cannot set this setting to shorter than the [Registration Interval] (7) setting.

11 Calling Notice Tone 

Select a notice tone for calling.

(Default: Tone 1)

· Options: Not Use, or Tone 1 ~ Tone 8

L This tone can be individually assigned to each call type, "Individual Call,"

"Group Call," "All Call," and "Telephone."

6-75
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Profile screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile  Profile

12 13
14 15 16

17

18 19

12 Success  13 Failure  14 Notification Tone 

Select a notice tone for a successful connection.

(Default: Enable)

L When an Individual call, Message call, Status call or telephone call

connection is successful, the Notice Tone sounds.

L When [Target Availability Check] on the [Transceiver Settings] screen is set

to "Disable," the Notice Tone will not sound.

Select a notice tone for connection failure.

(Default: Enable)

L When an Individual call, Message call, Status call or telephone call

connection fails, the Notice Tone sounds.

L When [Target Availability Check] on the [Transceiver Settings] screen is set

to "Disable," the Notice Tone will not sound.

Select a notice tone when a call is received.

(Default: Not Use)

· Options: Not Use, or Tone 1 ~ Tone 8

L This tone can be individually assigned to each call type, "Individual Call,"

"Group Call," "All Call," "Telephone," and "Message."

6-76
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Profile screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile  Profile

12 13 14 15 16
17
18 19

15 Ringer Setting 16 Number of Notifications 

Select a notice type between "Pocket Beep" and "P-Bell."
(Default: P-Bell) L This item can be selected when [Notification Tone] (14) is set to "Tone 1" to
"Tone 8." L You cannot select this item for a Message call.

· Pocket Beep
When a specified call is received, the IP100H sounds the Notification Tone, and the notification icon blinks.

· P-Bell
When a specified call is received, the IP100H sounds the Notification Tone. The received audio is muted until you reply to the call. L After pushing [PTT] on the IP100H, the mute will be released.

Blinks

Displayed

10/3 12:57 All
When the Pocket beep is active

10/3 12:57 All
When the P-bell is ON

Select a notification number of "Continuous."

(Default: 3)

· Options: 1, 3, 10, or 20

L You can select this item when [Notification Tone] (14) is set to "Tone 1" to

"Tone 8."

L You cannot select this item for a Message call.

6-77
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Profile screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile  Profile

12 13
14 15 16

17

18 19

17 Courtesy Beep 
18 Out of Service Area Notice Tone 
19 Sidetone Mute

Select a Notice Tone when a received call is finished. (Default: Tone 1) L This tone can be individually assigned to each call type, "Individual Call,"
"Group Call," "All Call," and "Telephone." L You can select "Not Use" or "Tone 1" to "Tone 8." L After each received call is completed, the IP100H will sound the specified tone.
Select whether or not the IP100H sounds the Out of service area Notice Tone. (Default: Disable)
When "Enable" is selected, the IP100H sounds the Notice Tone when it goes out the service area or returns to the service area.
Select whether or not the IP100H uses the Side Tone Mute function. (Default: Disable)
When "Enable" is selected, the IP100H mutes the sidetone or monitor audio when it goes out the service area. At that time, you cannot hear your voice from a head set or earphone speaker. L When "Monitor" or "Sidetone" is set to "Disable" in the Transceiver Settings
menu, this function is not activated.

6-78
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Profile screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile  Profile

20 21
22 23 24
25
26 27

20 Destination ID 
21 Caller ID Display (for All and Group Calls) 
22 Date Format

Select a destination ID that will be displayed after returning to the

standby mode.

(Default: Disable)

· Disable:

Displays the destination ID

10/8 16:57

or call type that is specified

All

in [Destination ID] on the [Transceiver Settings] screen.

Destination ID (Call type)

· Transmit:

Displays the IDs that the IP100H recently called.

· Transmit and Receive: Displays either IDs that the IP100H recently called or

was called by.

· All Operations:

Displays either IDs that the IP100H recently called,

was called by or displays the ID list/History.

Select whether or not the IP100H displays the Caller ID in the All call or

Group call.

(Default: Disable)

· Disable: When the IP100H or IP100FS receives an All call or Group call, only

the Call type is displayed.

· Enable: When the IP100H or IP100FS receives an All call or Group call,

both Call type and Caller ID are displayed.

· When receiving an All Call

10/8 1657 All

Alternately displayed

10/8 1657 Sales 1

· When receiving an All Call Message

10/8 1657 All[Sales 1]GatherJ Received message
Select a date format to display on the IP100H's standby screen. (Default: MM/DD)

You can select "MM/DD," "DD/MM," "MM-DD," "DD-MM," "MM.DD," or "DD. MM." (MM: Month, DD: Day)

6-79
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Profile screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile  Profile

20 21
22 23 24
25
26 27

23 History Display  24 Talkgroup Selection  25 TalkBack Timer  26 TalkBack Timer (Telephone) 27 TalkBack Lock 

Set the call history display.

(Default: Enable)

· Disable: Call histories are not displayed on the IP100H, even if you push the [ ] key.

· Enable: Call histories are displayed on the IP100H when you push the [ ] key.

Set the key to select the Talkgroup.

(Default: FUNC Key)

· FUNC Key: Select the Talkgroup by pushing the [FUNC] key.

· ID LIST Key: Select the Talkgroup by pushing the [ ] key.

Enter a time between 1 and 30 seconds that the IP100H will return to the standby mode after a received signal disappears.
(Default: 5 (seconds)) L When "Disable" is selected, the IP100H returns to the standby mode
(standby screen) as soon as the status indicator goes out.

Enter a time between 0 and 600 seconds that the IP100H will return to the standby mode after a received signal from a telephone disappears.
(Default: 15 (seconds)) L When "0" is selected, the TalkBack timer (Telephone) is disabled. In that
case, the connection does not terminate until the telephone hangs up, or the
IP100H terminates the call by pushing the [Option] key.

Select whether or not the TalkBack Lock function is "Disable" or "Enable." (Default: Enable)
· Enable: When another call is received in the TalkBack timer time after a call is finished and the IP100H returns to the standby mode, accepts to receive it if higher priority level call is
received, or refuses if the same or lower priority level call is received than the finished call. After the TalkBack timer has passed, a new call can be received.
· Disable: Accepts to receive a new call after your current call is finished.

6-80

https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Profile screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile  Profile

28 29 30 31 32

33

34 35

28 TOT 
29 TOT Timer  30 Penalty Time  31 TOT Beep 

Select whether or not the IP100H uses the Time-out timer.
(Default: Disable) L When "Enable" is selected, the [TOT Timer] (29), [Penalty Timer] (30), [TOT
Beep] (31), [TOT on Telephone Call] (32) are displayed. L This function is useful when the IP100H's PTT switch has accidentally been
held down.

Set the Time-out timer. The timer limits the IP100H's continuous

transmission.

(Default: 180)

· Range: 11 and 600 (seconds)

L When the period of time has passed, transmitting automatically stops.

Set the TOT Penalty time. After the [TOT timer] (29) period ends, the

TOT Penalty timer starts and inhibits the user from transmitting during

the penalty period.

(Default: 30)

· Range: 1 ~ 600 (seconds)

Select whether or not the IP100H uses the TOT beep function.
(Default: Enable) L When "Enable" is selected, a beep sounds 10 seconds before the period of
time that is set in the [TOT Timer] (29) ends.

6-81
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER
Profile screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile  Profile
28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35

32 TOT on Telephone Call
33 Use PBX Connection  34 <Apply>  35 <Reset> 

Select whether or not the IP100H uses the Time-out timer on Telephone

Call.

(Default: Enable)

L When "Disable" is set, transmitting does not stop, even if the period of time

that is set in the [TOT Timer] (29) has passed during a telephone call.

When a phone number from the IP100H is not registered in the

[Destination Settings], select "Transceiver Controller Telephone

Connection."

(Default: None)

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

6-82
https://manual-hub.com/

6 TRANSCEIVER CONTROLLER

Profile screen
Transceiver Controller > Common Settings > Profile
 Profile Batch Setting

1 2

1 Range  2 Refer to 

Sets a range of collective Profiles.
Click <Add> to register consecutive Profiles collectively. L If a Profile is already registered, "Overwrite the entry" is displayed.
Selects the default settings or the programmed settings to refer to. (Default: Default)

6-83
https://manual-hub.com/

CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

7 Section

Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen ............................................................................................. 7-3 M Digital Transceiver Connection ............................................................................................. 7-3 M Digital Transceiver System ................................................................................................ 7-4 M Digital Transceiver Connection System: NXDN-Trunking ...................................................... 7-5 M Communication Settings System: NXDN-Trunking ............................................................... 7-7 M Bridge Communication System: NXDN-Trunking ............................................................... 7-8 M Digital Transceiver Connection System: NXDN-Conventional ................................................ 7-9 M Communication Settings System: NXDN-Conventional ................................................... 7-11 M Digital Transceiver Connection System: dPMR Mode 2 ...................................................... 7-12 M Communication Settings System: dPMR Mode 2 ............................................................ 7-15 M DTMF Dialing ............................................................................................................... 7-16
EXT I/O (EXT) screen ............................................................................................................ 7-17 M EXT I/O Port Mode ......................................................................................................... 7-17 M EXT I/O ........................................................................................................................ 7-18 M Transceiver Model ......................................................................................................... 7-19 M Transceiver Connection Transceiver Model: General Setting ............................................. 7-20 M Bridge Communication ................................................................................................... 7-27 M Transceiver Control......................................................................................................... 7-28 M DTMF Dialing ............................................................................................................... 7-30 M PTT Control Setting ...................................................................................................... 7-31 M Receive Detection Setting ................................................................................................ 7-32 M EXT I/O Device Connection ............................................................................................. 7-33 M Bridge Communication ................................................................................................... 7-34 M EXT I/O Control ............................................................................................................ 7-35 M EXT Input Settings ......................................................................................................... 7-36 M EXT Output Settings ...................................................................................................... 7-43
Emergency Notification screen ................................................................................................ 7-51 M Bridge Communication ................................................................................................... 7-51
Microphone (MIC) screen ...................................................................................................... 7-52 M Bridge Communication ................................................................................................... 7-52 M Microphone Control......................................................................................................... 7-53 M Microphone Input Control ................................................................................................ 7-54 M Voice Output Control ...................................................................................................... 7-55
7-1
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
RoIP Gateway screen ............................................................................................................ 7-56 M RoIP Gateway ............................................................................................................... 7-56 M RoIP Gateway Connection ............................................................................................. 7-57 M RoIP Gateway Communication.......................................................................................... 7-59 M RoIP Gateway Control ................................................................................................... 7-60 M Bridge Communication ................................................................................................... 7-61
7-2
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)
 Digital Transceiver Connection
Select a digital transceiver to connect to the RoIP Gateway.

Port Selection 

Select a Digital Transceiver port to edit the settings. (Default: Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1))

7-3
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)
 Digital Transceiver System
Select a digital transceiver system that you want to connect the RoIP Gateway to.

System 

Select a digital transceiver system, and then click <Apply> to apply. (Default: NXDN Trunking)
L The settings on this screen will be initialized after clicking <Apply>.

7-4
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)
 Digital Transceiver Connection System: NXDN-Trunking
Edit the settings of the Digital transceiver to connect to the RoIP Gateway. You can connect a maximum of 4 digital transceivers to the network.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9
10 11
12

13
L The above screen shows an example for connecting the IC-FR5000 (with UC-FR5000 installed) to the Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1).
L The above screen shows when the Encryption is set to "Enable."

1 Connected Repeater's Address Enter the UC-FR5000's IP address.

2 Connected Repeater's Port Number 

Enter the Connection Receive Port number that is set in the UC-FR5000. Do not duplicate the other port number.
(Default: Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1): 41220 Default: Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2): 41221 Default: Digital Transceiver 3 (D-TRX3): 41222 Default: Digital Transceiver 4 (D-TRX4): 41223) · Range: 1 ~ 65535

3 Source Port Number 

Enter the Local Port number that is set in the UC-FR5000. Do not duplicate the other port number.
(Default: Default: Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1): 43000 Default: Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2): 43001 Default: Digital Transceiver 3 (D-TRX3): 43002 Default: Digital Transceiver 4 (D-TRX4): 43003)
· Range: 1 ~ 65535

4 Connection Key Code 

Enter the Key Code that is set in the UC-FR5000. (Default: ucfr5000)

5 Area Bit 

Turn the Area Bit function ON or OFF, according to the UC-FR5000

setting.

(Default: OFF)

6 Integrator Code 

Displays the Integrator Code that is set in the UC-FR5000.

7-5

https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)  Digital Transceiver Connection System: NXDN-Trunking

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9
10 11
12
13
L The above screen shows an example for connecting the IC-FR5000 (with UC-FR5000 installed) to the Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1).
L The above screen shows when the Encryption is set to "Enable."

7 System Code  8 Prefix ID 
9 Unit ID  10 Prefix ID  11 Talkgroup ID  12 Encryption 
13 Connection Status 

Displays the System Code that is set in the UC-FR5000.

Enter the Prefix ID (for NXDN Trunking) that is set in the UC-FR5000. (Default: 1)
· Range: 1 ~ 30

Enter the Unit ID that are set in the UC-FR5000. · Range: 1 ~ 2000

(Default: 1)

Enter the Prefix ID (for NXDN Trunking) that is set in the UC-FR5000. (Default: 1)
· Range: 1 ~ 30

Enter a Talkgroup ID. · Range: 1 ~ 2000

(Default: 1)

Select whether or not to enable the Encryption function. (Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an encryption key between 1 and

32767.

(Default: 1)

Click to connect or disconnect the transceiver, or to refresh the connection status.
L The buttons are grayed out when Connected Repeater's Address is blank. L The settings cannot be changed while connection is established. Click
<Disconnect> before changing the settings on this screen.

7-6
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)
 Communication Settings System: NXDN-Trunking
Edit the settings required for calling transceivers from the digital transceiver connected to the RoIP Gateway.

1
2
3 4 5

1 TalkBack 
2 RX All Call  3 Call Type  4 Destination Prefix ID  5 Destination ID 

Select whether or not to enable to talkback from a client transceiver,

when a digital transceiver that is connected to the RoIP Gateway has

called to the client transceiver.

(Default: Enable)

When the function is enabled, select the TalkBack time. (Default: 5)

· Range: 1 ~ 10 (seconds)

Select whether or not to permit all Talkgroups to receive a call. (Default: Disable)

Select a call type to call from the transceiver, that is connected to the

RoIP Gateway, to its client transceiver(s).

(Default: Group)

· Options: Individual, Group, or All

Enter a destination prefix ID of a client transceiver. · Range: 1 ~ 30

(Default: 1)

Displayed only when the Call Type (3) is set to "Individual" or "Group." Enter an Individual or Group ID of the client transceiver. (Default: 1) · Range: 1 ~ 2000.

7-7
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)
 Bridge Communication System: NXDN-Trunking
Set Talkback Time for calling digital transceivers from the digital transceiver connected to the RoIP Gateway.

TalkBack Time 

Select the TalkBack time. · Range: 1 ~ 10 (seconds)

(Default: 5)

7-8
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)
 Digital Transceiver Connection System: NXDN-Conventional
Edit the settings of the digital transceiver to connect to the RoIP Gateway. You can connect a maximum of 4 digital transceivers to the network.

1 2 3 4
5
6 7
8 9
10

11

L The above screen shows an example for connecting the IC-FR5000 (with UC-FR5000 installed) to the Digital
transceiver 1 (D-TRX1). L The above screen shows when the Digital Frame Packet (5) and Scrambler (11) are set to "enabled," and Specify
TX CC (10) is checked.

1 Connected Repeater's Address Enter the UC-FR5000's IP address.

2 TCP Port Number (Connection Port) 
3 UDP Port Number (Data Port) 

Enter the Connection Receive Port number that is set in the UCFR5000. Do not duplicate the other port number.
(Default: Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1): 41200 Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2): 41201 Digital Transceiver 3 (D-TRX3): 41202 Digital Transceiver 4 (D-TRX4): 41203)
· Range: 1024 ~ 65535
Enter the Data Receive Port number that is set in the UC-FR5000. Do not duplicate the other port number.
(Default: Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1): 41220 Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2): 41221 Digital Transceiver 3 (D-TRX3): 41222 Digital Transceiver 4 (D-TRX4): 41223)
· Range: 1024 ~ 65535

4 Connection Key Code 

Enter the Key Code that is set in the UC-FR5000. (Default: ucfr5000)

5 Digital Frame Packet 

Select whether or not to enable the Packet Encryption function,

according to the UC-FR5000 setting.

(Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an 8 digit Common key.

(Default: 00000000)

7-9

https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)  Digital Transceiver Connection System: NXDN-Conventional

1 2 3 4
5
6 7
8 9
10

11
L The above screen shows an example for connecting the IC-FR5000 (with UC-FR5000 installed) to the Digital transceiver 1 (D-TRX1).
L The above screen shows when the Digital Frame Packet (5) and Scrambler (11) are set to "enabled," and Specify TX CC (10) is checked.

6 Unit ID  7 Talkgroup ID  8 RX RAN  9 Specify TX RAN  10 Encryption 
11 Connection Status 

Enter a unit ID. · Range: 1 ~ 65519

(Default: 1)

Enter a Talkgroup ID. · Range: 1 ~ 65519

(Default: 1)

Enter an RX RAN code. · Range: 0 ~ 63

(Default: 1)

Check to separately enter the TX RAN.

(Default: Unchecked)

When checked, enter a TX RAN code between 0 and 63. (Default: 1)

Select whether or not to enable the Encryption function.

(Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an Encryption key between 1 and

32767.

(Default: 1)

Click to connect or disconnect the transceiver, or to refresh the connection status.
L The buttons are grayed out when Connected Repeater's Address is blank. L The settings cannot be changed while connection is established. Click
<Disconnect> before changing the settings on this screen.

7-10
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)
 Communication Settings System: NXDN-Conventional
Edit the settings required for calling transceivers from the digital transceiver connected to the RoIP Gateway.

1
2 3
4 5

1 TalkBack 
2 Digital SQL  3 RX All Call  4 Call Type  5 Destination ID 

Select whether or not to enable the TalkBack function. (Default: Enable)

When the TalkBack function is ON, Select the TalkBack Time.

· Range: 1 ~ 10 seconds

(Default: 5)

Select whether or not to enable the Digital Squelch function. (Default: Disable)

Select whether or not to permit all Talkgroups to receive a call. (Default: Disable)

Select a call type. · Options: Individual, Group, or All

(Default: Group)

Enter a destination ID. · Range: 1 ~ 65519.

(Default: 1)

7-11
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)
 Digital Transceiver Connection System: dPMR Mode 2
Configure the digital transceiver to connect to the RoIP Gateway. You can connect maximum of 4 digital transceivers through the network.

1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8 9 10

11

12
L The above screen shows an example for connecting the IC-FR5000 (with UC-FR5000 installed) to Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1).
L The above screen shows when the Digital Frame Packet (5) and Scrambler (11) are set to "Enable," and Specify TX CC (10) is checked.
1 Connected Repeater's Address Enter the UC-FR5000's IP address.

2 TCP Port Number (Connection Port) 

Enter the Connection Receive Port number that is set in the UC-FR5000. Do not duplicate the other port number.
(Default: Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1): 41200 Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2): 41201 Digital Transceiver 3 (D-TRX3): 41202 Digital Transceiver 4 (D-TRX4): 41203)
· Range: 1 ~ 65535

3 UDP Port Number (Data Port) 

Enter the Data Receive Port number that is set in the UC-FR5000. Do not duplicate the other port number.
(Default: Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1): 41220 Digital Transceiver 2 (D-TRX2): 41221 Digital Transceiver 3 (D-TRX3): 41222 Digital Transceiver 4 (D-TRX4): 41223)
· Range: 1 ~ 65535

4 Connection Key Code 

Enter the Key Code that is set in the UC-FR5000. (Default: ucfr5000)

7-12
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)  Digital Transceiver Connection System: dPMR Mode 2

1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8 9 10

11

12
L The above screen shows an example for connecting the IC-FR5000 (with UC-FR5000 installed) to Digital Transceiver 1 (D-TRX1).
L The above screen shows when the Digital Frame Packet (5) and Scrambler (11) are set to "Enable," and Specify TX CC (10) is checked.

5 Digital Frame Packet 
6 Unit ID 
7 Talkgroup ID (Start)  8 Talkgroup ID  9 RX CC  10 Specify TX CC 

Select whether or not to enable the Packet Encryption function,

according to the UC-FR5000 setting.

(Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an 8 digit Common key.

(Default: 00000000)

Enter a unit ID.
· Range: 1 ~ 9999999

(Default: Digital Transceiver (D-TRX1): 201 Digital Transceiver (D-TRX2): 202 Digital Transceiver (D-TRX3): 203 Digital Transceiver (D-TRX4): 204)

Enter a Talkgroup start ID. · Range: 1 ~ 9999999

(Default: 100000)

Enter a Talkgroup ID. · Range: 1 ~ 9999999

(Default: 100000)

Enter a CC for receiving. · Range: 0 ~ 63

(Default: 0)

Check to separately enter the TX CC.

(Default: Unchecked)

When checked, enter a TX CC code between 0 and 63. (Default: 0)

L Do not duplicate the RX CC.

7-13
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)  Digital Transceiver Connection System: dPMR Mode 2

1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8 9 10

11

12
L The above screen shows an example for connecting the IC-FR5000 (with UC-FR5000 installed) to the Digital transceiver 1 (D-TRX1).
L The above screen shows when the Digital Frame Packet (5) and Scrambler (11) are set to "enabled," and Specify TX CC (10) is checked.

11 Scrambler  12 Connection Status 

Check to enable the Scrambler function .

(Default: Disable)

When checked, enter a scrambler key between 1 and 32767. (Default: 1)

Click to connect or disconnect the transceiver, or to refresh the connection status. L The buttons are grayed out when Connected Repeater's Address is blank. L The settings cannot be changed while connection is established. Click
<Disconnect> before changing the settings on this screen.

7-14
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)
 Communication Settings System: dPMR Mode 2
Edit the settings required for calling transceivers from the digital transceiver connected to the RoIP Gateway.

1
2 3 4 5

1 TalkBack 
2 Digital SQL  3 RX All Call  4 Call Type  5 Destination ID 

Select whether or not to enable the TalkBack function. (Default: Disable) When the TalkBack function is ON, Select the TalkBack time.
(Default: 5) · Range: 1 ~ 10 seconds

Select whether or not to enable the Digital Squelch function. (Default: Disable)
Select whether or not to permit all Talkgroups to receive a call. (Default: Disable)

Select a call type. · Options: Individual, Group, or All
Enter a destination ID. · Range: 1 ~ 9999999

(Default: Group) (Default: 100000)

7-15
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

Digital Transceiver (D-TRX) screen
Connection Port Settings > Digital Transceiver (D-TRX)
 DTMF Dialing
Edit the details on DTMF Dialing.

1 2 3
4

L The screen above shows when "DTMF Dialing" (1) is set to "Enable."

1 DTMF Dialing 

Select "Enable" to use DTMF signaling. If enabled, set the details in the Timer.

(Default: Disable)

2 Permissible Tone Gap 

Select the period of time to detect that the last digit has been input. (Default: 5)
· Range: 1~10 (seconds)

3 OFF-hook Detect Timer 

Select the period of time to detect the OFF-hook control signal. (Default: 400)
· Range: 0~2000 (milliseconds) in 100 millisecond steps

4 ON-hook Detect Timer 

Select the period of time to detect the ON-hook control signal. (Default: 400)
· Range: 0~2000 (milliseconds) in 100 millisecond steps

L 3 and 4 are the timers for the Transceiver Special Number. (PBX > Special Number > Transceiver Special Number)

7-16
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT I/O Port Mode
Select the type of device, and then select its input/output mode of te EXT1 ~ EXT4 ports. NOTE: If you change an EXT I/O Port Mode, the settings on this screen will be initialized.

1 2

1 Connected Unit  2 EXT I/O Port Mode 

Select the type of device to connect to the EXT ports. (Default for EXT I/O 1 (EXT1): Transceiver Default for EXT I/O 2 (EXT2): Transceiver Default for EXT I/O 3 (EXT3): EXT I/O Unit Default for EXT I/O 4 (EXT4): EXT I/O Unit)
When "EXT I/O Unit" is selected, select the EXT input/output mode. (Default: Separate)
· Separate: Separately controls the external audio input/output. · Combined: Simultaneously controls the external audio input/output to and
from an external device. Select this option to connect an external device to A1/A2 (Audio output) and A3/A4 (Audio input) terminals.

7-17
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT I/O
Select an External I/O port on the RoIP Gateway to edit the settings.

EXT I/O Port 

Select an External I/O Port to edit the settings. (Default: EXT I/O (EXT1))

7-18
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Transceiver Model
This item is displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)

Transceiver Model 

Select a transceiver to connect the port selected in "EXT I/O Port." (Default: IC-F5060/F6060)
L Select "General Setting," if the transceiver requires detailed settings. L Follow the local laws and regulations when using transceivers other than the
options. L Remove the transceiver from the RoIP Gateway to change the Transceiver
Model. All settings will be reset to the defaults.

7-19
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Transceiver Connection Transceiver Model: General Setting
· This item is displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)

1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
11 12
L 8 ~ 10 are displayed only when Power ON/OFF Detection (7) is set to "Enable."

1 TX Volume Offset to the Transceiver 
2 RX Volume Offset from the Transceiver 
3 PTT Type 
4 PTT Logic 

Adjust the RoIP Gateway's transmitting audio level that is sent to the

connected transceiver.

(Default: 15)

· Range: 43 ~ +20 (dB)

L A higher level makes the microphone more sensitive to a small voice, and is

suitable for a quiet environment.

A lower level makes the microphone less sensitive to the voice, and is

suitable for a noisy environment with a louder voice.

Adjust the RoIP Gateway's audio level from the transceiver. (Default: 24) · Range: 74 ~ +21 (dB)

Select the PTT circuit type.

(Default: Separate PTT)

· Separate PTT:

The microphone line and PTT input line

are separated.

· Combined with Microphone Line: The PTT input line is superimposed on

the MIC input (A1 terminal).

Select the PTT logic. · Active High:
· Active Low:

(Default: Active Low) PTT line becomes "High" when [PTT] is pushed. (Active High) PTT line becomes "Low" when [PTT] is pushed. (Active Low)

7-20
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Transceiver Connection Transceiver Model: General Setting These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)

1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
11 12
L 8 ~ 10 are displayed only when Power ON/OFF Detection (7) is set to "Enable."

5 SQL Type  6 SQL Logic 
7 Power ON/OFF Detection 8 Power ON/OFF
Detection Signal 
9 Power ON/OFF Detection Signal Logic

Select the squelch signal type. · Separate SQL: · Combined with Speaker Line:

(Default: Separate SQL) The squelch signal is separately input. The squelch signal is superimposed on the speaker input line (A3 terminal).

Select the squelch detection type.

(Default: High)

· High: The squelch line becomes "High" while receiving a signal.

(Active High)

· Low: The squelch line becomes "Low" while receiving a signal.

(Active Low)

Select "Enable" to detect the transceivers power status (ON/OFF). (Default: Disable)

Select the PTT type to detect the transceivers power status (ON/OFF).

(Default: Use PTT Type)

· Separate PTT:

The microphone line and PTT input line

are separated.

· Combined with Microphone Line: The PTT input line is superimposed on

the MIC input (A1 terminal).

· Use PTT Type:

The PTT type selected in PTT type (3)

is used.

Select the logic to detect the transceivers power status (ON/OFF). (Default: High)
· High: Becomes High when the transceiver's power is ON. (Active high) · Low: Becomes Low when the transceiver's power is ON. (Active low)
7-21

https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Transceiver Connection Transceiver Model: General Setting These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)

1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
11 12
L 8 ~ 10 are displayed only when Power ON/OFF Detection (7) is set to "Enable."

10 Detection Invalidity Timer (OFF  ON) 
11 Use Pin A3 Bidirectional  12 Serial Communication 

Set the power ON/OFF detection delay time between 0 and 10000

milliseconds.

(Default: 0)

When power ON is detected, the RoIP Gateway mutes the audio input

from the transceiver. The detection delay is the amount of time that

the RoIP Gateway detects the power status before the RoIP Gateway

recognizes the power status.

L If "0" is set, the audio input from the transceiver is not muted, even if the

power ON status is detected.

Select "Enable" to use one common line (A3 terminal) as the MIC input

and AF output. If your transceiver commonly uses

1 line as the MIC input and AF output, select "Enable."(Default: Disable)

Select "Enable" to use serial communication.

(Default: Disable)

*Items 13 ~ 33 are displayed when "Enable" is selected.

7-22
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Transceiver Connection Transceiver Model: General Setting These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)

12 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 29 30 31 33 18 19
20 21 22 23 24

L 13 ~ 17 are displayed only when Serial Communication (12) is set to "Enable" L 27 ~ 33 and 18 are displayed only when Data Mode (17) is set to "Manual." L 19 ~ 24 are displayed only when Transceiver control (18) is set to "Enable."

13 Client Mode 

Select "Enable" to set the RoIP Gateway as the client in serial

communications.

(Default: Disable)

Serial Communication
device

Serial connection
OPC-2389

Client

IP connection

Destination (Server side)

Serial connection
OPC-2389

Serial Communication
device

Example: PC or Modem

Client Mode: Enable

Client Mode: Disable

7-23
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Transceiver Connection Transceiver Model: General Setting
These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)
12 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 29 30 31 33 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
L 13 ~ 17 are displayed only when Serial Communication (12) is set to "Enable" L 27 ~ 33 and 18 are displayed only when Data Mode (17) is set to "Manual." L 19 ~ 24 are displayed only when Transceiver control (18) is set to "Enable."
L The screen below shows when : · Serial Communication (12) is set to "Enable." · Client Mode (13) is set to "Enable."
12 13 25 26 15 16 27 28 29 30 31 32
7-24
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Transceiver Connection Transceiver Model: General Setting These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)

14 TCP Port Number  15 Communication Control  16 Signal Level  17 Data Mode 
18 Transceiver Control  19 Transceiver Mode  20 Call Type  21 Destination Prefix ID  22 Destination ID 
23 Source Prefix ID  24 Source ID 

Enter a port number between 1024 and 65535. (Default: EXT1=50000, EXT2=50001, EXT3=50002, EXT4=50003)

Select the communication type, Full-Duplex or Half Duplex. (Default: Full-Duplex)

Select the serial communication line logic voltage level. (Default: ±5V(RS-232C))
· Options: ±5V(RS-232C), 0V/3V (Logic), or 0V/5V (Logic)

Select the communication method for serial communication between a

device and the RoIP Gateway.

(Default: Auto)

· Auto: Automatically starts serial communication from a Virtual Serial Port

installed on your PC.

· Manual: Manually set serial communication method for a device.

*Items 27 ~ 31, and 33 are displayed when "Manual" is selected.

Select "Enable" to control the transceiver using serial communication. (Default: Disable)
*Items 19 ~ 24 are displayed when "Enable" is selected.

Select an operating mode.

(Default: NXDN Conventional)

· Options: NXDN Conventional, NXDN Trunking, dPMR, or SAT.

Select a call type. · Options: Individual, Group, or All

(Default: Group)

Enter a destination prefix ID. The ID may differ, depending on the

system.

(Default: Blank)

· Range: 0 ~ 30

Enter the default ID for the EXT port between 00001 and 9999999.
(Default: 1) L Enter an ID between 00001 and 99999 when the Destination Prefix ID (21) is
entered.

Enter a stations source prefix ID. The ID may differ, depending on the

system.

(Default: Blank)

· Range: 0 ~ 30

Enter a stations source ID between 00001 and 9999999. The ID is sent

to the destination.

(Default: 1)

L Enter an ID between 00001 and 99999 when the Source Prefix ID (23) is

entered.

7-25
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen

Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)

 Transceiver Connection Transceiver Model: General Setting
These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)

25 Server Address  26 Server Port Number 
27 Baud Rate  28 Data Bits  29 Parity  30 Stop Bits  31 Flow Control  32 Connection Status 
33 Session Timer 

Enter a destination RoIP Gateway's IP address.

Enter a destination RoIP Gateway's port number between 1024 and 65535.
(Default: EXT1=50000, EXT2=50001, EXT3=50002, EXT4=50003)

Select the serial communication baud rate between a device and the

RoIP Gateway.

(Default: 9600)

Select the number of bits for serial communication.

(Default: 8)

Select the parity bit.

(Default: none)

Select the stop bit length.

(Default: 1)

Select the Flow control option.

(Default: None)

Click to connect or disconnect the transceiver, or to refresh the connection status. L The buttons are grayed out when Connected Repeater's Address is blank. L The settings cannot be changed while connection is established. Click
<Disconnect> before changing the settings on this screen.

Set the time to cut the TCP session when there is no communication

from the host.

(Default: 30)

7-26
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Bridge Communication
These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)
Edit the Bridge Communication settings for transceivers connected to the EXT1 ~ EXT4 ports. These items are Displayed only when "Connection Unit" is set to "Transceiver."

1
2
3 4 5 6
L The above screen shows when Encryption (1) is set to "Enable." L 2~5 are not displayed when the Transceiver Model is set to "IC-SAT100."

1 Encryption  2 TalkBack 
3 Call Type  4 Destination Prefix ID  5 Destination ID  6 Source ID 

Select whether or not to enable the Encryption function.

(Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an encryption key between 1 and

32767.

(Default: 1)

Select whether or not to enable the TalkBack function. (Default: Enable) When the function is enabled, Select the TalkBack time.
(Default: 5) · Range: 1 ~ 10 (seconds)

Select a call type. · Options: Individual, Group, or All

(Default: Group)

Enter a destination prefix ID. The ID may differ, depending on the

system.

(Default: Blank)

· Range: 0 ~ 30

Enter the default ID for the EXT port between 00001 and 9999999.
(Default: 1) L Enter an ID between 00001 and 99999 when the Destination Prefix ID (4) is
entered.

Enter a stations source ID between 1 and 9999999. The ID is sent to the destinations.
(Default: EXT1=301, EXT2=302, EXT3=303, EXT4=304)

7-27
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Transceiver Control
These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)
Edit the control settings for transceivers connected to the EXT1 ~ EXT4 ports. These items are displayed only when "Connection Unit" is set to "Transceiver."

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9
L 2, 8 and 9 are displayed only when the Transceiver Model is set to "General Setting." L Only 5 and 6 are displayed when the Transceiver Model is set to "IC-SAT100."

1 Prioritized Receive  2 PTT Control 
3 Receive Detection 
4 Insert RX Audio to TX Audio 5 TX Volume 

Select "Enable" to keep receiving and inhibit the transmission, while the transceiver is receiving. The default value differs, depending on the Transceiver Mode.

Select the audio transmission method.

(Default: RTP)

· VOX:

According to the input audio signal level.

· RTP:

The RoIP Gateway sends the PTT control signal to the

transceiver during receiving an applicable RTP packet.

· PTT Always-ON: The RoIP Gateway always sends the PTT control signal to

the transceiver to transmit.

· No PTT Control: The RoIP Gateway does not send the PTT control signal to

the transceiver.

Select the received audio detection method. The default value differs,

depending on the Transceiver Mode.

· VOX:

According to the input audio signal level.

· SQL:

According to the squelch status (Open/Close)

When setting to "SQL," set also Pull-up Control ON or OFF.

· Always Receive:Always in the receive mode.

· PC CMD:

According to the PC command. (Displayed only when the

Transceiver Model is set to "General Settings.")

Select "Enable" to mix the audio from the repeater with the audio from

the telephone.

(Default: Disable)

L When "Enable" is selected, select "Disable" in Prioritized Receive (1).

Adjust the RoIP Gateway's transmitting audio level that is sent to the

connected transceiver.

(Default: 0)

· Range: 12 ~ +6 (dB)

7-28

https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Transceiver Control
These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)
Edit the control settings for transceivers connected to the EXT1 ~ EXT4 ports. These items are displayed only when "Connection Unit" is set to "Transceiver."

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9
L 2, 8 and 9 are displayed only when the Transceiver Model is set to "General Setting."

6 RX Volume  7 Additional Attack Time for
Beep Sound Elimination 
8 Echo Canceller 
9 Noise Canceller 

Adjust the RoIP Gateway's audio output level of the audio signal that is

received from the connected transceiver

(Default: 0)

· Range: 12 ~ +6 (dB)

Enter the period of time to mute the audio (including beep signals) from

the connected transceiver.

(Default: 400)

· Range: 0 ~ 1000 (seconds) in 5 millisecond steps

Select whether or not to enable the Echo Canceller function. The function reduces echo caused during duplex communication.
(Default: Disable)

Select whether or not to enable the Noise Canceller function. (Default: Disable)

7-29
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 DTMF Dialing
These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit (except for the Transceiver Model is set to "IC-SAT100.") (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)
Edit the DTMF Dialing settings.

1
2 3

4 L 2 ~ 4 are displayed only when the DTMF Dialing (1) is set to "Enable."

1 DTMF Dialing 

Select whether or not to use the DTMF Dialing function. (Default: Disable)

2 Permissible Tone Gap 

Select the period of time to detect that the last digit has been input. (Default: 5)
· Range: 1 ~ 10 (seconds)

3 OFF-hook Detect Timer 

Select the period of time to detect the OFF-hook control signal. (Default: 400)
· Range: 0 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 100 millisecond steps

4 ON-hook Detect Timer 

Select the period of time to detect the ON-hook control signal. (Default: 400)
· Range: 0 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 100 millisecond steps

L 3 and 4 are the timers for the Transceiver Special Number. (PBX > Special Number > Transceiver Special Number)

7-30
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 PTT Control Setting
These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit (except for the Transceiver Model is set to "IC-SAT100.") (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)
Edit the PTT control settings.

1 2 3 4
L 1 and 4 are displayed only when Connection Unit is set to "Transceiver," Transceiver Model is set to "General Setting," and PTT Control is set to "VOX."
L 2 and 3 are displayed only when Connection Unit is set to "Transceiver."

1 Attack Time  2 Release Time 
3 Voice Delay  4 VOX Threshold 

Set the TX Attack time to between 5 and 500 milliseconds. It is the

delay time before the VOX switch turns ON after an audio signal is

received through the network.

(Default: 50)

Set the RX Delay time. It is the delay time for the VOX switch to turn OFF after no audio signal is received through the network.
(Default: 500) L When the PTT Control in [Transceiver Control] is set to "RTP," the default
value is "200." · Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds)

Enter the amount of time to store the audio, in 5 millisecond steps. (Default: 200)
L When the PTT Control in [Transceiver Control] is set to "RTP," the default value is "300."
· Range: 0 ~ 1500 (milliseconds)

Enter the voice threshold level. · Range: 0 ~ 100 (%)

(Default: 40)

7-31
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Receive Detection Setting
These items are displayed when "Transceiver" is selected as a connected unit. (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode > EXT I/O 1 ~ 4 > Connected Unit) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O > EXT I/O Port)
Edit the DTMF Dialing settings.

1 2 3 4 5

L 1 and 4 are displayed only when "Connection Unit" is set to "Transceiver," and the "Receive Detection" is set to
"VOX." L 2 is displayed only when "Connection Unit" is set to "Transceiver," and the "Receive Detection" is set to "VOX" or
"SQL." L 3 is displayed only when "Connection Unit" is set to "Transceiver." L 5 is displayed only when "Connection Unit" is set to "Transceiver," and the "Receive Detection" is set to "SQL."

1 Attack Time  2 Release Time 
3 Voice Delay  4 VOX Threshold  5 Ignore Time 

Set the TX Attack time. It is the delay time before the VOX switch turns ON after an audio signal is received through the network. (Default: 50) · Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

Set the RX Delay time. It is the delay time for the VOX switch to turn OFF after no audio signal is received through the network.
(Default: 200) · Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

Enter the period of time to store the audio.

(Default: 5)

L When the Receive Detection is set to "VOX," the default value is "50."

· Range: 0 ~ 1500 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

Enter the voice threshold level. · Range: 0 ~ 100 (%)

(Default: 40)

Enter the period of time to ignore the detected SQL signal. (Default: 300)
· Range: 0 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

7-32
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT I/O Device Connection
This item is displayed only when "Connected Unit" is set to "EXT I/O Unit, and "EXT I/O Port Mode" is set to "Combined."(Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) )

Connected EXT I/O Unit 

Select the connected external input/output unit.

7-33
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 Bridge Communication
Edit the Bridge Communication settings for external input/output devices connected to the EXT1 ~ EXT4 ports. These items are displayed only when "Connected Unit" is set to "EXT I/O Unit, and "EXT I/O Port Mode" is set to "Combined."(Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) )

1
2
3 4 5 6

1 Encryption  2 TalkBack  3 Call Type  4 Destination Prefix ID  5 Destination ID  6 Source ID 

Select whether or not to enable the Encryption function.

(Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an encryption key between 1 and

32767.

(Default: 1)

Select whether or not to enable the TalkBack function. (Default: Enable) When the function is enabled, Select the TalkBack time. (Default: 5) · Range: 1 ~ 10 (seconds)

Select a call type. · Options: Individual, Group, or All

(Default: Group)

Enter a destination prefix ID. The ID may differ, depending on the

system.

(Default: Blank)

· Range: 0 ~ 30

Enter the default ID for the EXT port between 1 and 9999999.
(Default: 1) L Enter an ID between 00001 and 99999 when the Destination Prefix ID (4) is
entered.

Enter a stations source ID between 1 and 9999999. The ID is sent to the destinations.
(Default: EXT1=301, EXT2=302, EXT3=303, EXT4=304)

7-34
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT I/O Control
Edit the input/output settings of the RoIP Gateways EXT1 ~ EXT4 ports. These items are displayed only when "Connected Unit" is set to "EXT I/O Unit, and "EXT I/O Port Mode" is set to "Combined."(Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) )

1 2

1 Echo Canceller  2 Noise Canceller 

Select whether or not to enable the Echo Canceller function. The

function reduces echo caused by receiving more than 2 calls at the

same time.

(Default: Disable)

Select whether or not to enable the Noise Canceller function. (Default: Disable)

7-35
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Input Settings
Edit the input settings of the RoIP Gateways EXT1 ~ EXT4 ports.

1
2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16
17
L 1 ~ 5 are displayed only when "Connected Unit" is set to "EXT I/O Unit, and "EXT I/O Port Mode" is set to "Separate." (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) )

1 Encryption 
2 Call Type  3 Destination Prefix ID  4 Destination ID 
5 Source ID 

Select whether or not to enable the Encryption function.

(Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an encryption key between 1 and

32767.

(Default: 1)

Select a call type.

(Default: Group)

Enter a destination prefix ID. The ID may differ, depending on the system. (Default: Blank)
· Range: 0 ~30

Enter the default ID for the EXT port between 1 and 9999999.
(Default: 1) L Enter an ID between 00001 and 99999 when the Destination Prefix ID (3) is
entered.

Enter a stations source ID between 1 and 9999999. The ID is sent to the destinations.
(Default: EXT1=301, EXT2=302, EXT3=303, EXT4=304) L When EXT I/O Port Mode is set to "Separate," the default values are
EXT1=351, EXT2=352, EXT3=353, and EXT4=354.
7-36

https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Input Settings
6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16
17

6 Input Connection Port 

Select the port which outputs the received audio signal.

(Default: IP Network)

· EXT Output: Sends the audio signal to the devices that are connected to

EXT1 ~ EXT4 ports.

· IP Network:

Sends the audio signal to the devices that are connected

to the RoIP Gateway through the IP network.

· Emergency:

Sends the audio signal to the device that is specified as

the emergency call destination in the

"Emergency Notification."

(Expert Settings > Emergency Notification)

L Emergency communication has priority over normal

communication.

L The RoIP Gateway enters the Emergency mode when

the option selected in the Input Control (8) of the EXT1

~ EXT4 ports are satisfied.

L In the Emergency mode, all ongoing communication

routes, other than that for the Emergency Notice, are

disconnected.

L To transmit the call as the Emergency Notice:

· Confirm the "Bridge Communication Source" is set to

"Emergency Notification."

(Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection >

Bridge Connection > Bridge Connection Source)

· Confirm the "Bridge Communication Destination" is set

to "Custom Bridge Connection."

(Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection >

Bridge Connection > Bridge Communication Destination)

· Confirm the "Emergency Notification Equipment" is set

to "Enable."

(Expert Settings > Emergency Notification >

Emergency Notification >

Emergency Notification Equipment)

7-37
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Input Settings
6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16
17

7 Input Control 
8 Power for the Microphone 9 Reference Level 

Select the control type to send the audio signal.(Default: Control Signal)

· Always-ON:

Always sends the audio signal to the destination selected

in the Input Connection Port (7).

L When "Emergency" is selected in Input Connection Port

(7), this option cannot be selected.

· VOX:

When an audio signal is input, sends the audio signal to

the destination selected in the

Input Connection Port (7).

· Control Signal: When the control signal is input, sends the audio signal to

the destination selected in the

Input Connection Port (7).

Select "Enable" to supply the voltage to the microphone connected to

A3/A4 terminal (Audio input) microphone.

(Default: Disable)

Select the input line A3/A4 terminal (Audio input) sensitivity. (Default: 10dBs)
· Options: 10 dBs or 40dBs

A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4 A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4

A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4 A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4

Refer to the INSTALLATION GUIDE Section 6 for the port details. 7-38

https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Input Settings
6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16
17

10 Input Gain (Analog)  11 Input Gain (Digital) 

Set the analog signal input gain (A3/A4 terminal (Audio input)). (Default: 0)
· Range: 74 ~ +21 (dB)
Set the digital signal input gain (A3/A4 terminal (Audio input)). (Default: 0) · Range: 12 ~ +6 (dB)

A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4 A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4

A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4 A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4

Refer to the INSTALLATION GUIDE Section 6 for the port details. 7-39

https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Input Settings
6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16
17

12 Control Signal Type 
13 ON Timer  14 OFF Timer 

Select the control signal input type.

(Default: Momentary)

· Momentary:

While the control signal is input from the B3/B4 terminal

(General control I/O), activates the port.

· One-shot:

When the control signal is input from the B3/B4 terminal

(General control I/O), continuously activates the port.

And deactivates with no input. The input signal has been

detected for the period of time, that is set in the ON Timer

(13). The RoIP Gateway recognizes the signal input and

retains the type for the period of time, that is set in the

OFF Timer (14).

Select the delay time until the input is detected. · Range: 0.1 ~ 3 (seconds)

(Default: 1)

Select the delay time until the port (B3/B4 terminal (General control

input)) is deactivated.

(Default: 1)

· Range: 0.1 ~ 3 (seconds)

A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4 A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4

A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4 A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4

Refer to the INSTALLATION GUIDE Section 6 for the port details. 7-40

https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Input Settings
6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16
17

15 Control Logic  16 Control Input Pull-up Setting

Select the port input state of the B3/B4 terminals (General control

input).

(Default: Short Circuit (LOW))

The control signal input is detected as follows:

When the "Control Input Pull-up Setting" (16) is enabled:

· Short Circuit (LOW): Detects when the B3/B4 terminals are Shortened

· Open Circuit (HIGH): Detects when the B3/B4 terminals are Open

When the "Control Input Pull-up Setting" (16) is disabled: · Short Circuit (LOW): Detects when no volatge is applied between the B3
and B4 terminals. · Open Circuit (HIGH): Detects when any volatge is applied between the B3
and B4 terminals.

Select whether or not to internally pull up the B3/B4 terminal (General

control input).

(Default: Enable)

A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4 A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4

A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4 A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4

Refer to the INSTALLATION GUIDE Section 6 for the port details. 7-41

https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Input Settings
6 7 8 9 10 11
18 19 17 20
L 18,19, and 20 are displayed when Input Control (7) is set to "VOX."

17 Voice Delay 
18 Attack Time  Input Control: VOX
19 Release Time  Input Control: VOX
20 VOX Threshold  Input Control: VOX

Set the audio signal buffer time. (Default: when Input Control is "VOX"=50, others=5)
· Range: 0 ~ 500 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps
Set the TX Attack time. It is the delay time before the VOX switch turns ON after an audio signal is received through the network. (Default: 50) · Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds)

Set the RX Delay time. It is the delay time for the VOX switch to turn OFF after no audio signal is received through the network.
(Default: 200) · Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds)

Enter the voice threshold level. · Range: 0 ~ 100 (%)

(Default: 40)

A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4 A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4

A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4 A1~A4 B1~B4 C1~C4

Refer to the INSTALLATION GUIDE Section 6 for the port details. 7-42

https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Output Settings
Edit the output settings of the RoIP Gateways EXT1 ~ EXT4 ports.

1
2
L 1 and 2 are displayed only when "Connected Unit" is set to "EXT I/O Unit, and "EXT I/O Port Mode" is set to "Separate." (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT))

1 Encryption  2 Source ID 

Select whether or not to enable the Encryption function.

(Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an encryption key between 1 and

32767.

(Default: 1)

Enter a stations source ID between 0001 and 9999. (Default: EXT1=301, EXT2=302, EXT=303, EXT4=304)

7-43
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)  EXT Output Settings
Switching Control: Control Output Circuit

1 2 3 Switching Control: Relay Circuit
1 2

3 Switching Control 
4 Control Output Logic  Switching Control: Control Output Circuit
5 8V Electric Supply (B2)  Switching Control: Relay Circuit

Select the control circuit type.

(Default: Control Output Circuit)

L If "Relay Circuit" is selected, the "Communication Control" is automatically

set to "Full-Duplex."

(Communication Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > Transceiver Connection

> Communication Control)

Select the activate state.

(Default: Active Low)

When the Switching Control (3) is set to "Relay Circuit," select the port

state. Relay output terminal (B1/B2 terminal) is short or open circuit.

When the audio signal is output, the control signal is also output.

(Default: Short)

Select whether or not to supply the 8 V to the microphone that is

connected to the external output terminal.

(Default: Disable)

L Specification: Less than 30 mA

L If "Enable" is selected, the "Communication Control" is automatically set to

"Full Duplex."

(Communication Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > Transceiver Connection

> Communication Control)

7-44
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Output Settings
Client Mode: Disable
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
L The screen shows Serial Communication (6) is set to "Enable," and Client Mode (7) is set to "Disable." L 12 ~17 are displayed only when the Data Mode (11) is set to "Manual."
Client Mode: Enable
6 7 18 19 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 20
L The screen shows Serial Communication (6) and Client Mode (7) is set to "Enable."

6 Serial Communication  7 Client Mode 
8 TCP Port Number  9 Communication Control 

Select "Enable" to use serial communications.

(Default: Disable)

*Items 7 ~ 11 are displayed when "Enable" is selected.

Select "Enable" to set the RoIP Gateway as the client in serial
communications.
(Default: Disable) L When Enabling this the Client Mode, enter the Server Address (18) and the
Server Port number (19).

Enter a port number between 1024 and 65535. (Default: EXT1=50000, EXT2=50001, EXT3=50002, EXT4=50003)

Select the communication type.

(Default: Full-Duplex)

L Automatically set to "Full-Duplex" when Switching Control (3) is set to

"Relay Circuit."

7-45

https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Output Settings
Client Mode: Disable
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 L The screen shows Serial Communication (6) is set to "Enable," and Client Mode (7) is set to "Disable." L 12 ~17 are displayed only when the Data Mode (11) is set to "Manual."

10 Signal Level  11 Data Mode 
12 Baud Rate  13 Data Bits  14 Parity  15 Stop Bits  16 Flow Control  17 Session Timer 

Select the serial communication line logic voltage level. (Default: ±5V(RS-232C)

Select the communication method for serial communications between a

device and the RoIP Gateway.

(Default: Auto)

· Auto: Automatically starts serial communications from a Virtual Serial Port

installed on your PC.

· Manual: Manually set serial communication method for a device.

L Items 12 ~ 17 are displayed when "Manual" is selected.

Select the serial communication baud rate between a device and the

RoIP Gateway.

(Default: 9600)

Select the number of bits for serial communications.

(Default: 8)

Select the parity bit.

(Default: none)

Select the stop bit length.

(Default: 1)

Select the Flow control option.

(Default: None)

Set the time to cut the TCP session when there is no communication

from the host.

(Default: 30)

7-46
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Output Settings
Client Mode: Enable
6 7 18 19 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 20
L The screen shows Serial Communication (6) and Client Mode (7) is set to "Enable."

18 Server Address  19 Server Port Number 
20 Connection Status 

Enter the destination RoIP Gateway's IP address.
Enter the destination RoIP Gateway's port number between 1024 and 65535.
(Default: EXT1=50000, EXT2=50001, EXT3=50002, EXT4=50003)
Click to connect or disconnect a transceiver, or to refresh the connection status. L The buttons are grayed out when Connected Repeater's Address is blank. L The settings cannot be changed while connection is established. Click
<Disconnect> before changing the settings on this screen.

7-47
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen

Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)  EXT Output Settings

21 22 23 24 25 26

27 28 29

30 31 32

21 Reference Level 

33 34
Select the output level of A1/A2 terminal (Audio output). (Default: 20dBs)
· Options: Speaker, 0dBs, or 20dBs

22 Output Gain (Analog) 

Set the analog signal input gain (A1/A2 terminal (Audio output)). (Default: 0) · Range: 43 ~ +20 (dB)

23 Output Gain (Digital) 

Set the digital signal input gain (A1/A2 terminal (Audio output)).(Default: 0) · Range: 12 ~ +6 (dB)

24 Announce Tone Delay 

Select the delay time before the received audio is output. This delay time is set according to your sound device's specifications. The default value differs, depending on the EXT I/O Port Mode setting.
(Default: Separate: 0.5 seconds Combined: 1.5 seconds)
· Range: 0.5 ~ 3 (seconds) L Select "Disable" to output the audio right after the signal is received.

25 Fade-out 

Set the period of time that the audio signal is muted. · Range: Disable, or 0.5 ~ 3 (seconds)

(Default: 1.5)

The Auto Fader function is usable on the following settings. · When the "Connected Unit" is set to "EXT I/O Unit, and "EXT I/O Port Mode"
is set to "Separate." (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode) L The "Input connection port" is set to "EXT Output."
(External input and output ports are directly connected.) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT Input Settings > Input Connection Port) · The "Priority Level" is set to "Priority" or "High Priority." (PBX Advanced Settings > Prioritization > EXT Output Port Prioritization > From Other Ports)

7-48
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Output Settings
21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29
30 31 32

33 34

26 Fade-in 
27 Relay Control  28 Release Time  29 Voice Delay 

Set the period of time that the audio signal mute is canceled. (Default: 1.5 seconds)
· Range: Disable, or 0.5 ~ 3 (seconds)
The Auto Fader function is usable on the following settings. · When the "Connected Unit" is set to "EXT I/O Unit, and "EXT I/O Port Mode"
is set to "Separate." (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode) L The "Input connection port" is set to "EXT Output."
(External input and output ports are directly connected.) (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT Input Settings > Input Connection Port) · The "From Other Ports" is set to "Priority" or "High Priority." (PBX Advanced Settings > Prioritization > EXT Output Port Prioritization > From Other Ports)

Displayed when Switching Control (3) is set to "Relay Circuit."

Set the type of relay control.

(Default: By RTP)

Options: By Port Connection or By RTP

Set the RX delay time. It is the delay time for the VOX switch to turn

OFF after no audio signal is received through the network.

(Default: For the Control Output Circuit: 200

For the Relay Circuit: 100)

· Range: For the control output circuit: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds)

For the relay circuit:

5 ~15000 (milliseconds)

Enter the period of time to store the audio. · Range: 0 ~ 1500 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps.

(Default: 5)

7-49
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

EXT I/O (EXT) screen
Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT)
 EXT Output Settings
21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29
30 31 32

33 34

30 Start Tone 
31 End Tone  32 Announce Tone Volume  33 <Apply>  34 <Reset> 

Select the tone which sounds before the announcement starts. (Default: Single Tone1)
· Options: Not used, 4 Tone Notice (Up), Single Tone 1, or Single Tone 2

Select the tone which sounds after the announcement. (Default: Not used) · Options: Not used, 4 Tone Notice (Down), Single Tone 1, or Single Tone 2

Select the volume level for the announce tones. · Range: 12 ~ +6 (dB)

(Default: 0)

Click to apply the settings.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

7-50
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

Emergency Notification screen
Connection Port Settings > Emergency Notification
 Bridge Communication
Edit the Emergency Notification settings for the transceivers connected by Bridge Mode.

1

2

3

4

5

6

78

L 3 ~6 Displayed only when the Default Callee ID (2) is set to "Enable."

1 Encryption 
2 Default Callee ID  3 Call Type  4 Destination Prefix ID  5 Destination ID 
6 Source ID  7 <Apply>  8 <Reset> 

Select whether or not to enable the Encryption function.

(Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an encryption key between 1 and

32767.

(Default: 1)

Select "Enable" to add the destination ID to the transmitted signal. (Default: Disable)

Select a call type. · Options: Individual, Group, or All

(Default: Group)

Enter a destination prefix ID. The ID may differ, depending on the

system.

(Default: Blank)

· Range: 0 ~30

Enter an Individual or Group ID of the destination transceiver between 1

and 9999999.

(Default: 1)

L Enter an ID between 00001 and 99999 when the Destination Prefix ID (4) is

entered.

Enter a stations source ID between 1 and 9999999. The ID is sent to

the destinations.

(Default: 1)

Click to apply the settings.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

7-51
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
Microphone (MIC) screen
Connection Port Settings > Microphone (MIC)
 Bridge Communication
Edit the settings of the microphone connected to the RoIP Gateway.

1
2
3 4 5 6

1 Encryption 
2 TalkBack  3 Call Type  4 Destination Prefix ID  5 Destination ID 
6 Source ID 

Select whether or not to enable the Encryption function.

(Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an encryption key between 1 and

32767.

(Default: 1)

Select whether or not to enable the TalkBack function.(Default: Enable) When the function is enabled, Select the TalkBack time. (Default: 5) · Range: 1 ~10 (seconds)

Select a call type. · Options: Individual, Group, or All

(Default: Group)

Enter a destination prefix ID. The ID may differ, depending on the

system.

(Default: Blank)

· Range: 0 ~30

Enter an Individual or Group ID of the destination transceiver between 1

and 9999999.

(Default: 1)

L Enter an ID between 00001 and 99999 when the Destination Prefix ID (4) is

entered.

Enter a stations source ID between 1 and 9999999. The ID is sent to

the destinations.

(Default: 311)

7-52
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
Microphone (MIC) screen
Connection Port Settings > Microphone (MIC)
 Microphone Control
Edit the input/output settings of the microphone connected to the RoIP Gateway.

1 2 3

1 Communication Method  2 Echo Canceller  3 Noise Canceller 

Select the communication method for the microphone. (Default: Full-Duplex)
Select whether or not to enable the Echo Canceller function. The function reduces echo caused while duplex communication.
(Default: Enable)
Select whether or not to enable the Noise Canceller. (Default: Enable)

7-53
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
Microphone (MIC) screen
Connection Port Settings > Microphone (MIC)
 Microphone Input Control
Edit the input setting of the microphone connected to the RoIP Gateway.

Input Gain 

Select the input gain for the microphone. · Range: 12 ~ +6 (dB)

(Default: 0)

7-54
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
Microphone (MIC) screen
Connection Port Settings > Microphone (MIC)
 Voice Output Control
Edit the voice output control settings of the microphone connected to the RoIP Gateway.

1

2

34

1 Output Gain  2 Notice Tone Volume  3 <Apply>  4 <Reset> 

Select the output gain for the microphone. · Range: 0 ~ +63 (dB)
Adjust the Notice Tone volume. · Range: 0 ~ +63 (dB)
Click to apply the settings.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

(Default: +40) (Default: +30)

7-55
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
RoIP Gateway screen
Connection Port Settings > RoIP Gateway
 RoIP Gateway
Set the Destination for the RoIP gateway connection.

RoIP Gateway Port 

Select a RoIP gateway port to edit the settings. (Default: RoIP Gateway1)

7-56
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
RoIP Gateway screen
Connection Port Settings > RoIP Gateway
 RoIP Gateway Connection
The settings for a destinations that are connected to the RoIP Gateway through the RoIP gateway connection.

1 21 3 4 5 6 7 8
L 6 is displayed only when the Transmission Mode (1) is set to "Multicast."

1 Transmission Mode  2 Destination Address 
3 Destination Port Number

Select the transmission mode used on the network, for devices connected to the RoIP Gateway.
Enter the IP address or domain of the RoIP Gateway that going to be connected. When the Transmission Mode (1) is set to "Multicast," automatically set to "239.255.255.1."
Enter the same port number that entered to the Source Port Number (4) of the RoIP Gateway that going to be connected.
(Default for RoIP Gateway1: 24400) (Default for RoIP Gateway2: 24402) (Default for RoIP Gateway3: 24404) (Default for RoIP Gateway4: 24406) (Default for RoIP Gateway5: 24408) (Default for RoIP Gateway6: 24410) (Default for RoIP Gateway7: 24412) (Default for RoIP Gateway8: 24414) L Enter the port number between 2 and 65534, in even number. L Do not conflict with the other port settings. L In the Multicast mode, all the default setting are fixed to "25210."

7-57
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
RoIP Gateway screen
Connection Port Settings > RoIP Gateway  RoIP Gateway Connection

1 21 3 4 5
6 7
L 6 is displayed only when the Transmission Mode (1) is set to "Multicast."

4 Source Port Number 
5 Voice Protocol  6 Multicast TTL  7 Connection Status 

Enter a port number to receive an audio signal. L Used as a source port number for an audio signal. L Enter a port number between 1024 and 65534, in even number. L Do not conflict with the other port settings.
(Default for RoIP Gateway1: 24400) (Default for RoIP Gateway2: 24402) (Default for RoIP Gateway3: 24404) (Default for RoIP Gateway4: 24406) (Default for RoIP Gateway5: 24408) (Default for RoIP Gateway6: 24410) (Default for RoIP Gateway7: 24412) (Default for RoIP Gateway8: 24414) L Enter the port number between 2 and 65534, in even number. L Do not conflict with the other port settings. L In the Multicast mode, all the default setting are "25210."
Displays the Voice Protocol Selected in the "Voice Protocol (For Custom Bridge Connection)" (Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection > AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment > Voice Protocol (For Custom Bridge Connection))
Enter the Time to Live value (TTL). TTL is used to control the Multicast packet delivery scope. Every time the packets pass through the router, this value subtracted. When the value is "0," the packets are discarded.
(Default: 1) · Range: 1 ~ 255
Click to connect or disconnect the RoIP Gateway, or to refresh the connection status. L The buttons are grayed out when Connected Repeater's Address is blank. L The settings cannot be changed while connection is established. Click
<Deactivate> before changing the settings on this screen.

7-58
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
RoIP Gateway screen
Connection Port Settings > RoIP Gateway
 RoIP Gateway Communication
Edit settings for the connected RoIP Gateway to communicate.

1 1
2
3 4 5 6

1 Encryption  2 TalkBack 
3 Call Type  4 Destination Prefix ID  5 Destination ID  6 Source ID 

Select whether or not to enable the Encryption function.

(Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an encryption key between 1 and

32767.

(Default: 1)

Select whether or not to enable the TalkBack function with devices

connected to the RoIP Gateway.

(Default: Enable)

When the function is enabled, Select the TalkBack time. (Default: 5)

· Range: 1 ~10 (seconds)

Select a call type. · Options: Individual, Group, or All

(Default: Group)

Enter a destination prefix ID. The ID may differ, depending on the

system.

(Default: Blank)

· Range: 0 ~30

Enter the default ID for the EXT port between 1 and 9999999.
(Default: 1) L Enter an ID between 00001 and 99999 when the Destination Prefix ID (4) is
entered.

Enter a stations source ID between 1 and 9999999. The ID is sent to the destinations.
(Default for RoIP Gateway1: 801) (Default for RoIP Gateway2: 802) (Default for RoIP Gateway3: 803) (Default for RoIP Gateway4: 804) (Default for RoIP Gateway5: 805) (Default for RoIP Gateway6: 806) (Default for RoIP Gateway7: 807) (Default for RoIP Gateway8: 808)

7-59
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS
RoIP Gateway screen
Connection Port Settings > RoIP Gateway
 RoIP Gateway Control
Edit settings for the connected RoIP Gateway to communicate.

1

Release Time 

Enter the period of time to detect the audio output stoppage to the RoIP

Gateway.

(Default: 200)

· Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 second steps

7-60
https://manual-hub.com/

7 CONNECTION PORT SETTINGS

RoIP Gateway screen
Connection Port Settings > RoIP Gateway
 Bridge Communication
The settings for the Bridge Communication when a Bridge Connection Destination is set to "Custom Bridge Connection." (Bridge Connection Settings > Bridge Connection > Bridge Connection > Bridge Connection Destination)

1 2

3

4

5

6

78

1 Encryption 
2 TalkBack 
3 Call Type  4 Destination Prefix ID  5 Destination ID 
6 Source ID  7 <Apply>  8 <Reset> 

Select whether or not to enable the Encryption function, depending on

the connected transceivers setting.

(Default: Disable)

When you enable the function, enter an encryption key between 1 and

32767.

(Default: 1)

Select whether or not to enable the TalkBack function with devices

connected to the RoIP Gateway.

(Default: Enable)

When the function is enabled, Select the TalkBack time.

(Default: 5)

· Range: 1 ~ 10 (seconds)

Select a call type. · Options: Individual, Group, or All

(Default: Group)

Enter a destination prefix ID. The ID may differ, depending on the system. · Range: 0 ~30

Enter an Individual or Group ID for the destination transceiver between

1 and 9999999.

(Default: 1)

L Enter an ID between 00001 and 99999 when the Destination Prefix ID (4) is

entered.

Enter the stations source ID between 1 and 9999999. Used for calling

transceivers connected to the serial port.

(Default: 1)

Click to apply the settings.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

7-61
https://manual-hub.com/

DESTINATION SETTINGS

8 Section

SelCall Number Converting screen ............................................................................................. 8-2 M Save or Write the SelCall Number Converting Setting ............................................................... 8-2 M About the SelCall Number Converting.................................................................................... 8-3 M SelCall Number Converting ................................................................................................ 8-4 M List of SelCall Number Converting Entries .............................................................................. 8-5
Destination Settings screen ...................................................................................................... 8-6 M Destination Settings (All) ................................................................................................... 8-6 M Destination Settings (Group) ................................................................................................ 8-9 M Destination Settings (Talkgroup) ....................................................................................... 8-13 M Destination Settings (Individual) ....................................................................................... 8-19 M Destination Settings (Telephone) ....................................................................................... 8-21 M List of Destination Setting Entries (All Call) ........................................................................ 8-22 M List of Destination Setting Entries (Group Call) ..................................................................... 8-22 M List of Destination Setting Entries (Talkgroup Call) ............................................................... 8-23 M List of Destination Setting Entries (Multiplex Talkgroup Call) ................................................... 8-24 M List of Destination Setting Entries (Individual Call) ............................................................... 8-25 M List of Destination Setting Entries (Telephone) ..................................................................... 8-26 M Destination Batch Setting ................................................................................................ 8-27

8-1
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

SelCall Number Converting screen
Destination Settings > SelCall Number Converting
 Save or Write the SelCall Number Converting Setting
You can load or save the converting settings.

1 2

1 Load Settings from File  2 Save to File 

You can load the saved [SelCall Number Converting file] (Extension: csv) file, and write it to the RoIP Gateway. Click <Browse>, and select the SelCall Number Converting file (Example: idtbl_brg.csv) to load. Verify that the selected file is displayed, and then click <Write>. L The content of the file is loaded to [List of SelCall Number Converting Entries]. L When the setting file (Extension: sav) is used to restore the settings, the
settings of the RoIP Gateway will be overwritten.
Click to save the [List of SelCall Number Converting Entries] contents in the PC, as the "SelCall Number Converting file (Extension: csv)."

8-2
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

SelCall Number Converting screen

Destination Settings > SelCall Number Converting
 About the SelCall Number Converting
When a SelCall number is shared beyond the site, you can't call transceivers across the site due to "SelCall number duplication." The SelCall Number Convert function solves this problem by automatically converting the SelCall number.
Here is an example to show how the function works. The transceiver (ID number: 1) in Area A is calling the transceiver (ID number: 2) in Area B using a provisionally assigned SelCall number (9002). The provisionally assigned SelCall number is converted into the actual one (9002 to 2), according to the number conversion table. Therefore, they can talk to each other across the sites. At the same time, the ID number of the transceiver in Area A is also converted, based on the list of SelCall Number Converting entries registered in Area A's RoIP Gateway (1 to 8001). The converted number (8001) is displayed on the transceiver in Area B.

Area A

VE-PG4 192.168.0.1

Repeater A

IC-FR5000

192.168.0.2

P0

P1

P2

P3

P4

[D-TRX1] [LAN]

IP Network

Area B

[D-TRX1] VE-PG4
192.168.0.3

[LAN]

Repeater B

IC-FR5000

192.168.0.4

P0

P1

P2

P3

P4

ID number: 1

ID number: 2

(Provisional number: 8001) (Provisional number: 8002)

ID number: 1

ID number: 2

(Provisional number: 9001) (Provisional number: 9002)

· The conversion table for the above example. (Area A)

· The conversion table for the above example. (Area B)
L We do not recommend using duplicate individual numbers between bases. L You need to register both entries of the destination information and the source information.
8-3
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

SelCall Number Converting screen
Destination Settings > SelCall Number Converting
 SelCall Number Converting
Even when a SelCall number is shared in several sites, you can call a radio in a different site by using the provisionally assigned SellCall destination ID.

1

2

3

4 5

6

7 8

9

1 Index 

The Index assigned for the entry. Index range: 1 ~ 1000

(Default: 1)

2 Name 

Enter a name of up to 31 characters.

3 Call Type (Destination) 

Select the type of call.

(Default: Individual)

· Individual: Virtually call a specified transceiver.

· Group: Virtually call all transceivers that belong to the specified group.

· All:

Call all transceivers.

4 Prefix ID (Destination) 

Enter the SelCall prefix ID. · Range: 0 ~ 30

5 ID (Destination) 

Enter a provisionally assigned SelCall destination ID. ID range differs, Depending on the system mode.

L When "All" is selected in [Call Type (Destination)] (3), This item's color changes to gray, and you cannot change the setting.

6 Call Type (Convert Destination)

Select the call type.

(Default: Individual)

· Individual: Call only one transceiver.

· Group: Call all transceivers that belong to the specified group.

· All:

Call all transceivers.

7 Prefix ID (Convert Destination) Enter the SelCall destination's prefix ID. · Range: 0 ~ 30

8 ID (Convert Destination) 

Enter the ID of the SelCall destination. ID range differs, Depending on the system mode.

L When "All" is selected in [Call Type (Destination)] (3), this item's color changes to gray, and you cannot change the setting.

9 <Add> 

Click to add the entry. L The registered contents are displayed on the [List of SelCall Number Converting
Entries] screen.

8-4
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS
SelCall Number Converting screen
Destination Settings > SelCall Number Converting
 List of SelCall Number Converting Entries
Lists the SelCall Number Converting settings.

1 2 3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete>  3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit the entry. L The registered contents are displayed in [SelCall Number Converting].
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete all of the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

8-5
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS
Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 Destination Settings (All)
The settings to call all the registered wireless LAN transceivers (IP100H/IP100FS). If necessary, you can include other bases connections, IP transceiver controllers, and transceiver ports. (Up to 22 locations, excluding the IP transceiver controller) L This screen is displayed when clicking [Edit] of [List of Destination Setting Entries (All Call)].
1 2 3
4

5 6

This is an example of setting "All" as the Call Type.

1 Communication Type 

Select "Simplex" or "Full-Duplex."

(Default: Full-Duplex)

· Simplex operation L When "Simplex" is selected, the called station cannot reply until the caller
station stops transmitting.

Wireless access point (Example: AP-95M)

VE-PG4

IP100H
· Full-Duplex operation
Wireless access point (Example: AP-95M)

IP100FS (Remote Communicator)
VE-PG4

IP100H
8-6
https://manual-hub.com/

IP100FS (Remote Communicator)

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS
Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings  Destination Settings (All)
1 2 3 4

5 6

This is an example of setting "All" as the Call Type.

2 All Call for Talkgroup  3 Additional Controller 

Select whether or not the All call includes the wireless LAN transceivers

that belong to the Talkgroup.

(Default: Enable)

Select the additional controller when configuring several controllers, and the All call calls between the different controllers. L By clicking "All," you can select or cancel all entries in the list. L When "Sub" is selected in the [Additional Controller Settings] setting
(Transceiver Controller > RoIP Settings > Additional Controller Settings), specify the master controller as the connection destination, as shown below.

L The other bases in [Additional Controller] (3) and [IP Transceiver Controller/ Connection Port] (4) can be connected to a total of up to 22 locations. ("IP Transceiver Controller" is not included this number of connections.) If you connect the other bases to more than 22 locations, you cannot communicate properly.

8-7
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS
Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings  Destination Settings (All)
1 2 3 4

5 6

This is an example of setting "All" as the Call Type.

4 IP Transceiver Controller/ Connection Port 
5 <Apply>  6 <Reset> 

Select the communication devices. · IP Transceiver Controller*¹ · Digital Transceiver1 (D-TRX1) ~ Digital Transceiver4 (D-TRX4) · EXT I/O1 (EXT1) ~ EXT I/O4 (EXT4)*² · Emergency Notification · Microphone (MIC) · RoIP Gateway1 ~ RoIP Gateway8 *¹ Displayed when an IP Transceiver Controller is connected. *² When [Connected Unit] is set to "EXT I/O Unit" and [EXT I/O Port
Mode] is set to "Separate" in [EXT I/O Port Mode] setting (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode), "EXT Input" and "EXT Output" are displayed. L When clicking "All," you can select or cancel all at once. L When a speaker microphone is connected to the [MIC] port, the audio input/ output of the [EXT1] port is disconnected. The Audio input/output of the [MIC] port and the [EXT1] port cannot be used at the same time. L The other bases in [Additional Controller] (3) and [IP Transceiver Controller/ Connection Port] (4) can be connected to a total of up to 22 locations. ("IP Transceiver Controller" is not included this number of connections.) If you connect the other bases to more than 22 locations, you cannot communicate properly.
Click to apply the entries. L The registered contents are displayed in [List of Destination Setting Entries (All
Call)].
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>

8-8
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 Destination Settings (Group)
The settings to call the registered group through the IP network or the RoIP Gateway's transceiver port. L The displayed contents are changed according to the Call Type.

1 2 3 4 5
6
This is an example of setting "Group" as the Call Type (3).

1 No. 
2 Name  3 Call Type  4 Destination ID 
5 Group Priority 

Select the number to register the destination Group. Up to 1990 destinations can be registered.
Enter a destination name of up to 31 characters.
Select "Group" for Group calls.
Enter a 4 digit destination number. · Range: 0001 ~ 9999
Select "Normal" or "High" to set the priority in the Group call. (Default: Normal)
L This item can be selected when "Group" is selected in [Call Type] (3).

8-9
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings  Destination Settings (Group)

1 2 3 4 5
6
This is an example of setting "Group" as the Call Type (3).

6 Communication Type 

Select "Simplex" or "Full-Duplex."

(Default: Full-Duplex)

· Simplex operation L When "Simplex" is selected, the called station cannot reply until the caller
station stops transmitting.

Wireless access point (Example: AP-95M)

VE-PG4

IP100H
· Full-Duplex operation
Wireless access point (Example: AP-95M)

IP100FS (Remote Communicator)
VE-PG4

IP100H

IP100FS (Remote Communicator)

8-10
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS
Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings  Destination Settings (Group)
7 8 9

10 11

This is an example of setting "Group" as the Call Type (3).

7 WLAN Transceivers  8 Additional Controller 

Select the IP100H and IP100FS that belong the group from the list. L The WLAN transceivers added in [Transceiver Registration] are displayed. L By clicking "All," you can select or cancel all at once.
Select an additional controller when configuring several controllers, and the Group call calls between the different controllers. L By clicking "All," you can select or cancel all entries in the list. L When "Sub" is selected in the [Additional Controller Settings] setting
(Transceiver Controller > RoIP Settings > Additional Controller Settings), specify the master controller as the connection destination, as shown below.

L The other bases in [Additional Controller] (8) and [IP Transceiver Controller/ Connection Port] (9) can be connected to a total of up to 22 locations. ("IP Transceiver Controller" is not included in this number of connections.) If you connect other bases to more than 22 locations, you cannot communicate properly.
NOTE: When you use the Additional Controller Link function, set the other bases to be paired in the [Area Entry List] setting (Transceiver Controller > RoIP Server Settings > Area Call > Area Entry List). For example, when the destination setting of Group 1 in the additional Controller 1 is set to additional Controller 2, the destination setting of Group 1 in the additional Controller 2 must be set to additional Controller 1. L The same applies in the case when the connection configuration between the other bases consists of the master
controller and the multiple sub controllers.
8-11
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS
Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings  Destination Settings (Group)
7 8 9

10 11

This is an example of setting "Group" as the Call Type (3).

9 IP Transceiver Controller/ Connection Port 

Select the communication devices. · IP Transceiver Controller*¹ · Digital Transceiver1 (D-TRX1) ~ Digital Transceiver4 (D-TRX4) · EXT I/O1 (EXT1) ~ EXT I/O4 (EXT4)*² · Emergency Notification · Microphone (MIC) · RoIP Gateway1 ~ RoIP Gateway8 *¹ Displayed when an IP Transceiver Controller is connected. *² When [Connected Unit] is set to "EXT I/O Unit" and [EXT I/O
Port Mode] is set to "Separate" in [EXT I/O Port Mode] setting (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode), "EXT Input" and "EXT Output" are displayed. L By clicking "All," you can select or cancel all at once. L When a speaker microphone is connected to the [MIC] port, the audio input/ output of the [EXT1] port is disconnected. The Audio input/output of the [MIC] port and the [EXT1] port cannot be used at the same time. L The other bases in [Additional Controller] (8) and [IP Transceiver Controller/ Connection Port] (9) can be connected to a total of up to 22 locations. ("IP Transceiver Controller" is not included this number of connections.) If you connect the other bases to more than 22 locations, you cannot communicate properly. L For the EXT port that the IC-SAT100 is connected, you can belong to only a Group or Talkgroup.

10 <Apply> 

Click to apply the entries. L The registered contents are displayed in [List of Destination Setting Entries
(Group Call)].

11 <Reset> 

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.
8-12

https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 Destination Settings (Talkgroup)
The settings to call the registered Talkgroup through the IP network or the RoIP Gateway's transceiver port. L The displayed contents are changed according to the Call Type.

1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8

This is an example of setting "Talkgroup" as the Call Type (3), and "Appointment" as the Callee ID for IP100FS (8).

1 No. 

Select the number to register the destination Talkgroup. Up to 1990 destinations can be registered.

2 Name 

Enter a destination name of up to 31 characters.

3 Call Type 

Select "Talkgroup" for Talkgroup calls.

4 Destination ID 

Enter a 4 digit destination number. Range: 0001 ~ 9999 L This number must also be registered in the [ID List] setting (Transceiver
Controller > Common Settings > ID List > ID List). L When "FUNC Key" in the [Talkgroup Selection] setting (Transceiver Controller
> Common Settings > Profile > Profile > Talkgroup Selection) is selected, the wireless LAN transceiver can call to members in the same Talkgroup. Select "OFF" on the wireless LAN transceiver to return to the usual standby
mode screen.

Talkgroup 1001 Talkgroup1001
Talkgroup is selected

Talkgroup OFF
Talkgroup is OFF

10/8 1657 Talkgroup1001
Talkgroup is selected

10/8 1657 All
Talkgroup is OFF

8-13
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings  Destination Settings (Talkgroup)

1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8

This is an example of setting "Talkgroup" as the Call Type (3), and "Appointment" as the Callee ID for IP100FS (8).

5 Talkgroup Type 

When "Multiplex Talkgroup" is selected, you can talk to multiple Talkgroups.

L This setting can be selected when "Talkgroup" is selected in Call Type (3). L You cannot register the Multiplex Talkgroup in other Multiplex Talkgroups. L The normal Talkgroup can only belong to 1 Multiplex Talkgroup.
Example: When Talkgroup1002 (Normal) and Talkgroup1003 (Normal) belong to Talkgroup1001 (Multiplex). Talkgroup1001 can call to Talkgroup1001, Talkgroup1002, and Talkgroup1003. Talkgroup1002 can call to Talkgroup1001 and Talkgroup1002. Talkgroup1003 can call to Talkgroup1001 and Talkgroup1003.
Talkgroup1001 (Multiplex Talkgroup)

IP100H

Talkgroup1002 (Normal)

Talkgroup1003 (Normal)

8-14
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings  Destination Settings (Talkgroup)

1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8

This is an example of setting "Talkgroup" as the Call Type (3), and "Appointment" as the Callee ID for IP100FS (8).

6 Communication Type 

Select "Simplex" or "Full-Duplex."

(Default: Full-Duplex)

· Simplex operation L When "Simplex" is selected, the called station cannot reply until the caller
station stops transmitting.

Wireless access point (Example: AP-95M)

VE-PG4

IP100H
· Full-Duplex operation
Wireless access point (Example: AP-95M)

IP100FS (Remote Communicator)
VE-PG4

7 Talkgroup Call for IP100FS  8 Callee ID for IP100FS 

IP100H

IP100FS (Remote Communicator)

Select whether or not the Talkgroup Call includes the IP100FS. (Default: Enable)

Select the IP100FS to be called when "Enable" is selected in [Talkgroup

Call for IP100FS] (7).

(Default: All)

L When "Appointment" is selected, you can register up to 5 IP100FS's

destination IDs (4digits).

L This item is not displayed when "Disabled" is selected in [Talkgroup Call for

IP100FS] (7).

L In the Multiplex Talkgroup, the settings for the IP100FS must be the same for

all the Talkgroups.

8-15

https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS
Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings  Destination Settings (Talkgroup)
9 10

11 12

This is an example of setting "Talkgroup" as the Call Type (3).

9 Additional Controller 

Select the additional controller when configuring several controllers,
and the Talkgroup call calls between the different controllers. L By clicking "All," you can select or cancel all entries in the list. L When "Sub" is selected in the [Additional Controller Settings] setting

(Transceiver Controller > RoIP Settings > Additional Controller Settings), specify the master controller as the connection destination, as shown below. L The other bases in [Additional Controller] (9) and [IP Transceiver Controller/ Connection Port] (10) can be connected to a total of up to 22 locations. ("IP Transceiver Controller" is not included this number of connections.) If you connect the other bases to more than 22 locations, you cannot communicate properly.

8-16
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS
Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings  Destination Settings (Talkgroup)
9 10

11 12

This is an example of setting "Talkgroup" as the Call Type (3).

10 IP Transceiver Controller/ Connection Port 

Select the communication devices. · IP Transceiver Controller*¹ · Digital Transceiver1 (D-TRX1) ~ Digital Transceiver4 (D-TRX4) · EXT I/O1 (EXT1) ~ EXT I/O4 (EXT4)*² · Emergency Notification · Microphone (MIC) · RoIP Gateway1 ~ RoIP Gateway8 *¹ Displayed when an IP Transceiver Controller is connected. *² When [Connected Unit] is set to "EXT I/O Unit" and [EXT I/O
Port Mode] is set to "Separate" in [EXT I/O Port Mode] setting (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode), "EXT Input" and "EXT Output" are displayed. L By clicking "All," you can select or cancel all at once. L When a speaker microphone is connected to the [MIC] port, the audio input/ output of the [EXT1] port is disconnected. The Audio input/output of the [MIC] port and the [EXT1] port cannot be used at the same time. L The other bases in [Additional Controller] (9) and [IP Transceiver Controller/ Connection Port] (10) can be connected to a total of up to 22 locations. ("IP Transceiver Controller" is not included this number of connections.) If you connect the other bases to more than 22 locations, you cannot communicate properly.

8-17
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS
Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings  Destination Settings (Talkgroup)
9 10

11 12

This is an example of setting "Talkgroup" as the Call Type (3).

11 <Apply>  12 <Reset> 

Click to apply the entries.
· When "Normal" is selected in the Talkgroup Type The entries are displayed in [List of Destination Setting Entries (Talkgroup Call)].
· When "Multiplex Talkgroup" is selected in the Talkgroup Type The entries are displayed in [List of Destination Setting Entries (Multiplex Talkgroup Call)].
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

8-18
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 Destination Settings (Individual)
The settings to call the registered destination station through the IP network or the RoIP Gateway's transceiver port. L The displayed contents are changed according to the Call Type.

1 2 3 4 5
This is an example of setting "Individual" as the Call Type (3).

6 7

1 No. 
2 Name  3 Call Type  4 Destination ID 

Select the number to register the destination station. Up to 1990 destinations can be registered.
Enter a destination name of up to 31 characters.
Select "Individual" for Individual calls.
Enter a 4 digit destination number. · Range: 0001 ~ 9999

8-19
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings  Destination Settings (Individual)

1 2 3 4 5
This is an example of setting "Individual" as the Call Type (3).

6 7

5 Additional Controller/IP Transceiver

Controller/Connection Port 

Select the communication devices or the path.

· None

· Additional Controller*¹

· IP Transceiver Controller*²

· Digital Transceiver1 (D-TRX1) ~ Digital Transceiver4 (D-TRX4)

· EXT I/O1 (EXT1) ~ EXT I/O4 (EXT4)*³

· Emergency Notification

· Microphone (MIC)

· RoIP Gateway1 ~ RoIP Gateway8

*¹ The registered additional Controllers are displayed.

*² Displayed when an IP Transceiver Controller is connected.

*³ When [Connected Unit] is set to "EXT I/O Unit" and [EXT I/O Port

Mode] is set to "Separate" in the [EXT I/O Port Mode] setting

(Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode),

"EXT Input" and "EXT Output" are displayed.

L When a speaker microphone is connected to the [MIC] port, the audio input/

output of the [EXT1] port is disconnected.

The Audio input/output of the [MIC] port and the [EXT1] port cannot be used

at the same time.

6 <Apply> 

Click to apply the entries. L The registered contents are displayed in [List of Destination Setting Entries
(Individual Call)].

7 <Reset> 

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

8-20
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 Destination Settings (Telephone)
The settings to call the registered telephone through the IP network. L The displayed contents are changed according to the Call Type.

1

2

3

4

5 6

This is an example of setting "Telephone" as the Call Type (3).

1 No.  2 Name  3 Call Type 
4 Destination Phone Number 5 <Apply> 
6 <Reset> 

Select the number to register the destination station. Up to 1990 destinations can be registered.
Enter a destination name of up to 31 characters.
Select "Telephone" for Telephone calls. L This Call Type includes the transceivers connected by the Bridge Connection
through a VE-PG4.
Enter a destination phone number of up to 31 digit numbers and characters (# or *).
Click to apply the entries. L The registered contents are displayed in [List of Destination Setting Entries
(Telephone)].
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

8-21
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS
Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 List of Destination Setting Entries (All Call)
Lists the destination setting entries for All Calls. L Click <Edit> to edit the entry.

Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 List of Destination Setting Entries (Group Call)
Lists the destination setting entries for Group Calls.

1

2 3

4

5

1 Check Box  2 <Edit>  3 <Delete>  4 <Delete Selected>  5 <Delete All> 

Click to add a check mark to delete the entry. L By clicking <All>, you can select or cancel all the entries.
Click to edit the entry.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete the selected entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete Selected>.
Click to delete all of the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

8-22
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 List of Destination Setting Entries (Talkgroup Call)
Lists the destination setting entries for Talkgroup Calls.

1

2 3

4

5

1 Check Box  2 <Edit>  3 <Delete>  4 <Delete Selected>  5 <Delete All> 

Click to add a check mark to delete the entry. L By clicking <All>, you can select or cancel all the entries.
Click to edit the entry.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete the selected entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete Selected>.
Click to delete all of the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

8-23
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 List of Destination Setting Entries (Multiplex Talkgroup Call)
Lists the destination setting entries for Multiplex Talkgroup Calls.

1

2 3

4

5

1 Check Box  2 <Edit>  3 <Delete>  4 <Delete Selected>  5 <Delete All> 

Click to add a check mark to delete the entry. L By clicking <All>, you can select or cancel all the entries.
Click to edit the entry.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete the selected entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete Selected>.
Click to delete all of the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

8-24
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 List of Destination Setting Entries (Individual Call)
Lists the destination setting entries for Individual Calls.

1

2 3

L The screen above shows the default settings.

4

5

1 Check Box  2 <Edit>  3 <Delete>  4 <Delete Selected>  5 <Delete All> 

Click to add a check mark to delete the entry. L By clicking <All>, you can select or cancel all the entries.
Click to edit the entry.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete the selected entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete Selected>.
Click to delete all of the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

8-25
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 List of Destination Setting Entries (Telephone)
Lists the destination setting entries for Telephone Calls.

1

2 3

4

5

1 Check Box  2 <Edit>  3 <Delete>  4 <Delete Selected>  5 <Delete All> 

Click to add a check mark to delete the entry. L By clicking <All>, you can select or cancel all the entries.
Click to edit the entry.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete the selected entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete Selected>.
Click to delete all of the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

8-26
https://manual-hub.com/

8 DESTINATION SETTINGS

Destination Settings screen
Destination Settings > Destination Settings
 Destination Batch Setting
In this settings, you can register the Destination IDs all at once by serial number, or copy the registered settings to other destinations.

1 2
3

1 Call Type  2 Destination ID 
3 Refer to 

Select the Call Type from "Individual," "Group," or "Talkgroup."
Enter the range of Destination ID number. · <Add> By clicking <Add> after [Refer to] (3) is set, the entered Destination ID range is registered to the selected reference. L When the entered Destination ID number is already registered. "Override the
settings" is displayed.
Select the registered setting for reference.

8-27
https://manual-hub.com/

EXPERT SETTINGS

9 Section

Emergency Notification screen ................................................................................................... 9-2 M Emergency Notification ...................................................................................................... 9-2
Abnormal Condition Monitoring screen.......................................................................................... 9-3 M LAN Port Link-down ......................................................................................................... 9-3 M PING Test ........................................................................................................................ 9-4 M SIP Server Registration ...................................................................................................... 9-5
IP Transceiver Status Filtering screen .......................................................................................... 9-6 M IP Transceiver Status Filtering ............................................................................................. 9-6 M Filtering List ..................................................................................................................... 9-7 M Filtering List Batch Setting ................................................................................................... 9-8
Connection Port Extension screen ............................................................................................. 9-9 M VoIP Settings .................................................................................................................. 9-9
Call Recording screen ............................................................................................................ 9-12 M Common Setting ............................................................................................................ 9-12 M Recorder Setting ............................................................................................................ 9-13 M List of Recording Box Entries .......................................................................................... 9-15

9-1
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS
Emergency Notification screen
Expert Settings > Emergency Notification
 Emergency Notification
Select the port to use as the emergency notice output.
1
2
3 4 5

67

1 Digital Transceiver  2 EXT I/O / EXT Output 
3Emergency Notification Equipment 
4 Microphone (MIC)  5 RoIP Gateway  6 <Apply>  7 <Reset> 

Select whether or not to send an emergency notice to the

D-TRX1 ~ D-TRX4 ports.

(Default: Disable)

Select whether or not to send an emergency notice to transceivers or

devices connected to the EXT I/O ports.

(Default: Disable)

L "EXT Output" is displayed when the "Connected Unit" is set to "EXT I/O

Unit," and "EXT I/O Port Mode" is set to "Separate."

(Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > Connected Unit)

(Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT I/O Port Mode)

L Either of the [EXT1] port or the [MIC] port is usable at the same time. When

a microphone is connected to the [MIC] port, the [EXT1] port is disabled.

Select whether or not to send an emergency notice to the specified

bridge-connected destination.

(Default: Disable)

Select whether or not to send an emergency notice to the microphone

connected to the RoIP gateway.

(Default: Disable)

Select whether or not to send an emergency notice to the bridge-

connected other RoIP gateways.

(Default: Disable)

Click to apply the settings.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

9-2

https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS
Abnormal Condition Monitoring screen
Expert Settings > Abnormal Condition Monitoring
 LAN Port Link-down
Set the monitor function for a communication error.

1 2

L The screen shows when Monitoring (1) is set to "Enable."

1 Monitoring 

Select whether or not to detect a RoIP gateways LAN port connection error. When an error is detected, it is displayed on the "SYSLOG" screen, as shown below. (Information > SYSLOG >SYSLOG)
(Default: Disable)

2 Control Output 

Displayed only when Monitoring (1) is set to "Enable."

Select whether or not to short the B1/B2 terminal (+/) to output an

error detect signal.

(Default: Disable)

Select a port if you want to enable the output control.

L When enabling the output, confirm Switch Control of the port, that you want to output the error detect signal to, is set to "Relay Circuit." (Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT Output Settings > Switching Control)

9-3
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS

Abnormal Condition Monitoring screen
Expert Settings > Abnormal Condition Monitoring
 PING Test
Set the monitor function for a communication error.

1 2
3 4
L 2 ~ 4 are displayed only when Monitoring (1) is set to "Enable."

1 Monitoring 
2 Control Output 
3 IP Address  4 Monitoring Period 

Select whether or not to send PING commands to the host specified by the IP address. When the error is detected, the error is displayed on the "SYSLOG" screen. (Information > SYSLOG >SYSLOG)
(Default: Disable)

Select whether or not to short the B1/B2 terminal (+/) to output an

error detect signal.

(Default: Disable)

L Confirm the Relay Circuit is selected.

(Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT Output Settings >

Switching Control)

Enter the destination IP address to send the PING commands to.

Set the monitor period. · Range: 1 ~ 4320 (minutes)

(Default: 10)

9-4
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS
Abnormal Condition Monitoring screen
Expert Settings > Abnormal Condition Monitoring
 SIP Server Registration
Set the monitor function for the communication error.

1 2
34

1 Monitoring  2 Control Output 
3 <Apply>  4 <Reset> 

Select whether or not to detect the SIP server connection error. When

the error is detected, the error is displayed on the "SYSLOG" screen.

(Information > SYSLOG >SYSLOG)

(Default: Disable)

L The [VoIP] indicator works regardless of this setting.

Displayed only when Monitoring (1) is set to "Enable."

Select whether or not to short the B1/B2 terminal (+/) to output an

error detect signal.

(Default: Disable)

L Confirm the Relay Circuit is selected.

(Connection Port Settings > EXT I/O (EXT) > EXT Output Settings >

Switching Control)

Click to apply the settings.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

9-5
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS

IP Transceiver Status Filtering screen
Expert Settings > IP Transceiver Status Filtering
 IP Transceiver Status Filtering
Filter settings for transceiver information output to a position information software. L These settings are for future use.

1

2

34

1 IP Transceiver Status Filtering Select whether or not to use the Filtering function. (Default: Disable)

2 Filtering Policy 

Select whether allow or deny outputting the transceiver information

listed on the Filtering List.

(Default: Allow List)

· Allow List: Output the listed transceiver information.

· Deny List: Filter the listed transceiver information.

3 <Apply> 

Click to apply the settings.

4 <Reset> 

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

9-6
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS
IP Transceiver Status Filtering screen
Expert Settings > IP Transceiver Status Filtering
 Filtering List
Add up to 200 Unit IDs for the IP transceivers to be filtered.

12

3

1 <Apply>  2 <Reset> 
3 <Delete All> 

Click to apply the settings.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.
Click to delete all of the entered contents. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

9-7
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS
IP Transceiver Status Filtering screen
Expert Settings > IP Transceiver Status Filtering
 Filtering List Batch Setting

Range 

Enter the range of the unit IDs that you want to add to the Filtering List, and then click <Add> to add transceivers that have an ID within the range. (Example: 00004 ~ 00010)

9-8
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS

Connection Port Extension screen
Expert Settings > Connection Port Extension
 VoIP Settings
Sets the audio quality for RoIP gateway or Bridge. The setting items vary, depending on the TOS Type. TOS Type: Not Used

1

2

3

5 6

TOS Type: TOS

1 2 3 4
5 6

TOS Type: Diffserv

1 2 3 4
5 6

L The screens above show when the Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static."

1 Buffering Type  2 Receive Buffer Size 

Select the jitter buffer used to reduce speech break up due to packet

fluctuations.

(Default: Dynamic)

· Static: Buffers receive voice data for a set period of time in the Receive Buffer Size (2).

· Dynamic: Buffering time of the received voice data varies, according to the

packet fluctuation status.

Displayed only when Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static." Set the period of time to buffer the received voice data. (Default: 40) · Range: 20 ~ 1000 (milliseconds) L The shorter the time you set, the less the delay, however the more the sound
will be interrupted.

9-9
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS

Connection Port Extension screen
Expert Settings > Connection Port Extension  VoIP Settings
TOS Type: Not Used

1

2

3

5 6

TOS Type: TOS

1 2 3 4
5 6

TOS Type: Diffserv

1 2 3 4
5 6

L The screens above show when the Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static."

3 TOS Type 

Set TOS Type. · Not Used: Does not use the TOS function.

(Default: Not Used)

· TOS:

Outputs the VoIP packet to the TOS field (8 bit) in the IP header, in

the TOS (Type Of Service) format.

L TOS format applies RFC1349.

· The first 3 bits: Shows the priority. Set into "Media (RTP) Priority Level" (4) with a decimal

number.

· The next 4 bits: Shows the service type. Set into "Media (RTP) Service Type" (4) with a decimal

number.

The larger number, the higher priority.

· The last 1 bits: Reserved and fixed to "0."

· DiffServ: Outputs the VoIP packet to the TOS field (8 bit) in the IP header, in the Diffserv (Differentiated Service) format.
L The Diffserv format details: · The former 6 bits: Shows the DSCP. Set "Media (RTP) DSCP" (4) with a decimal number.
The larger number, the higher priority. · The next 2 bits: Reserved and fixed to "0."

9-10

https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS

Connection Port Extension screen
Expert Settings > Connection Port Extension  VoIP Settings
TOS Type: Not Used

1

2

3

5 6

TOS Type: TOS

1 2 3 4
5 6

TOS Type: Diffserv

1 2 3 4
L The screens above show when the Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static."

5 6

4 Media (RTP) 
5 <Apply>  6 <Reset> 

Setting the Priority details for the TOS or Diffserv format options.

· Priority Level: Set the value of the priority level for TOS. Range: 0 ~ 7 (in decimal)

(Default: 7)

· Service Type: Set the value of the service type for TOS. Range: 0 ~15 (in decimal)

(Default: 0)

· DSCP:

Set the value of DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) for

Diffserv.

(Default: 56)

Range: 0 ~ 63 (in decimal)

Click to apply the setting.

Click to reset the setting. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

9-11
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS

Call Recording screen
Expert Settings > Call Recording
 Common Setting
Set for recording the audio communication between the transceivers. The audio is saved in a file in each transmitting or receiving.
1 2 3

45

1 Silence Recording 

Select whether or not to record a communication during there is no

communication.

When enabling this option, the RoIP gateway continues recording for

the set period of time in "Silence Period to End Recording," after the

communication has been terminated.

The second communication that begins while recording will be

continuously recorded within the same file.

(Default: Enable)

2 Silence Period to End Recording Set the period of time to stop recording when there is no communication.
· Range: 1 ~30 seconds

(Default: 5)

3 Overwriting the Oldest Files

Select whether or not to record and overwrite the older data, when the

disk is full.

(Default: Disable)

4 <Apply> 

Click to apply the settings.

5 <Reset> 

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

9-12
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS

Call Recording screen
Expert Settings > Call Recording
 Recorder Setting
Records communication audio of the linked transceivers. Target: Disable
1 2 3 4
L The screens above show when the Call Type (4) is set to "Group." Target: Enable
3

9 10

1 Index  2 Mode 
3 Target 
4 Call Type 

Select an index. You can enter up to 4 recording boxes. (Default: 1)

Select the recording/monitor mode.

(Default: Disable)

· Disable:

Does not record or monitors communication audio.

· Recording:

Records the communication audio to an external

storage device.

· Monitor:

Outputs the specified communication audio to a

particular port.

· Monitor + Recording: Simultaneously records and monitors.

Select whether or not to set wireless LAN transceivers as recording

targets.

When enabling this option, select a target wireless LAN transceiver in

Unit ID.

(Default: Disable)

L When the target transceiver is deleted on the Transceiver Registration

screen, the recording settings are disabled.

(Transceiver Controller > Transceiver Settings > Transceiver Registration)

Select the type of call to record or monitor.

(Default: All)

· Individual: Individual Calls from or to the specified Call ID.

· Group: Group Calls to the specified Group.

· All:

The All Calls.

L When you select "Individual" or "Group," also set the Call ID from the list.

9-13
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS

Call Recording screen
Expert Settings > Call Recording
 Recorder Setting
5 6 7 8

9 10

L Displayed when Mode (2) is set to "Monitor" or "Monitor + Recording."

5 Destination Address  6 Destination Port Number
7 Source Port Number 
8 Voice Protocol  9 <Apply>  10 <Reset> 

Enter the IP address of the destination to be monitored.

Enter the port number of the destination to be monitored. (Default: 1: 25000 2: 25002 3: 25004 4: 25006)

Enter the number of the source port that is connected to the

destination to be monitored.

(Default: 1: 25000

2: 25002

3: 25004

4: 25006)

Displays the voice protocol. (Fixed to "G.711u")

Click to apply the settings.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

9-14
https://manual-hub.com/

9 EXPERT SETTINGS
Call Recording screen
Expert Settings > Call Recording
 List of Recording Box Entries
Displays the recording box entries.
The example in above shows: 1: Recording the communication of the Unit ID 0101. 2: Transmitting the communication audio of the Unit ID 0103 toward the port 25002 of 192.168.0.10 while
recording it.
9-15
https://manual-hub.com/

IP LINE SETTINGS

Section 10

IP Line screen ..................................................................................................................... 10-2 M SIP Server .................................................................................................................. 10-2 M List of SIP Server Entries ................................................................................................ 10-3 M SIP Server Batch Setting ................................................................................................ 10-4
Peer to Peer screen ............................................................................................................... 10-5 M Peer to Peer Common Setting .......................................................................................... 10-5 M Peer to Peer .................................................................................................................. 10-6 M List of Peer to Peer Entries ............................................................................................. 10-7
VoIP Phonebook screen ......................................................................................................... 10-8 M Save or Write the VoIP Phonebook .................................................................................... 10-8 M VoIP Phonebook Entry ................................................................................................... 10-10 M List of VoIP Phonebook Entries ....................................................................................... 10-11

10-1
https://manual-hub.com/

10 IP LINE SETTINGS

IP Line screen
IP Line Settings > IP Line
 SIP Server
Setting used for connecting the RoIP gateway to the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server.

1

2

3

4 5

6

7

8

9

10

1 Index 
2 IP Phone Number 
3SIP Server Address  4 SIP Service Domain  5 User ID  6 Password  7 Registration Expiration 
8 Registration Renewal Timer
9 <Apply>  10 <Reset> 

Assign the index number for each setting entry. · Range: 1 ~ 100 L Click <Batch Setting Screen> if you wan to enter 2 or more SIP servers at
once. Refer to the SIP Server Batch Setting. (p.10-4)

Enter an IP phone number to use as a client of SIP server of up to 31 characters (0~9, #, *). L The number must be registered in the SIP server. L Only when Use Letters for Phone Number is set to "Allow," you can enter
capital and small letters as a phone number. (PBX Advanced > Advanced Settings > SIP Settings > Use Letters for Phone Number)
Enter a server address or host name of up to 63 characters.

Enter a service domain name of up to 63 characters.

Enter an authentication user ID of up to 63 characters. Use the IP phone number that is entered in (2).

Enter an authentication password of up to 31 characters. L The entered password is masked like as "******".

Set the registration expiration time.

The connection information stored in the SIP server is discarded after

the set time has passed.

(Default: 600)

· Range: 60 ~ 28800 seconds.

Set the registration renewal interval time to between 10 and 90%. (Default: Normal: 50, Exception: 50)
The interval is expressed by the ratio of the value set in Registration Expiration (7) and the period of the normal and exception condition.

Click to apply the settings.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

10-2

https://manual-hub.com/

10 IP LINE SETTINGS
IP Line screen
IP Line Settings > IP Line screen
 List of SIP Server Entries
You can edit the SIP server settings on the list.

1

2

3

4

5

6

78

9 10

11

1 Index  2 IP Phone Number  3Connection Status  4 Calling Number Notice 
5 <Reload> 
6 <Register>  7 <Edit>  8 <Delete>  9 <Apply>  10 <Reset>  11 <Delete all> 

Displays the index number.
Displays the IP phone number.
Displays the SIP server connection status as Connecting, Connection Successful, or Connection failure.
Select whether or not to notify your IP phone number to the destination. (Default: Notify)
L Even if this option is set to "Not notified," the IP phone number may be notified, according to the telephone or line environment.
Click to reload the screen. L When "Connection successful" is not displayed, check the registered
settings.
Click to connect to the SIP server.
Click to edit the entry.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to apply the entry.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.
Click to delete all entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

10-3
https://manual-hub.com/

10 IP LINE SETTINGS
IP Line screen
IP Line Settings > IP Line
 SIP Server Batch Setting
You can add 2 or more SIP servers at same time. This screen is displayed when the "Batch Setting Screen" is clicked.
1 2 3
4
56

1 Start Number  2 Add Number 
3SIP Server Address  4 SIP Service Domain  5 <Apply>  6 <Reset> 

Enter the start number to add more than 2 Phone Number settings at the same time.
Enter the number of SIP servers you want to add to SIP Service Domains (4).
Enter the details on SIP server. L Refer to the SIP Server Settings for each setting details.
Enter the details on SIP service domain. L Refer to th SIP Server Settings for each setting details.
Click to <Apply> the entry.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

10-4
https://manual-hub.com/

10 IP LINE SETTINGS
Peer to Peer screen
IP Line Settings > Peer to Peer
 Peer to Peer Common Setting
You can edit the Peer to Peer call receive setting from the WAN.
1

23

1 Calling from the WAN 
2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

Select whether or not to permit receiving the Peer to Peer call from the

WAN.

(Default: Inhibit)

L When you select "Allow," Your SIP URI has to be registered to the "SIP URI"

item on the "VoIP Phonebook" screen at the caller's SIP server.

(IP Line Settings > VoIP Phonebook > VoIP Phonebook Entry > SIP URI)

L The Callee SIP URI must be registered on the VoIP phone book to receive

the call through the WAN side.

Click to apply the settings.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

10-5
https://manual-hub.com/

10 IP LINE SETTINGS

Peer to Peer screen
IP Line Settings > Peer to Peer
 Peer to Peer
You can edit SIP URI setting used for Peer to Peer call.

1 2
34

1 Index  2 SIP URI 
3 <Apply>  4 <Reset> 

Select the index number for each entry. · Range: 1 ~ 500
Enter the SIP URI up to 63 characters in either format as shown below. · sip: [SIP username]@[VE-PG4 IP address] · sip: [SIP username]@[Host name.domain name]
About the [SIP username] part: Enter an alphabet or number in the [SIP username]. L Must include at least one alphabet. About the [Host name.domain name] part: L When the VE-PG4 IP address is registered in your party's phonebook, enter
the IP address (LAN). L When the VE-PG4 host name is registered in the dynamic DNS or static
IP address in your party's Phonebook, enter the specified host name (ex. telephone) or domain name (ex. icom.co.jp).
Click to apply the settings.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

10-6
https://manual-hub.com/

10 IP LINE SETTINGS

Peer to Peer screen
IP Line Settings > Peer to Peer
 List of Peer to Peer Entries
Displays the entered or edited Peer to Peer settings.

1

2

34 5

1 Index  2 SIP URI  3 <Edit>  4 <Delete> 
5 <Delete All> 

Displays the index assigned for the entry.
Displays the SIP URI.
Click to edit the entry.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete all entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

10-7
https://manual-hub.com/

10 IP LINE SETTINGS
VoIP Phonebook screen
IP Line Settings > VoIP Phonebook
 Save or Write the VoIP Phonebook
You can save or write the entered VoIP phonebook.

1 2

1 Load Settings from File  2 Save to File 

You can load the saved phonebook file in csv format and write it to the RoIP gateway. Click <Browse>, and then select the phonebook file (Example: voiptbl.csv) to load. Verify that the selected file is displayed, and then click <Write>. L The contents of the file is overwritten to "List of VoIP Phonebook Entries." L When the Setting file (Extension: .sav) is used to restore the setting, the
VoIP phone book will be overwritten.
Click to save the "List of VoIP Phonebook" as the [List of VoIP Phonebook Entries] file (voiptbl.csv). L You can edit the saved file on a spreadsheet. L You can share the saved file with more than 2 RoIP gateways.

10-8
https://manual-hub.com/

10 IP LINE SETTINGS
VoIP Phonebook screen
IP Line Settings > VoIP Phonebook  Save or Write the VoIP Phonebook  About the rules of a CSV file for the VoIP phonebook
When editing a saved CSV file, be sure to observe the following rules. Otherwise the VoIP phonebook settings may not load properly into the RoIP gateway.

Column

Title

A Index

B Name C Phone Number D SIP URI

E --

Description
1 ~ 1000 Do not duplicate the number. Up to 30 characters "tel:" and up to 31 digits (0~9, #,*) Enter either of the following format, up to 63 characters sip:[SIP user name]@[Destination IP address] sip:[SIP user name]@[Destination host name or domain name]
Fixed to "voip"

· The lines that begins with "#" are comments. · Delete unnecessary lines.

10-9
https://manual-hub.com/

10 IP LINE SETTINGS

VoIP Phonebook screen
IP Line Settings > VoIP Phonebook
 VoIP Phonebook Entry
Enter the VoIP phone number to use for the Peer to Peer telephone call.
1 2 3 4

56

1 Index  2 Name  3 Phone Number 
4 SIP URI  5 <Apply>  6 <Reset> 

Select the index number for each entry. · Range: 1 ~1000
Enter the callee name up to 31 characters.
Enter the phone number. L When communicating in Peer to Peer, enter the numbers and symbol (#, *). L Do not use numbers for the emergency calls in your area, otherwise you
cannot make an emergency call.
Enter the SIP URI up to 63 characters in either format as shown below. · sip: [SIP username]@[VE-PG4 IP address] · sip: [SIP username]@[Host name.domain name]
Click to apply the settings.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

10-10
https://manual-hub.com/

10 IP LINE SETTINGS

VoIP Phonebook screen
IP Line Settings > VoIP Phonebook
 List of VoIP Phonebook Entries
Displays the list of VoIP phone numbers entered in "VoIP phonebook entry."

12

3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 
3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit the entry.
Click to delete the entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete all entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

10-11
https://manual-hub.com/

PBX

Section 11

Basic screen ........................................................................................................................ 11-2 M Basic ........................................................................................................................... 11-2
Special Number screen ......................................................................................................... 11-3 M Common Special Number ................................................................................................ 11-3 M Telephone Special Number ............................................................................................. 11-4 M Transceiver Special Number ............................................................................................. 11-6 M Transceiver Call Prefix ................................................................................................... 11-7 M External Call Routing Number .......................................................................................... 11-7
Extension screen .................................................................................................................. 11-8 M Extension ..................................................................................................................... 11-8 M List of Extension Entries................................................................................................... 11-11 M Extension Batch Setting ................................................................................................... 11-12 M Extension Detail ............................................................................................................ 11-13
Extension Group screen ......................................................................................................... 11-15 M Extension Group Entry ................................................................................................... 11-15 M List of Extension Group Entries ....................................................................................... 11-18
Inbound Call screen ............................................................................................................... 11-19 M Inbound Call .................................................................................................................. 11-19

11-1
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX
Basic screen
PBX > Basic
 Basic
The common setting for the telephones in the network system.
1 2 3 4 5

6 7

1 Transfer Return Time 
2 Returned Call Ring Time  3 Hold Recall Time 
4 Hold Music 
5 Hold Music Volume  6 <Apply>  7 <Reset> 

Set the time period until a transferred call is returned, if the call is not

picked up in that period of time.

(Default: 20)

· Range: 0 ~ 99 (seconds)

L When "0" has set, you can not turn back a transferred call.

Set the ring time when a transferred call has returned. L Range: 1 ~ 99 (seconds)

(Default: 30)

Set the period of time until Notification tone rings, when no one picks up

a held call.

(Default: 120)

· Range : 0 ~600 (seconds)

L When "0" has been set, you can not receive the Notification tone.

Set the music on hold. · Hold Music 1: For Elise · Hold Music 2: Greensleeves · Hold Music 3: Home on the range · Hold Music 4: Canon · Hold Music 5: Minuet

(Default: Hold Music 1)

Set the audio volume of the music on hold · Range: 0 dB (calm) or +6 dB (loud)

(Default: 0 dB)

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

11-2
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX

Special Number screen
PBX > Special Number
 Common Special Number
Sets the common Special Numbers that can be used by both the transceiver and telephones.

1 2 3 4

1 Call Pickup  2 Group Pickup 
3 Direct Pickup  4 System Special Number 

The number to pick up a call from another extension.

(Default: *81)

The number to pick up a call from another extension in the same

Group.

(Default: **)

L You can pick up call from a particular group, by pushing the number set in

this setting and the Pickup Group No. (See the Section 13)

The number to pick up a call from a particular extension. (Default: *80) L You can pick up call to a particular extension, by pushing the number set in
this setting, and then the extension number.

The Special Numbers are those for internal system management. You cannot assign these numbers as extension numbers or as other Special Numbers.
(Default: *82, *93, *85, *88, *89, *99, *84,*86, *76, *97, *98, *77, *87)

11-3
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX

Special Number screen
PBX > Special Number
 Telephone Special Number
Sets the special numbers that can be used only by the telephones. Options: Up to 3 digit numbers and characters (0~9, #, *)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Call Park 
2 Unpark Call 
3 Inbound Call Pickup 
4 Speaker Call 
5 Call Forward Always 

You can park a call by pushing: The number that has been set in this setting, and then the park number or the flexible button (01 ~24) that the Park function is assigned.
(Default: *90)

You can unpark a call by pushing: The number that has been set in this setting, and then the park number or the flexible button (01 ~24) that the Park function is assigned.
(Default: *91)

The Special Number, to pick up or unpark an inbound call from an

extension in the same Group.

(Default: *92)

L To use this function, set "External Call Status" function to a flexible button

(01 ~ 24) in the Button Assignment setting. (See Section 13.)

To pick up an inbound call from the KX series with another telephone: · Dial the number in this setting (for example: *92), and the Button number (01
~ 24) of the inbound or parked call. For example, dial "*9203" to pick up the parked call to the Button number 03.

To pick up an inbound call from another telephone than the KX series: · Dialing "*81" is recommended because the incoming phone cannot recognize
the External Call Status Button number.

You can make a speaker call to an extension by pushing:

the number that has been set in this setting, and then the extension

number.

(Default: *83)

L This function is usable only calls to the KX series telephone.

The number to forward or cancel forwarding all the incoming call. (Default: *94)
L To set the forwarding function, dial "*94" and the destination extension number you want to forward a call. (The alarm "PiPi, PiPi" sounds.)
L To cancel forwarding, dial "*94." (The alarm "Pi-Pi-, Pi-Pi-" sounds.)

11-4
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX

Special Number screen
PBX > Special Number
 Telephone Special Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Call Forward No Answer  7 Call Forward Busy 

The number to forward when an incoming call does not answer in a

certain period of time.

(Default: *95)

L To set the forwarding function, dial "*95" and the destination extension

number you want to forward a call. (The alarm "PiPi, PiPi" sounds.)

L To cancel forwarding, dial "*95." (The alarm "Pi-Pi-, Pi-Pi-" sounds.)

The number to forward when the extension is busy.

(Default: *96)

L To set the forwarding function, dial "*96" and the destination extension

number you want to forward a call. (The alarm "PiPi, PiPi" sounds.)

L To cancel forwarding, dial "*96." (The alarm "Pi-Pi-, Pi-Pi-" sounds.)

11-5
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX

Special Number screen
PBX > Special Number
 Transceiver Special Number
Sets the special numbers that can be used only by the transceivers. Options: Up to 3 digit numbers and characters (0~9, #, *)

1 2 3 4

1 OFF-hook for Dialing  2 OFF-hook for Answering  3 ON-hook  4 Immediate Calling 

Set the tone signal starting to dial. Hold down this key for a while, then push the number keys to call.
(Default: Blank) L Only when this option is set to a 1 digit number, a transceiver enters off-hook
condition by holding this key for the set period of time in OFF-hook Detect Timer, then you will be ready to dial. Also you have to enable the DTMF settings in Connection Port Settings.

Set the tone signal to receive the telephone call on a transceiver. (Default: #)
L Only when this option is set to a 1 digit number, a transceiver can answer a telephone call by holding this key for the set period of time in OFF-hook Detect Timer. Also you have to enable the DTMF settings in Connection Port Settings.
L When no tone signal has set, the call is automatically received.

Set the tone signal to end (disconnect) the call.

Push this key to hook the call on a transceiver.

(Default: #)

L Only when this option is set to a 1 digit number, a transceiver can cancel

a telephone call by holding this key for the set period of time in OFF-hook

Detect Timer. Also you have to enable the DTMF settings in Connection Port

Settings.

Set the DTMF code for immediately transmitting the code. (Default: None)

11-6
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX
Special Number screen
PBX > Special Number
 Transceiver Call Prefix
Sets the prefix to call a transceiver from an extension, by dialing or using the DID (Direct Inward Dialing) function. Options: Up to 4 digit numbers and characters (0~9, #, *) L To make an individual call, dial the Individual Call prefix, and then dial the Individual number of the transceiver. L To make a Group call, dial the Group Call prefix, and then dial the Group number of the transceiver. L To make an all call, dial the All Call prefix.

PBX > Special Number
 External Call Routing Number
The routing number to acquire a specific outline telephone number, other than that has set in Extension Settings. (PBX > Extension > Extension Settings)

Routing Number 

Enter up to 7 digit numbers and character (# or *) for each phone number. When dialing a routing number first, you can make an outside line call using the specified outside line telephone number. L Be sure that the routing number does not conflict with other Special
Numbers or extension numbers.

11-7
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX
Extension screen
PBX > Extension
 Extension
Sets each extension (IP phone) details. * Do not duplicate the Extension Group numbers and extension numbers. The set status is displayed on the List of Extension Group Entries. (PBX > Extension Group > List of Extension Group Entries)
Port TypeSIP Phone (Automatic Detection)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Port Type: Converter Bridge 1

12 13

11

12 13

1 Port Type 
2 Index  3 Name  4 Extension Number 5 Password 

Set the type of connected device (port.) (Default: SIP Phone (Automatic Detection))
Set the index of the device. · Range: 1 ~ 25 for SIP phones, 1 ~ 20 for a converter bridges
Set the name of the device up to 31 characters.
Set the extension to a 2 to 7 digit number.
Set the password to connect to the RoIP gateway up to 31 characters. L The password is only for a SIP phone.

11-8
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX
Extension screen
PBX > Extension  Extension
Port TypeSIP Phone (Automatic Detection)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Port Type: Converter Bridge 1

12 13

11

12 13

6 Extension Number Notification

on Outbound Call 

Set whether or not to notify your extension number to a destination on

an outbound call.

(Default: Not Notify)

· Not Notify: Depends on the setting in the Calling Number Notice setting. (IP Line settings > IP Line > List of SIP Server Entries > Calling Number Notice)
· Notify: Notifies the Extension Number to the destination.

7 IP Line 

Set an IP phone number for the preset outbound. (Default: No use)

8 Peer to Peer

Set a SIP user name for an outbound.

(Default: No use)

11-9
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX

Extension screen
PBX > Extension  Extension
Port TypeSIP Phone (Automatic Detection)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Port Type: Converter Bridge
1
11

12 13 12 13

9 Connection from WAN 
10 MAC Address 
11 Default Call Destination Number 
12 <Apply>  13 <Reset> 

Displayed only when the Port Type (1) has set to SIP phone. Set whether or not to access to the extension from WAN. L Be sure to set a long and complicated Password (5).
Enter the MAC Address of the Panasonic KX series SIP phone. The MAC Address is settable only when the Port Type (1) is set to other than "SIP Phone (Standard)," "SIP Phone (WLAN)," "Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection," and "Converter Bridge."
Displayed when the Port Type (1) has set to "Converter Bridge." Enter a destination phone number when the device connected to the Port Type (1) makes a call.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

11-10
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX

Extension screen
PBX > Extension
 List of Extension Entries
The List of Extension entries. L The Extension Group List is on the Extension Group screen. (PBX > Extension Group)

1

3 4

2

5

6

1 Extension check box 
2 <Advanced>  3 <Edit>  4 <Delete>  5 <Delete Selected Items> 
6 <Delete All> 

Click to select that you want to delete or copy the setting. Click "All" to check or uncheck all the items in the list.
Click to display the Extension Detail sub window.
Click to edit the settings in the Extension Settings.
Click to delete an entry.
Click to delete the selected entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete Selected Items>.
Click to delete all the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

11-11
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX
Extension screen
PBX > Extension
 Extension Batch Setting
You can register extensions by serial numbering, or copy the setting contents to another extension at once.
1 2 3

1 Port Type  2 Range  3 Copy Settings 

Select the Port Type that you want to copy the settings. (Default: SIP Phone)
Enter the start number and the end number of the extension number range you want to copy to, and then click <Add> to add the entries.
Select the setting options you want to copy and then click <Copy> to copy the settings.
Copying the settings 1. Set the source extension details in the "Extension" above on the screen. 2. Enter the range of extension numbers to those you want to copy. 3. Click <Add> to add the extension numbers. 4. In "Source," select a source extension number that you want to copy. 5. In "Copy to," check the extensions to those you want to copy the source settings. 6. In "Copy Item," check the settings to those you want to copy the source settings. 7. Click <Copy> to copy the settings.

11-12
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX
Extension screen
PBX > Extension
 Extension Detail
Displayed by clicking <Advanced> in "List of Extension Settings." (PBX > Extension > List of Extension Settings)

1 2

3 4 5

6 7

8

9 10

1 Call Forward Settings  2 Call Forward Number  3 Call Forward Settings  4 Call Forward Number  5 Call Time 

Select whether or not to forward calls when a call cannot arrive at the

destination.

(Default: Don't Forward)

Set the destination phone number of up to 31 digits. (Default: Blank) L The KX series telephone automatically forwards calls to the set destinations.

Select whether or not to forward calls when the extension does not

answer in the set period of time.

(Default: Don't Forward)

Set the destination phone number of up to 31 digits. (Default: Blank)

Set the delay time to start forwarding. · Range: 5 ~ 60 (seconds) in 5 second steps

(Default: 5)

11-13
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX
Extension screen
PBX > Extension  Extension Detail

1 2

3 4 5

6 7

8

9 10

6 Call Forward Settings  7 Call Forward Number  8 Call Forward Settings  9 <Apply>  10 <Reset> 

Select whether or not to forward calls from another extension when the

extension is busy.

(Default: Don't Forward)

Set the destination phone number of up to 31 digits. (Default: Blank)

Select whether or not to forward inbound calls to the Extension Group. (Default: Don't Forward)

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

11-14
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX

Extension Group screen
PBX > Extension Group
You can group up to 50 extension numbers into an Extension Group. You can select the extension (SIP phone) to be incoming and the extension not to receive incoming within the set group.
 Extension Group Entry
Used to newly enter an extension group number. * Do not duplicate the Extension numbers and Extension Group numbers. You can check the extension number and its model name on the "Extension" screen. (PBX > Extension)
Ringing Sequence: Simultaneous
1 2 3 4 5
6

7 8

1 Port Type 
2 Extension Group Number 3 Extension Group Name  4 Ringing Sequence 

Select the Port Type that you want to copy the settings. (Default: SIP Phone)
Enter a Extension Group number. · Range: Number in 2 ~ 7 digits
Enter the Extension Group name of up to 31 characters.
Select the action when a call is incoming. Simultaneous: In Simultaneous ringing sequence, when the primary
receiver cannot respond for a certain period of time, you can change to the secondary receiver. You can set the receiver's extension from the primary to the tertiary for a call. Sequential: In Sequential ringing, you can set the ringing extension group.

11-15
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX

Extension Group screen
PBX > Extension Group  Extension Group Entry
Ringing Sequence: Simultaneous
1 2 3 4 5
6

7 8

5 1st Ringing 
6 2nd Startup Time  7 <Apply>  8 <Reset> 

Check the extension numbers to Ring when a call has arrived at the Extension Group. · You can also set "2nd Ringing" and "3rd Ringing" by setting the "2nd Startup
Time" (6) and "3rd Startup Time."

Set the period of time until the secondary ring starts when the 1st

Ringing extensions do not answer.

(Default: Not used)

· Range: Not used, or 10 ~ 60 (seconds) in 5 second steps

Click to apply entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

11-16
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX

Extension Group screen
PBX > Extension Group
 Extension Group Entry Ringing Sequence: Sequential
1 2 3 4 5

6 7

1 Port Type  2 Extension Group Number 3 Extension Group Name  4 Ringing Sequence 
5 Extension Number 6 <Apply>  7 <Reset> 

Select the Port Type that you want to copy the settings. (Default: SIP Phone)
Enter a phone number to an Extension Group. Range: number in 2 ~ 7 digits
Enter the Extension Group name of up to 31 characters.
Select the action when a call is incoming. Simultaneous: In simultaneous ringing sequence, when the primary
receiver cannot respond for a certain period of time, you can change to the secondary receiver. You can set the receiver's extension from the primary to the tertiary for a call. Sequential: In Sequential ringing, you can set the ringing extension group.
Select the action when a call is incoming.
Click to apply entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

11-17
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX
Extension Group screen
PBX > Extension Group
 List of Extension Group Entries
Displays the list of Extension Group entries.

1 2

3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 
3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit an entry.
Click to delete an entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to reset all the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

11-18
https://manual-hub.com/

11 PBX

Inbound Call screen
PBX > Inbound Call
 Inbound Call
Sets the destination extension or queuing of Inbound Calls.

1

2

3 4 5

1 Connect to 
2 Ringtone 
3 Queuing  4 <Apply>  5 <Reset> 

Set the destination extension of Inbound calls to the specified phone

number (dial-in number.)

(Default: None)

You can set an extension number or an extension group number.

L If you select "Custom," you can set the Individual ID of a transceiver like an

example above.

L To set a Dial-in number, select a DID box in the "DID Settings."

(PBX Advanced Settings > DID > DID Settings)

This setting is only for the KX series SIP phones.

Set a Ringtone (pattern) for each phone number.

(Default for IP Line: Outside Tone A,

for Peer to Peer: Inside Tone A)

· Outside Tone A ~ C:

Ringtone pattern for an external call.

· Inside Tone A ~ C:

Ringtone pattern for an internal call.

· Discrimination in the number: Automatically selects a Ringtone, depending on

the phone number of an incoming call.

If set to ON, the Ringing Tone is returned to a caller until the destination phone number is ready to arrive the call, even when the destination phone number is busy, or another request is incoming to it.
(Default: OFF)

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

11-19
https://manual-hub.com/

PBX TRANSCEIVER CALL SETTINGS

Section 12

Callee ID to Phone Number screen .......................................................................................... 12-2 M Save or Write the Callee ID to Phone Number Setting ............................................................ 12-2 M Callee ID to Phone Number ............................................................................................. 12-3 M List of Callee ID to Phone Number Entries ........................................................................... 12-4
Outbound Call Restriction screen ............................................................................................. 12-5 M Outbound Call Restriction ................................................................................................ 12-5 M Target ID Entry............................................................................................................... 12-6 M List of Target ID Entries ................................................................................................... 12-6

12-1
https://manual-hub.com/

12 PBX TRANSCEIVER CALL SETTINGS

Callee ID to Phone Number screen
PBX Transceiver Call Settings > Callee ID to Phone Number
 Save or Write the Callee ID to Phone Number Setting
The common setting for the telephones in the network system.

1 2

1 Load Settings from File  2 Save to File 

You can load the saved Callee ID to Phone Number settings from a CSV format file. Click <Browse> and select the setting file (call_tbl.csv) from the displayed list, and then click <Open>. Confirm the correct file is selected, and then click <Write> to load the settings from the selected file. L Note that the previous settings are deleted when the setting file is loaded.
Saves the settings in the "List of Callee ID to Phone Number Entries" to a CSV format file. Click <Save> and select a folder to save the file into. You can edit the saved file in a spreadsheet.

12-2
https://manual-hub.com/

12 PBX TRANSCEIVER CALL SETTINGS

Callee ID to Phone Number screen
PBX Transceiver Call Settings > Callee ID to Phone Number
 Callee ID to Phone Number
Enter phone numbers that the RoIP gateway dials to call up SIP phones, when making calls from linked transceivers.

1 2

4 3

6

5

7

1 Index  2 Name  3 Call Type 
4 Prefix ID  5 Destination ID  6 Phone Number  7 <Add> 

The index assigned for entry. · Range: 1 ~ 1000

Enter a name of up to 31 characters.

Select the type of call. Call the destinations that matches both of Prefix ID (4) and Destination ID (5) settings.

· Individual: Call only a specified radio.

· Group: Call all radios that belong to a specified group.

· All:

Call all radios.

Enter the prefix ID of the destination. · ID range: (Depends on the system mode)

Enter the ID of the destination. · ID range: (Depends on the system mode)

Enter the phone number of up to 31 digits.

Click to add the entry. L The registered contents are displayed on the List of Callee ID to Phone Number
Entries screen.

12-3
https://manual-hub.com/

12 PBX TRANSCEIVER CALL SETTINGS

Callee ID to Phone Number screen
PBX Transceiver Call Settings > Callee ID to Phone Number
 List of Callee ID to Phone Number Entries
List of the Callee ID entries.

1 2 3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 
3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit an entry.
Click to delete an entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete all the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

12-4
https://manual-hub.com/

12 PBX TRANSCEIVER CALL SETTINGS

Outbound Call Restriction screen
PBX Transceiver Call Settings > Outbound Call Restriction
 Outbound Call Restriction
Set the restriction rules for making outbound calls by the client transceivers.

1

23

1 Restriction Type 
2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

Select the type of restriction on the transceivers in the "List of Target ID

Entries." (See the next page.)

(Default: Deny)

Deny: Inhibits the listed transceivers to make phone calls.

Allow: Allows the listed transceivers to make phone calls.

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Apply>.

12-5
https://manual-hub.com/

12 PBX TRANSCEIVER CALL SETTINGS

Outbound Call Restriction screen
PBX Transceiver Call Settings > Outbound Call Restriction
 Target ID Entry
Enter the transceivers for the Outbound Call Restriction.
1 2 3

4 5

1 Index  2 Prefix ID  3 Transceiver ID 4 <Add>  5 <Reset> 

The index assigned for entry. · Range: 1 ~ 1000

(Default: 1)

Enter the prefix ID of the client transceiver. · ID range: (Depends on the system mode)

Enter the ID of the client transceiver. · ID range: (Depends on the system mode)

Click to add the entry. L The registered contents are displayed on the [List of Target ID Entries] screen.

Click to reset the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Reset>.

PBX Transceiver Call Settings > Outbound Call Restriction
 List of Target ID Entries
List of transceivers for the Outbound Call Restriction.

1 2 3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete>  3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit the entry. L The registered contents are displayed on the [Target ID Entry] screen.
Click to delete an entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete all the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

12-6
https://manual-hub.com/

PBX EXTENSION

Section 13

Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen............................................................................................. 13-3 M Telephone Maintenance ................................................................................................... 13-3 M Telephone Group............................................................................................................ 13-5 M Telephone Individual Settings (KX-UT Series) Common Setting .......................................... 13-5 M Dial Tone Common Setting .......................................................................................... 13-6 M Busy Tone Common Setting ....................................................................................... 13-7 M Reorder Tone Common Setting .................................................................................... 13-8 M Ring Back Tone Common Setting ................................................................................. 13-9 M Hold Alarm Common Setting ....................................................................................... 13-10 M Ringtone Pattern Common Setting .............................................................................. 13-11 M Ringtone Pattern Assignment Common Setting ............................................................... 13-12 M Telephone Common Settings Group 1 ~ 30 ..................................................................... 13-13 M Telephone Individual Settings (KX-UT Series) Group 1 ~ 30 ................................................ 13-14 M Button Assignment ......................................................................................................... 13-16
Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen .......................................................................................... 13-20 M Telephone Maintenance ................................................................................................... 13-20 M Telephone Group............................................................................................................ 13-22 M Dial Tone Common Setting .......................................................................................... 13-23 M Busy Tone Common Setting ....................................................................................... 13-24 M Reorder Tone Common Setting .................................................................................... 13-25 M Ring Back Tone Common Setting ................................................................................. 13-26 M Hold Alarm Common Setting ....................................................................................... 13-27 M Ringtone Pattern Common Setting .............................................................................. 13-28 M Ringtone Pattern Assignment Common Setting ............................................................... 13-29 M Telephone Common Settings Group 1 ~ 30 ..................................................................... 13-30 M Telephone Individual Settings (KX-HDV Series) Group 1 ~ 30 ............................................. 13-31
Expand Unit (KX-HDV230) Expand Unit 1 ~ 5 screen .................................................................. 13-38 M Telephone Maintenance ................................................................................................... 13-38 M Telephone Group............................................................................................................ 13-40 M Telephone Individual Settings (KX-HDV230) ........................................................................ 13-41
Phonebook screen ............................................................................................................... 13-42 M Select Group Setting ...................................................................................................... 13-42 M Save or Write the Phonebook .......................................................................................... 13-43 M Phonebook Entry............................................................................................................ 13-45 M List of Phonebook Entries ................................................................................................ 13-47
13-1
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen .................................................................. 13-48 M Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection ..................................................................... 13-48 M Communication ............................................................................................................ 13-49 M Control ........................................................................................................................ 13-50 M PTT Control Setting ...................................................................................................... 13-56 M Call Initiation Setting ...................................................................................................... 13-57 M Notice Tone on the Telephone .......................................................................................... 13-58 M Release Timer ............................................................................................................... 13-59
Converter Bridge screen ......................................................................................................... 13-60 M Converter Bridge ............................................................................................................ 13-60 M Connection .................................................................................................................. 13-61 M Communication ............................................................................................................ 13-64 M Control ........................................................................................................................ 13-65 M DTMF Dialing ............................................................................................................... 13-69 M PTT Control Setting ...................................................................................................... 13-70 M Call Initiation Setting ...................................................................................................... 13-71 M Notice Tone on the Telephone .......................................................................................... 13-72 M Release Timer ............................................................................................................... 13-73
13-2
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

TTeelelephpohneo(nKeX-U(KT XSe-UrieTs) Sscerereien s) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Telephone Maintenance
Assigns a Group to each extension number. The settings for each extension detail can be edited in "List of Extension Entries" (PBX > Extension > List of Extension Entries).

2

1

3

4

5 6

7

8

9 10

1 Check Box  2 Extension Number 3 Port Type  4 Status 
5 Group 

Click to select the extensions if you want to reboot one or more KX
series telephones. Click "All" to select all the entries. L The extensions where Status (4) is "Not Connected" cannot be selected.

Displays the extension number.

Displays the port type of the Extension.

Displays the connection status of the telephone. L "Not Connected" is displayed for the telephone that is not registered to the
SIP server of this RoIP gateway. L "" is displayed for the Converter bridge or the Transceiver Controller
Telephone Connection.

Set the setting Group of the extension.

(Default: Group 1)

· Options: Group 1 ~ 30

L You can customize the flexible function button assignments for each Group.

13-3
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)  Telephone Maintenance

2

1

3

4

5 6

7

8

9 10

6 <Reboot>  7 <Reboot Selected>  8 <Reboot All> 
9 <Apply>  10 <Reset> 

Click to reboot the KX series telephone.
Click to reboot the selected (with check marks) KX series telephones.
Click to reboot all the KX series telephones whose Status (4) is "Connected" in the list.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

13-4
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Telephone Group
Edits the Group setting of the entered extension (telephone)

Select Group Setting 

Select the setting mode.
· Common Setting Common settings for the KX-UT Series that are connected to the RoIP gateway, such as the tone patterns or volume levels.
· Group 1 ~ Group 30 The custom settings for the KX-UT Series in the selected Group that are connected to the RoIP gateway, such as the flexible button assignments.

PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Telephone Individual Settings (KX-UT Series) Common Setting
The Group setting of the entered extension (telephone)

1 2 3

1 RX Volume  2 TX Volume  3 Echo Canceller 

Set the telephone's receiving audio level. · Range: 6 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

Set the telephone's transmitting audio level. · Range: 6 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

Enabling this option prevents an echo when transmitting and receiving. (Default: Disable)

13-5
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Dial Tone Common Setting
Sets the tone when off-hook.
1 2 3 4

1 Frequency 1/2  2 Level  3 Repeat 
4 Timing 

Set the tone frequencies of the Dial tone. (Default: Frequency 1: 350 / Frequency 2: 440)
· Range: 0 (inaudible), 200 ~ 2000 (Hz) L The 350 Hz and 440 Hz tones simultaneously sound at default.

Set the audio level of the Dial tone. · Range: 24 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

Set whether or not to repeat the set tone pattern.

(Default: Continuous Sound)

· Disable:

Sounds the set pattern in Timing (4) only once

· Enable:

Continuously repeats the set pattern in Timing (4)

· Continuous Sound: Continuously sounds frequencies 1 and 2 (1)

Set the pattern of tone rings and mutes using up to 9 values. The tone

sounds for the set period of time in the ON settings, and mutes for the

set period of time in the OFF settings.

(Default: 60, 0)

· Range of the first "OFF": 60 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

· Range of the others:

51 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

13-6
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Busy Tone Common Setting
Sets the tone when the line is busy.
1 2 3 4

1 Frequency 1/2  2 Level  3 Repeat 
4 Timing 

Set the tone frequencies of the Busy tone. (Default: Frequency 1: 480 / Frequency 2: 620)
· Range: 0 (inaudible), 200 ~ 2000 (Hz) L The 480 Hz and 620 Hz tones simultaneously sound at default.

Set the audio level of the Busy tone. · Range: 24 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

Set whether or not to repeat the set tone pattern.

(Default: Enable)

· Disable:

Sounds the set pattern in Timing (4) only once

· Enable:

Continuously repeats the set pattern in Timing (4)

· Continuous Sound: Continuously sounds frequencies 1 and 2 (1)

Set the pattern of tone rings and mutes using up to 9 values. The tone sounds for the set period of time in the ON settings, and mutes for the set period of time in the OFF settings.
(Default: 60, 500, 440) · Range of the first "OFF": 60 ~ 16000 (milliseconds) · Range of the others: 51 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

13-7
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Reorder Tone Common Setting
Sets the Reorder tone.
1 2 3 4

1 Frequency 1/2  2 Level  3 Repeat 
4 Timing 

Set the tone frequencies of the Reorder tone. (Default: Frequency 1: 480 / Frequency 2: 620)
· Range: 0 (inaudible), 200 ~ 2000 (Hz) L The 480 Hz and 620 Hz tones simultaneously sound at default.

Set the audio level of the Reorder tone. · Range: 24 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

Set whether or not to repeat the set tone pattern.

(Default: Enable)

· Disable:

Sounds the set pattern in Timing (4) only once

· Enable:

Continuously repeats the set pattern in Timing (4)

· Continuous Sound: Continuously sounds frequencies 1 and 2 (1)

Set the pattern of tone rings and mutes using up to 9 values. The tone

sounds for the set period of time in the ON settings, and mutes for the

set period of time in the OFF settings.

(Default: 60, 250, 190)

· Range of the first "OFF": 60 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

· Range of the others:

51 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

13-8
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Ring Back Tone Common Setting
Sets the Ringback tone.
1 2 3 4

1 Frequency 1/2  2 Level  3 Repeat 
4 Timing 

Set the tone frequencies of the Ringback tone. (Default: Frequency 1: 440 / Frequency 2: 480)
· Range: 0 (inaudible), 200 ~ 2000 (Hz) L The 440 Hz and 480 Hz tones simultaneously sound at default.

Set the audio level of the Ringback tone. · Range: 24 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

Set whether or not to repeat the set tone pattern.

(Default: Enable)

· Disable:

Sounds the set pattern in Timing (4) only once

· Enable:

Continuously repeats the set pattern in Timing (4)

· Continuous Sound: Continuously sounds frequencies 1 and 2 (1)

Set the pattern of tone rings and mutes using up to 9 values. The tone

sounds for the set period of time in the ON settings, and mutes for the

set period of time in the OFF settings.

(Default: 60, 2000, 3940)

· Range of the first "OFF": 60 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

· Range of the others:

51 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

13-9
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Hold Alarm Common Setting
Sets the Hold alarm tone that sounds to alert you a second call has been held for certain period of time.
1 2 3 4

1 Frequency 1/2  2 Level  3 Repeat 
4 Timing 

Set the tone frequencies of the Hold alarm. (Default: Frequency 1: 425 / Frequency 2: 0)
· Range: 0 (inaudible), 200 ~ 2000 (Hz)

Set the audio level of the Hold alarm. · Range: 24 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

Set whether or not to repeat the set tone pattern.

(Default: Enable)

· Disable:

Sounds the set pattern in Timing (4) only once

· Enable:

Continuously repeats the set pattern in Timing (4)

· Continuous Sound: Continuously sounds frequencies 1 and 2 (1)

Set the pattern of tone rings and mutes using up to 9 values. The tone

sounds for the set period of time in the ON settings, and mutes for the

set period of time in the OFF settings.

(Default: 120, 14880)

· Range of the first "OFF": 60 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

· Range of the others:

51 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

13-10
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Ringtone Pattern Common Setting
Sets the Ringtone patterns.

Pattern 1 ~ 5

Set the pattern of tone rings and mutes using up to 8 values. The tone sounds for the set period of time in the ON settings, and mutes for the set period of time in the OFF settings.

 The default values of Ringtone Patterns

Pattern ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Pattern 1 2000 4000 











Pattern 2 800 400 800 4000 







Pattern 3 400 200 400 200 800 4000 



Pattern 4 300 200 1000 200 300 4000 



Pattern 5 2000 4000 











· Range : 51 ~ 5000 (milliseconds) L A ring pattern must end with OFF. L The ring patterns can be assigned, according to the incoming call type.
See the next item for details.

13-11
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Ringtone Pattern Assignment Common Setting
Assigns the Ringtone pattern of each incoming call group.
Assign a Ringtone pattern for each incoming call type, according to the setting on the Inbound Call screen. (PBX > Inbound Call) L Information
· The incoming call group depends on the notified number of incoming calls. · The calls from the phone numbers that are entered into extensions A to C are treated as the internal calls. · For an internal call from other than the entered extensions on the Inbound Call screen, the Ringtone pattern set in
the "Extension Assignment" sounds. · When recalling to a parked telephone, the Ringtone set in the "Hold Recall" sounds.
13-12
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Telephone Common Settings Group 1 ~ 30
Sets the rules for incoming calls for each Extension Group.
1 2 3 4 5

1 Pickup Group Number 
2 Call Pickup Target  3 Group Pickup Target 4 Directed Call Pickup Target 5 Call Restriction 

Enter a pick up group number of up to 7 digits. (Default: 01 (for the Group1))
L You can pick up an incoming call of another group extension by dialing the Special Number for the Group Pickup and the Group Number of the group. (For example: Dial "**01" to pick up the call to Group 1.)

Set the incoming call type that the group can pick up. (Default: Extension Only)
· Options: External Call/Extension, External Call Only, or Extension Only

Set the incoming call type that you can pick up, that arrives at an

extension in the same Group.

(Default: External Call/Extension)

· Options: External Call/Extension, External Call Only, or Extension Only

Set the type of directed call that you can pick up (Default: External Call/Extension)
· Options: External Call/Extension, External Call Only, or Extension Only

Select whether or not to restrict making an external call.

(Default: Disable)

· Disable:

You can make external calls.

· Call Restriction Rule 1 ~ 16: Restricts external calls according to the

rules. The rules can be set in "Outbound Call

Restriction Rule Settings."

(PBX Advanced Settings > Numbering Plan >

Outbound Call Restriction Rule Settings)

· External Call Restriction: You cannot make any external calls but you

can make internal calls (including Peer to Peer

calls.)

13-13
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Telephone Individual Settings (KX-UT Series) Group 1 ~ 30
Sets the rules for the incoming calls, and so on, to each Extension group.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 Dial Waiting Time 
2 Accept Internal Calls while on an External Call 
3 Accept External Calls without Button Assignment
4 Holding a Call with the External Call Status Button
5 Long-Hold Watch Time

The waiting time to start dialing after you finished dialing. · Range: 1 ~ 15 (seconds)

(Default: 5)

Set whether or not to accept an incoming extension call (including a Peer to Peer call) while you are talking on an external call.
(Default: Refuse) L When setting to "Refuse," the busy tone will be returned to an incoming
extension call.

Set whether or not to accept an inbound call to a <DN key> button

when an <External Call Status> button is not assigned or all <External

Call Status> buttons are busy.

(Default: Allow)

· Allow: Accepts an inbound call to a <DN key> button. · Refuse: Rejects an inbound call and returns the busy tone.

When selecting "Allow," you can hold an external call using an

<External Call Status> button.

(Default: Refuse)

Sounds an alert if you hold a call for time longer than the set period of

time.

(Default: 180)

· Range: 30 ~ 240 (seconds)

13-14
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Telephone Individual Settings (KX-UT Series)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

6 Phonebook Sharing 

Set whether or not to download the Phonebook data from the RoIP

gateway at every boot up of a KX series telephone.

You can download up to 300 entries to the common phonebook and up

to 100 entries to the Group phonebook.

(Default: Enable)

7 Common Phonebook Sharing

Displayed only when "Phonebook Sharing" (6) is enabled. Set whether or not to download the Common Phonebook data from the RoIP gateway at every boot up of KX series telephones.
(Default: Enable)

8 Ringtone Setting (Phonebook) Select a ringtone from the Ringtone 1 ~ 32.

(Default: Ringtone 1)

9 Key Click Tone 

Set whether or not to sound a tone when you push a key of a KX series

telephone.

(Default: Enable)

13-15
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)
 Button Assignment
Sets the functions of the flexible buttons on the telephone.

Button Assignments 1 ~ 24 

Assign a key function to each Flexible button.

(Default: DN Key)

· One Touch: Used as an alias to a favorite number. You can assign a frequently used telephone number, a special number, prefix, and so on. L You can enter an external phone number with a prefix to use a special number for a Transceiver Individual Call.

· DN key: (Directory Number) Checks the line assigned to the DN button. When a call arrives on the DN button, pressing the button answers the call. Be sure to assign 2 or more DN keys.

The indicator status

· Quickly blinks green: An external or an extension call has arrived

· Slowly blinks green: Holding on your terminal

· Lights green:

The line is in use on your terminal

L The shared line is assigned to the order of the DN key button number. L The number of sharable lines are the total number of DN keys. Also, it
depends on the setting on the "External Call Limiting" screen. (PBX Advanced Settings > External Call Limiting)

Note: At least two DN keys are required, the one for incoming or talking, the other one for holding or keeping a call. Be sure to assign enough DN keys to manage the shared lines.

13-16
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)  Button Assignment
Button Assignments 1 ~ 24 (Continued) · External Call Status Checks the assigned External line (IP line) status. When a call arrives on the External Call Status button, pressing the button answers the call.
The indicator status · Blinks red: An External Call is incoming or held · Lights red: The line is in use on another terminal · Lights green: The line is in use on your terminal L Assign the same number of External Call Status buttons as the channels you are allowed.
13-17
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)  Button Assignment

Button Assignments 1 ~ 24 (Continued) · Call Fwd Always Forwards incoming calls to the specified extension while the indicator on this key lights red. Enter the extension number (with a special number, if required) of the forwarding destination. Push the button to start or stop forwarding.

The indicator status

· Lights red: Forwards calls

· Not lit:

Does not forward calls

L You can also start or stop forwarding by dialing the special number for "Call Forward Always" (Default: *94) and the extension number of the forwarding destination. (PBX > Special Number > Telephone Special Number > Call Forward Always)

· Call Fwd No Answer Forwards an incoming call to the specified extension when you don't answer the call for a certain period of time, such as when you are busy on another call. Enter the extension number (with a special number, if required) of the forwarding destination. Push the button to start or stop forwarding.

The indicator status

· Lights red: Forwards calls

· Not lit:

Does not forward calls

L You can also start or stop forwarding by dialing the special number for "Call Forward No Answer" (Default: *95) and the extension number of the forwarding destination. (PBX > Special Number > Telephone Special Number > Call Foward No Answer)

13-18
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-UT Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series)  Button Assignment

Button Assignments 1 ~ 24 (Continued) · Call Fwd Busy Forwards an incoming call to the specified extension when you are busy on another call. Enter the extension number (with a special number, if required) of the forwarding destination. Push the button to start or stop forwarding.

The indicator status

· Lights red: Forwards calls

· Not lit:

Does not forward calls

L You can also start or stop forwarding by dialing the special number of "Call Forward Busy" (Default: *96) and the extension number of forwarding destination. (PBX > Special Number > Telephone Special Number > Call Forward Busy)

· Headset Assign to talk using a headset if it is connected to the KX series telephone. The indicator lights red while the headset is in use.

· Not used Does not assign any function.

13-19
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

TTeelelephpohneo(nKeX-H(KDVX-SHerDieVs) sScreereines) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)
 Telephone Maintenance
Assigns a Group to each extension number. The settings for each extension detail can be edited in "List of Extension Entries" (PBX > Extension > List of Extension Entries).

2

1

3

4

5 6

7

8

9 10

1 Check Box  2 Extension Number 3 Port Type  4 Status 
5 Group 

Click to select the extensions if you want to reboot one or more KX
series telephones. Click "All" to select all the entries. L The extensions where Status (4) is "Not Connected" cannot be selected.

Displays the extension number.

Displays the port type of the telephone.

Displays the connection status of the telephone. L "Not Connected" is displayed for the telephone that is not registered to the
SIP server of this RoIP gateway. L "" is displayed for the Converter bridge or the Transceiver Controller
Telephone Connection.

Set the setting Group of the extension.

You can customize the flexible function button assignments for each

Group.

(Default: Group 1)

· Range: Group 1 ~ 30

13-20
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)  Telephone Maintenance

2

1

3

4

5 6

7

8

9 10

6 <Reboot>  7 <Reboot Selected>  8 <Reboot All> 
9 <Apply>  10 <Reset> 

Click to reboot the KX series telephone.
Click to reboot the selected (with check marks) KX series telephones.
Click to reboot all the KX series telephones whose Status (4) is "Connected" in the list.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

13-21
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)
 Telephone Group
Edits the Group setting of the entered extension (telephone.)

Select Group Setting 

Select the setting mode, and then click <Edit>. · The setting screen for the selected Group is displayed.
· Common Setting Common settings for the KX-HDV Series that are connected to the RoIP gateway, such as the tone patterns or volume levels.
· Group 1 ~ Group 30 The custom settings for the KX-HDV Series in the selected Group that are connected to the RoIP gateway, such as the flexible button assignments.

13-22
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)
 Dial Tone Common Setting
Sets the tone when off-hook.
1 2 3 4

1 Frequency 1/2  2 Level  3 Repeat 
4 Timing 

Set the tone frequencies of the Dial tone. (Default: Frequency 1: 350 / Frequency 2: 440)
· Range: 0 (inaudible), 200 ~ 2000 (Hz) L The 350 Hz and 440 Hz tones simultaneously sound at default.

Set the audio level of the Dial tone. · Range: 24 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

Set whether or not to repeat the set tone pattern.

(Default: Continuous Sound)

· Disable:

Sounds the set pattern in Timing (4) only once

· Enable:

Continuously repeats the set pattern in Timing (4)

· Continuous Sound: Continuously sounds frequencies 1 and 2

Set the pattern of tone rings and mutes using up to 9 values. The tone

sounds for the set period of time in the ON settings, and mutes for the

set period of time in the OFF settings.

(Default: 60, 0)

· Range of the first "OFF": 60 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

· Range of the others:

51 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

13-23
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)
 Busy Tone Common Setting
Sets the tone when the line is busy.
1 2 3 4

1 Frequency 1/2  2 Level  3 Repeat 
4 Timing 

Set the tone frequencies of the Busy tone. (Default: Frequency 1: 480 / Frequency 2: 620)
· Range: 0 (inaudible), 200 ~ 2000 (Hz) L The 480 Hz and 620 Hz tones simultaneously sound at default.

Set the audio level of the Busy tone. · Range: 24 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

Set whether or not to repeat the set tone pattern.

(Default: Enable)

· Disable:

Sounds the set pattern in Timing (4) only once

· Enable:

Continuously repeats the set pattern in Timing (4)

· Continuous Sound: Continuously sounds frequencies 1 and 2

Set the pattern of tone rings and mutes using up to 9 values. The tone

sounds for the set period of time in the ON settings, and mutes for the

set period of time in the OFF settings.

(Default: 60, 500, 440)

· Range of the first "OFF": 60 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

· Range of the others:

51 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

13-24
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)
 Reorder Tone Common Setting
Sets the Reorder tone.
1 2 3 4

1 Frequency 1/2  2 Level  3 Repeat 
4 Timing 

Set the tone frequencies of the Reorder tone. (Default: Frequency 1: 480 / Frequency 2: 620)
· Range: 0 (inaudible), 200 ~ 2000 (Hz) L The 480 Hz and 620 Hz tones simultaneously sound at default.

Set the audio level of the Reorder tone. · Range: 24 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

Set whether or not to repeat the set tone pattern.

(Default: Enable)

· Disable:

Sounds the set pattern in Timing (4) only once

· Enable:

Continuously repeats the set pattern in Timing (4)

· Continuous Sound: Continuously sounds frequencies 1 and 2

Set the pattern of tone rings and mutes using up to 9 values. The tone

sounds for the set period of time in the ON settings, and mutes for the

set period of time in the OFF settings.

(Default: 60, 250, 190)

· Range of the first "OFF": 60 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

· Range of the others:

51 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

13-25
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)
 Ring Back Tone Common Setting
Sets the Ringback tone.
1 2 3 4

1 Frequency 1/2  2 Level  3 Repeat  4 Timing 

Set the tone frequencies of the Ringback tone. (Default: Frequency 1: 440 / Frequency 2: 480)
· Range: 0 (inaudible), 200 ~ 2000 (Hz) L The 440 Hz and 480 Hz tones simultaneously sound at default.

Set the audio level of the Ringback tone. · Range: 24 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

Set whether or not to repeat the set tone pattern.

(Default: Enable)

· Disable:

Sounds the set pattern in Timing (4) only once

· Enable:

Continuously repeats the set pattern in Timing (4)

· Continuous Sound: Continuously sounds frequencies 1 and 2

Set the pattern of tone rings and mutes using up to 9 values. The tone

sounds for the set period of time in the ON settings, and mutes for the

set period of time in the OFF settings.

(Default: 60, 2000, 3940)

· Range of the first "OFF": 60 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

· Range of the others:

51 ~ 16000 (milliseconds)

13-26
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)
 Hold Alarm Common Setting
Sets the Hold alarm tone that sounds to alert you a second call has been held for certain period of time.

1 2

1 Frequency 1/2  2 Level 

Set the tone frequencies of the Hold alarm. (Default: Frequency 1: 425 / Frequency 2: 0)
· Range: 0 (inaudible), 200 ~ 2000 (Hz)

Set the audio level of the Hold alarm. · Range: 24 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

13-27
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)
 Ringtone Pattern Common Setting
Sets the Ringtone patterns. The Ringtone patterns can be assigned to the

Pattern 1 ~ 5

Set the pattern of tone rings and mutes using up to 8 values. The tone sounds for the set period of time in the ON settings, and mutes for the set period of time in the OFF settings.

 The default values of Ringtone Patterns

Pattern ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Pattern 1 2000 4000 











Pattern 2 800 400 800 4000 







Pattern 3 400 200 400 200 800 4000 



Pattern 4 300 200 1000 200 300 4000 



Pattern 5 2000 4000 











· Range : 51 ~ 5000 (milliseconds) L A ring pattern must end with OFF. L The ring patterns can be assigned, according to the incoming call type.
See the next item for details.

13-28
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)
 Ringtone Pattern Assignment Common Setting
Assigns the Ringtone pattern of each incoming call group.
Assign a Ringtone pattern for each incoming call type according to the setting on the Inbound Call screen. (PBX > Inbound Call) L Information
· The incoming call group depends on the notified number of incoming calls. · The calls from the phone numbers that are entered into extensions A to C are treated as internal calls. · For an internal call from other than the entered extensions on the Inbound Call screen, the Ringtone pattern set in
the "Extension Assignment" sounds. · When recalling to a parked telephone, the Ringtone set in the "Hold Recall" sounds.
13-29
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)
 Telephone Common Settings Group 1 ~ 30
Sets the rules for incoming calls for each Extension Group.
1 2 3 4 5

1 Pickup Group Number 
2 Call Pickup Target  3 Group Pickup Target 4 Directed Call Pickup Target 5 Call Restriction 

Enter a pick up group number of up to 7 digit. (Default: 01 (for the Group1))
L You can pick up an incoming call of another group extension by dialing the Special Number for the Group Pickup and the Group Number of the group. (For example: Dial "**01" to pick up the call to Group 1.)

Set the incoming call type that the group can pick up. (Default: Extension Only)
· Options: Extension Only, External Call Only, or External Call/Extension

Set the incoming call type that you can pick up, that arrives at an

extension in the same Group.

(Default: External Call/Extension)

· Options: Extension Only, External Call Only, or External Call/Extension

Set the type of directed call that you can pick up, that arrives at an

extension in the same Group.

(Default: External Call/Extension)

· Options: Extension Only, External Call Only, or External Call/Extension

Select whether or not to restrict making an external call.

(Default: Disable)

· Disable:

You can make external calls.

· Call Restriction Rule 1 ~ 16: Restricts external calls according to the

rules. The rules can be set in "Outbound Call

Restriction Rule Settings."

(PBX Advanced Settings > Numbering Plan >

Outbound Call Restriction Rule Settings)

· External Call Restriction: You cannot make any external calls but you

can make internal calls (including Peer to Peer

calls.)

13-30
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)
 Telephone Individual Settings (KX-HDV Series) Group 1 ~ 30
Sets the rules for the incoming calls, and so on, to each Extension group.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 Dial Waiting Time  2 Accept Internal Calls while
on an External Call 
3 Accept External Calls without Button Assignment
4 Holding a Call with the External Call Status Button
5 Long-Hold Watch Time

The waiting time to start dialing after you finished dialing. (Default: 5) · Range: 1 ~ 15 (seconds)
Set whether or not to accept an incoming extension call (including a Peer to Peer call) while you are talking on an external call.
(Default: Refuse) L When setting to "Refuse," the busy tone will be returned to an incoming
extension call.

Set whether or not to accept an inbound call to a <DN key> or <Not

Used> button when an <External Call Status> button is not assigned or

all <External Call Status> buttons are busy.

(Default: Allow)

· Allow: Accepts an inbound call to a <DN key> or a <Not used> button. · Refuse: Rejects an inbound call and returns the busy tone.

When selecting "Allow," you can hold an external call using an

<External Call Status> button.

(Default: Refuse)

Sounds an alert if you hold a call for time longer than the set period of

time.

(Default: 180)

· Range: 30 ~ 240 (seconds)

13-31
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)  Telephone Individual Settings (KX-HDV Series)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Phonebook Sharing  7 Common Phonebook Sharing

Set whether or not to download the Phonebook data from the RoIP

gateway at every boot up of a KX series telephone.

You can download up to 300 entries to the common phonebook and up

to 100 entries to the Group phonebook.

(Default: Enable)

L If disabling this setting, the phonbook is not downloaded even if the SIP

phone is booted up.

Displayed only when "Phonebook Sharing" (6) is enabled. Set whether or not to download the Common Phonebook data from the RoIP gateway at every boot up of KX series telephones.
(Default: Enable)

13-32
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)  Telephone Individual Settings (KX-HDV Series)
9

9 Button Assignments 1 ~ 24

Assign a key function to each Flexible button.

(Default: DN Key)

· One Touch: Used as an alias to a favorite number. You can assign a frequently used telephone number, a special number, prefix, and so on. The entered Button Lavel will be displayed on the KX-HDV series telephone. L You can enter an external phone number with a prefix to use a special number for an external call.

13-33
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)  Telephone Individual Settings (KX-HDV Series)
9

9 Button Assignments 1 ~ 24 (Continued) · DN key: (Directory Number) Checks the line assigned to the DN button. When a call arrives on the DN button, pressing the button answers the call. Be sure to assign 2 or more DN keys.

The indicator status

· Quickly blinks blue: An external or an extension call has arrived

· Slowly blinks blue: Holding on your terminal

· Lights blue:

The line is in use on your terminal

L The shared line is assigned to the order of the DN key button number. L The number of sharable lines are the total number of DN keys. Also it
depends on the setting on the "External Call Limiting" screen. (PBX Advanced Settings > External Call Limiting)

Note: At least two DN keys are required, the one for incoming or talking, the other one for holding or keeping a call. Be sure to assign enough DN keys to manage the shared lines.

· External Call Status Checks the assigned External line (IP line) status. When a call arrives on the External Call Status button, pressing the button answers the call.

The indicator status · Blinks red: An External Call is incoming or held · Lights red: The line is in use
L Assign the same number of External Call Status buttons as the channels you are allowed.

13-34
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)  Telephone Individual Settings (KX-HDV Series)
9

9 Button Assignments 1 ~ 24 (Continued) · Call Fwd Always Forwards incoming calls to the specified extension while the indicator on this key lights red. Enter the extension number (with a special number, if required) of the forwarding destination. Push the button to start or stop forwarding.

The indicator status

· Lights red: Forwards calls

· Not lit:

Does not forward calls

L You can also start or stop forwarding by dialing the special number for "Call Forward Always" (Default: *94) and the extension number of the forwarding destination. (PBX > Special Number > Telephone Special Number > Call Forward Always)

· Call Fwd No Answer Forwards an incoming call to the specified extension when you don't answer the call for a certain period of time, such as when you are busy on another call. Enter the extension number (with a special number, if required) of the forwarding destination. Push the button to start or stop forwarding.

The indicator status

· Lights red: Forwards calls

· Not lit:

Does not forward calls

L You can also start or stop forwarding by dialing the special number for "Call Forward No Answer" (Default: *95) and the extension number of the forwarding destination. (PBX > Special Number > Telephone Special Number > Call Forward No Answer)

13-35
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)  Telephone Individual Settings (KX-HDV Series)
9

9 Button Assignments 1 ~ 24 (Continued) · Call Fwd Busy Forwards an incoming call to the specified extension when you are busy on another call. Enter the extension number (with a special number, if required) of the forwarding destination. Push the button to start or stop forwarding.

The indicator status

· Lights red: Forwards calls

· Not lit:

Does not forward calls

L You can also start or stop forwarding by dialing the special number of "Call Forward Busy" (Default: *96) and the extension number of forwarding destination. (PBX > Special Number > Telephone Special Number > Call Forward Busy)

13-36
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Telephone (KX-HDV Series) screen
PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series)  Telephone Individual Settings (KX-HDV Series)
9
9 Button Assignments 1 ~ 24 (Continued) · Transfer Holds and forwards a call to the specified extension. After the forwarding destination answers, push [OK] or hang up to transfer a call. · Blind Transfer Holds and immediately forwards a call to the specified extension. Enter the extension number of the destination and hang up the telephone. · Conference Holds a call and makes a conference call to the specified extension. Enter the extension number of the destination. After the destination answers, push the <CONF> button to start the conference call. · Not used Does not assign any function.
13-37
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Expand Unit (KX-HDV230) Expand Unit 1 ~ 5 screen
PBX Extension > Expand Unit (KX-HDV230) Expand Unit 1 ~ 5
 Telephone Maintenance
Enters the common phonebook or the phonebook that is shared in the particular Group for the KX series SIP phones. The settings of each extension details can be edited in "List of Extension Entries" (PBX > Extension > List of Extension Entries).

2

1

3

4

5 6

7

8

9 10

1 Check Box  2 Extension Number 3 Port Type  4 Status 
5 Group 

Click to select the extensions if you want to reboot one or more KX series telephones. Click "All" to select all the entries. L The extensions where Status (4) is "Not Connected" cannot be selected.
Displays the extension number.
Displays the port type of the telephone.
Displays the connection status of the telephone. L "Not Connected" is displayed for the telephone that is not registered to the
SIP server of this RoIP gateway. L " " is displayed for the Converter Bridge or the Transceiver Controller
Telephone Connection.
Set the line Group of the extension. You can customize the flexible function button assignments for each Group. Assign the same Group if you want to use the button functions from other telephones by dialing the special number and button number. (For example: When picking up a parked telephone call) · Range: Group 1 ~ 30

13-38
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Expand Unit (KX-HDV230) Expand Unit 1 ~ 5 screen
PBX Extension > Expand Unit (KX-HDV230) Expand Unit 1 ~ 5  Telephone Maintenance

2

1

3

4

5 6

7

8

9 10

6 <Reboot>  7 <Reboot Selected>  8 <Reboot All> 
9 <Apply>  10 <Reset> 

Click to reboot the KX series telephone.
Click to reboot the selected (with check marks) KX series telephones.
Click to reboot all the KX series telephones whose Status (4) is "Connected" in the list.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

13-39
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Expand Unit (KX-HDV230) Expand Unit 1 ~ 5 screen
PBX Extension > Expand Unit (KX-HDV230) Expand Unit 1 ~ 5
 Telephone Group
Edits the Group setting of the entered extension (telephone)

Select Group Setting 

Select a Group from Group 1 to Group 30 that you want to edit, and then click <Edit> to enter the edit mode.

13-40
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Expand Unit (KX-HDV230) Expand Unit 1 ~ 5 screen
PBX Extension > Expand Unit (KX-HDV230) Expand Unit 1 ~ 5
 Telephone Individual Settings (KX-HDV230)
Assigns the function to each flexible button on the expand units 1 to 5.

Button Assignment 
Expand Unit 1 (1 ~ 40) Expand Unit 2 (41 ~ 80) Expand Unit 3 (81 ~ 120) Expand Unit 4 (121 ~ 160) Expand Unit 5 (161 ~ 200)

Assign a button function to each flexible button. The Assignable functions: · One Touch · DN Key (Directory Number)* · External Call Status* · Call Fwd Always* · Call Fwd No Answer* · Call Fwd Busy* · Transfer · Blind Transfer · Conference · Not used
* Assignable only to Expand unit 1 (Button 1 ~ 40)
L Refer to the "Button Assignment" on pages 13-33 ~13-37 for details on each button function.

13-41
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Phonebook screen
PBX Extension > Phonebook
 Select Group Setting
Edits the phonebook to the Common phonebook and the Group phonebooks.

Select Group Setting 

Click the button that you want to edit its phonebook. L The entries in the selected phonebook are displayed in the "List of
Phonebook Entries" below on the screen. (See page 13-47.) L The number of entries are displayed below the Group buttons. L You can edit the Group setting in "Telephone Maintenance."
(PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-UT Series) > Telephone Maintenance) (PBX Extension > Telephone (KX-HDV Series) > Telephone Maintenance)

13-42
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Phonebook screen
PBX Extension > Phonebook
 Save or Write the Phonebook
You can save or load the selected phonebook to or from a CSV format file.

1 2

1 Load Settings from File  2 Save to File 

You can load the saved phonebook from a CSV format file. Click <Browse> and select the setting file (phonebook.csv) from the displayed list, and then click <Open>. Confirm the correct file is selected, and then click <Write> to load the phonebook from the selected file.
L Note that the phonebook settings will be overwritten when the phonebook is loaded.
L The setting backup file on the "Settings Backup/Restore" includes the phonebook data. If the setting file is loaded on the "Settings Backup/Restore" screen (Management > Settings Backup/Restore > Settings Restore), the phonebook settings will be overwritten.
L A file that is saved by other than the following procedures may not work properly: · Saved file using the <Save> (2) button. · A CSV file in the same format as described on the next page.
Saves the settings in the "List of Phonebook Entries," on the screen, to a CSV format file. Click <Save> and select a folder to save the file into. L You can edit the saved file in a spreadsheet. L The saved file name depends on the selected Group.
(For example: The phonebook for Group 1 is saved to phonebook01.csv)

13-43
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Phonebook screen
PBX Extension > Phonebook  Save or Write the Phonebook  About the rules of a CSV file for the phonebook
When editing a saved CSV file, be sure to observe the following rules. Otherwise the phonebook settings may not load properly into the RoIP gateway.

Column

Title

Description

A Index

1 ~ 300 for the Common phonebook, 1 ~ 100 for a Group phonebook

B Name

Do not duplicate the number. Up to 30 characters

C Phone Number

"tel:" and up to 22 digits or prefix

D  (Reserved)

Do not edit or delete this column.

E  (Reserved)

Do not edit or delete this column.

F Nickname

Up to 30 characters

G Speed Dial Number "tel:" and up to 7 characters, leave blank if you do not use the Speed Dial

H Display Type

Number. 0: Phone Number, 1: Speed Dial Number

I Line Type

0: External line, 1: Extension

Do not edit or delete this column.

J group

1 ~ 10

Do not edit or delete this column.

· The lines that begins with "#" are comments. · Delete unnecessary lines.

13-44
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Phonebook screen
PBX Extension > Phonebook
 Phonebook Entry
You can enter frequently used or commonly used phone numbers into a phonebook. Refer to the Installation guide for details on using a phonebook.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8

1 Index  2 Name*  3 Nickname*  4 Phone Number*  5 Speed Dial Number 
*Required to enter a phonebook.

Select a number from the list. · Range for the Common phonebook: 1 ~ 300 · Range for the Group phonebooks: 1 ~ 100
Enter a destination name of up to 30 characters.
Enter a nickname of up to 30 characters.
Enter the telephone number (with a special number and prefix, if required) of the destination. L You cannot enter an alias number of up to 22 digits with a special number or
a prefix.
Enter an alias number of up to 7 digits. The Speed Dial Number is used when making an external call, or a Peer to Peer call (that does not go through the SIP server.) L You cannot dial a Speed Dial Number after any special number and/or a
prefix. L A Speed Dial Number is usable on the line that is set in "Extension." L The Speed Dial Number is usable for telephones other than the KX series.
About the Speed Dial numbers Setting numbers other than the emergency telephone numbers in your area are recommended as Speed Dial numbers.

13-45
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Phonebook screen
PBX Extension > Phonebook
 Phonebook Entry
1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8

6 Display Type 
7 <Apply>  8 <Reset> 

Select "Phone Number" or "Speed Dial Number" to display a

phonebook on the telephone.

(Default: Phone Number)

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

13-46
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Phonebook screen
PBX Extension > Phonebook
 List of Phonebook Entries
Lists the phonebook entries.

1 2

3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete> 
3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit an entry.
Click to delete an entry. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete>.
Click to delete all the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

13-47
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
 Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
Settings for communication between an IP transceiver and a SIP phone.

Extension Number 

Displays the extension number of the Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection that is set in "Extension." (PBX > Extension > Extension)

13-48
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
 Communication
Settings to communicate between a SIP phone and a transceiver that belongs to a group set in the RoIP gateway.

1 2

1 Call Type  2 Destination ID 

Set the call type to send from a SIP phone to a transceiver that belongs

to the RoIP gateway.

(Default: Group)

· Options: Individual, Group, or All

Does not displayed when the Call Type (1) is set to "All." Enter the Individual ID or Group ID of the destination transceiver.
(Default: 1) · Range: 1 ~ 9999

13-49
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
 Control
The settings for communication control between a SIP phone and a transceiver that are linked to the RoIP gateway.

1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9

1 PTT Call Cancel on Call Incoming 
2 Target Availability Check 
3 Timing of Target Availability Check 

Select "Enable" to cancel the current call if a SIP phone receives another call from the same transceiver while a call is incoming.
(Default: Disable)

Select whether or not to check the availability of a destination

transceiver when a SIP phone makes a call to it.

If this setting is enabled, the RoIP gateway will stop sending a call to

a linked transceiver if the destination transceiver is busy, or it does not

answer in 5 seconds.

(Default: Enable)

Set when the Target Availability Check (2) will occur. (Default: After Call)
· After Call: Checks after a call is established · Prior to Call: Checks before a call is established

13-50
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection  Control

1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9

4 Call Incoming 
5 Calling  6 Connection Success 7 Disconnect  8 Connection Failure  9 Notice Tone Volume 

Select a Notice Tone to send to notify a transceiver that a call from a

SIP phone has arrived.

(Default: Not used)

· Not used:

Does not send a Notice Tone

(The transceiver automatically answers.)

· Notice Tone 1 ~ 3: Sends the selected Notice Tone

(The transceiver can answer by pushing [PTT] between

the Notice Tones.)

The Notice Tone to send to a transceiver while calling a target SIP

phone.

(Default: Notice Tone 2)

The Notice Tone to send to a transceiver alerting that the target SIP

phone answered the call.

(Default: Notice Tone 2)

The Notice Tone to send to a transceiver alerting that the target SIP

phone has hung up the call.

(Default: Notice Tone 3)

The Notice Tone to send to a transceiver alerting that the call could

arrive at the target SIP phone.

(Default: Notice Tone 3)

Set the volume level of the Notice Tones (4 ~ 8). · Range: 12 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

13-51
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
 Control
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20

L "PTT-ON Tone" (18) and "PTT-OFF Tone" (19) are displayed only when any PTT Control Types from "Group Call/All Call" (11) to "Individual Call to a Microphone" (17) are set to "DTMF."

 PTT Control Type Sets the type of signal that SIP phones use to communicate for each call type or destination device type. · Options: VOX (Voice signal,) DTMF (Tone signal,) or Constant Transmission during Call L When "Constant Transmission during Call" is selected, the No Voice Release Timer detects the communication status only by the signal received from the specified destination. (PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection > Release Timer) If a signal from the specified destination is not received for the set period of time, the call may be terminated because of the No Vice Release Timer function.

11 Group Call/ All Call 

Set the signal type for Group Calls and All Calls to the linked

transceivers.

(Default: VOX)

· VOX: When a voice signal is received from a SIP phone, the target

transceiver enters the transmit mode.

· DTMF: When a tone signal is received from a SIP phone, the target

transceiver enters the transmit mode.

· Constant Transmission during Call:

As soon as the communication is established, the target transceiver

enters the transmit mode.

The No Voice Release Timer detects only the signal (VOX or RTP)

received from the Converter Bridge connection destination.

12 Individual Call to a Wireless LAN Transceiver

Set the signal type for Individual calls to Wireless LAN transceivers. (Default: VOX)
· VOX: When detecting a voice signal from a SIP phone, the target Wireless LAN transceiver enters the receive mode.
· DTMF: When detecting a tone signal from a SIP phone, the target Wireless LAN transceiver enters the receive mode.
· Constant Transmission during Call: As soon as the communication is established, the target Wireless LAN transceiver enters the receive mode. The No Voice Release Timer detects only the signal (VOX or RTP) received from the Wireless LAN transceiver.

13-52
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
 Control
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20

L "PTT-ON Tone" (18) and "PTT-OFF Tone" (19) are displayed only when any PTT Control Types from "Group Call/All Call" (11) to "Individual Call to a Microphone" (17) are set to "DTMF."

13 Individual Call to a IP Transceiver 

Set the signal type for Individual calls to IP transceivers. (Default: VOX)
· VOX: When detecting a voice signal from a SIP phone, the target IP transceiver enters the receive mode.
· DTMF: When detecting a tone signal from a SIP phone, the target IP transceiver enters the receive mode.
· Constant Transmission during Call: As soon as the communication is established, the target IP transceiver enters the receive mode. The No Voice Release Timer detects only the signal (VOX or RTP) received from the IP transceiver.

14 Individual Call to a Digital Transceiver 

Set the signal type for Individual Calls to digital transceivers. (Default: VOX)
· VOX: When a voice signal is received from a SIP phone, the digital transceiver enters the transmit mode.
· DTMF: When a tone signal is received from a SIP phone, the digital transceiver enters the transmit mode.
· Constant Transmission during Call: As soon as the communication is established, the digital transceiver enters the receive mode. The No Voice Release Timer detects only the signal (VOX or RTP) received from the digital transceiver.

15 Individual Call to an EXT (Transceiver) 

Set the signal type for Individual Calls to EXT (transceivers.) (Default: VOX)
· VOX: When a voice signal is received from a SIP phone, the EXT (transceiver) enters the transmit mode.
· DTMF: When a tone signal is received from a SIP phone, the EXT (transceiver) enters the transmit mode.
· Constant Transmission during Call: As soon as the communication is established, the EXT (transceiver) enters the receive mode. The No Voice Release Timer detects only the signal (VOX or RTP) received from the EXT (transceiver.)
13-53

https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
 Control
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20

L "PTT-ON Tone" (18) and "PTT-OFF Tone" (19) are displayed only when any PTT Control Types from "Group Call/All Call" (11) to "Individual Call to a Microphone" (17) are set to "DTMF."

16 Individual Call to an EXT (EXT I/O Unit) 

Set the signal type for Individual Calls to EXT (I/O units.) (Default: VOX)
· VOX: When a voice signal is received from a SIP phone, the EXT (I/O unit) enters the transmit mode.
· DTMF: When a tone signal is received from a SIP phone, the EXT (I/O unit) enters the transmit mode.
· Constant Transmission during Call: As soon as communication is established, the EXT (I/O unit) enters the transmit mode. The No Voice Release Timer detects only the signal (VOX or RTP) received from the EXT (I/O unit.)

17 Individual Call to a Microphone 

Set the signal type for Individual Calls to a speaker microphone. (Default: VOX)
· VOX: When a voice signal is received from a SIP phone, the speaker microphone enters the receive mode.
· DTMF: When a tone signal is received from a SIP phone, the speaker microphone enters the receive mode.
· Constant Transmission during Call: As soon as communication is established, the microphone enters the receive mode. The No Voice Release Timer detects only the signal (VOX or RTP) received from the speaker microphone.

13-54
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
 Control
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
L "PTT-ON Tone" (18) and "PTT-OFF Tone" (19) are displayed only when any PTT Control Types from "Group Call/All Call" (11) to "Individual Call to a Microphone" (17) are set to "DTMF."

18 PTT-ON Tone  19 PTT-OFF Tone  20 Method 

Select the PTT-ON tone when any signal types shown above (11 ~ 17)

is set to "DTMF."

(Default: 0)

· Range: 0 ~ 9, *, or #

L Dial this number on the SIP phone to make a destination device start

transmitting.

L If you enter the same value in both the PTT-ON Tone and the PTT-OFF

Tone, you can toggle the destination device status by dialing this number.

Select the PTT-OFF tone when any signal types shown above (11 ~ 17)

is set to "DTMF."

(Default: 0)

· Range: 0 ~ 9, *, or #

L Dial this tone on the SIP phone to make the destination device to stop

transmitting.

L If you enter the same value in both the PTT-ON Tone and PTT-OFF Tone,

you can toggle the destination device status by dialing this number.

Set the transmitting trigger to make a call from a transceiver controller

to the IP telephone system.

(Default: RTP)

· VOX: Starts dialing when the VOX detects voice data in the voice packet

that is received by the bridge interface through the RTP (Real-time

Transport Protocol).

· RTP: Starts dialing when the RTP (voice data packet) is longer than the set

period time in the Attack Time setting is received, regardless of if the

RTP includes voice data or not.

13-55
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
 PTT Control Setting
The VOX (voice operated transmission) function automatically switches the connected transceiver to transmit, when the RoIP gateway receives an audio signal through the network.

1 2 3 4

1 Attack Time  2 Release Time  3 Voice Delay  4 VOX Threshold 

Enter the TX delay time.

(Default: 50)

· Range: 5 ~ 500 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

After the continuous signal for the set period of time is received from a

SIP phone, the transceiver controller starts to transmit.

Select the RX delay time.

(Default: 500)

· Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

This is the delay time for the VOX to turn OFF, after no audio signal is

received through the network.

Set the audio signal buffer time to prevent intermittent audio. (Default: 200)
· Range: 0 ~ 1500 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps The voice delay is the amount of time the RoIP gateway stores the transmitted audio to prevent missing the first part of the speech.

Set the voice threshold level.

(Default: 40)

· Range: 0 ~ 100 (%)

The VOX function automatically switches between receive and transmit

according to this threshold level. The lower values make the VOX

function more sensitive to the voice input.

13-56
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
 Call Initiation Setting
Sets the details on voice transmission to the SIP phone when there is voice input from the transceiver controller.

1 2 3 4

1 Attack Time  2 Release Time  3 Voice Delay  4 VOX Threshold 

Enter the TX attack time in 5 millisecond step. It is the delay time before

the VOX switch turns ON after an audio signal is received through the

network.

(Default: 1000)

· Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

Select the RX delay time in 5 millisecond step. It is the delay time for

the VOX switch to turn OFF after no audio signal is received through

the network.

(Default: 200)

· Range: 5 to 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

Set the audio signal buffer time to prevent intermittent audio. (Default: 5)
· Range: 0 ~ 500 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

The VOX function automatically switches between receive and transmit

according to this threshold level.

(Default: 70)

· Range: 0 ~ 100 (%)

L Lower values make the VOX function more sensitive to the audio signal.

13-57
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
 Notice Tone on the Telephone
Sets the details on the notification to a SIP phone, when a call has arrived on a transceiver controller from a SIP phone.

1 2 3

1 Connection Success  2 PTT Monitoring  3 Notice Tone Volume 

Select a Notice Tone to notify a SIP phone that a call has arrived on the

transceiver controller and the SIP phone is ready to transmit.

(Default: Notice Tone 1)

· Not used:

Does not send a Notice Tone

· Notice Tone 1 ~ 3: Sends the selected Notice Tone

Select a Notice Tone to alert you to switch receiving and transmitting.

(Default: Not used)

· Not used:

Does not send a Notice Tone

· Notice Tone 1 ~ 3: Sends the selected Notice Tone

Set the volume level of the Notice Tones (1 ~ 2). · Range: 12 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

13-58
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection screen
PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection
 Release Timer
Sets the timers for canceling or disconnecting a call.
1 2 3

1 Call Cancel Timer  2 No Voice Release Timer  3 Forced Disconnect Timer

Enter the period of time to cancel the call. When the set time has passed without a response from the SIP phone, the call is canceled.
(Default: 15) · Range: 0 (OFF) or 5 ~ 60 (seconds)

Enter the period of time to stop transmitting. When the set time has passed with no audio signal, transmitting is stopped.
(Default: 15) · Range: 0 (OFF) or 5 ~ 600 (seconds)

Enter the period of time to be forcibly stop transmitting. When the set

time has passed, transmitting is stopped, even when communication is

ongoing.

(Default: 10)

· Range: 0 (OFF) or 5 ~ 120 (minutes)

13-59
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION
Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge
 Converter Bridge
Selects a extension whose settings you want to edit settings in the "Connection" item below.

Extension Number 

Displays the extension number of the Converter Bridge, if it is set in "Extension" (PBX > Extension > Extension.)

13-60
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge
 Connection
Sets the destination device of the bridge connection that connects to the SIP phones

1 2 3 4 5
6 7
L The screen above is when the Transmission Mode (1) is set to "Multicast".

1 Transmission Mode  2 Destination Address 
3 Destination Port Number 

Set the transmission mode on each extension (port) number. (Default: Unicast)

Set an appropriate IP address, depending on the Transmission Mode

(1) setting.

· For Unicast: Set the IP address for the LAN, or the domain name

of the destination, that of up to 63 characters.

(Default: Blank)

· For Multicast: Set the same value as the bridge setting of the call

destination.

(Default: 239.255.255.1)

Set the same port number as the "Source Port Number" (4) setting of the VE-PG4 that works as the Converter Bridge connection Destination. · Range: An even number from 2 to 65534. L Do not duplicate other connection port settings.

 The Default port settings in the Unicast mode

PORT

DEFAULT

PORT

Converter Bridge 1

24200 Converter Bridge 11

Converter Bridge 2

24202 Converter Bridge 12

Converter Bridge 3

24204 Converter Bridge 13

Converter Bridge 4

24206 Converter Bridge 14

Converter Bridge 5

24208 Converter Bridge 15

Converter Bridge 6

24210 Converter Bridge 16

Converter Bridge 7

24212 Converter Bridge 17

Converter Bridge 8

24214 Converter Bridge 18

Converter Bridge 9

24216 Converter Bridge 19

Converter Bridge 10

24218 Converter Bridge 20

DEFAULT 24220 24222 24224 24226 24228 24230 24232 24234 24236 24238

13-61
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge  Connection

1 2 3 4 5
6 7
L The screen above is when the Transmission Mode (1) is set to "Multicast".

3 Destination Port Number (Continued)  The Default port settings in the Multicast mode

PORT

DEFAULT

PORT

Converter Bridge 1

22510 Converter Bridge 11

Converter Bridge 2

22510 Converter Bridge 12

Converter Bridge 3

22510 Converter Bridge 13

Converter Bridge 4

22510 Converter Bridge 14

Converter Bridge 5

22510 Converter Bridge 15

Converter Bridge 6

22510 Converter Bridge 16

Converter Bridge 7

22510 Converter Bridge 17

Converter Bridge 8

22510 Converter Bridge 18

Converter Bridge 9

22510 Converter Bridge 19

Converter Bridge 10

22510 Converter Bridge 20

DEFAULT 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510

4 Source Port Number 

Set the same port number as the setting in the Converter Bridge connection destination. · Range: An even number from 2 to 65534 L Do not duplicate other connection port settings, when using in the Unicast
mode.

 The Default port settings in the Unicast mode

PORT

DEFAULT

PORT

Converter Bridge 1

24200 Converter Bridge 11

Converter Bridge 2

24202 Converter Bridge 12

Converter Bridge 3

24204 Converter Bridge 13

Converter Bridge 4

24206 Converter Bridge 14

Converter Bridge 5

24208 Converter Bridge 15

Converter Bridge 6

24210 Converter Bridge 16

Converter Bridge 7

24212 Converter Bridge 17

Converter Bridge 8

24214 Converter Bridge 18

Converter Bridge 9

24216 Converter Bridge 19

Converter Bridge 10

24218 Converter Bridge 20

DEFAULT 24220 24222 24224 24226 24228 24230 24232 24234 24236 24238

13-62
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge  Connection

1 2 3 4 5
6 7
L The screen above is when the Transmission Mode is set to "Multicast".

4 Source Port Number (Continued)  The Default port settings in the Multicast mode

PORT

DEFAULT

PORT

Converter Bridge 1

22510 Converter Bridge 11

Converter Bridge 2

22510 Converter Bridge 12

Converter Bridge 3

22510 Converter Bridge 13

Converter Bridge 4

22510 Converter Bridge 14

Converter Bridge 5

22510 Converter Bridge 15

Converter Bridge 6

22510 Converter Bridge 16

Converter Bridge 7

22510 Converter Bridge 17

Converter Bridge 8

22510 Converter Bridge 18

Converter Bridge 9

22510 Converter Bridge 19

Converter Bridge 10

22510 Converter Bridge 20

DEFAULT 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510 22510

5 Voice Protocol 

Displays the assigned Voice Protocol in the "AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment" setting. (Bridge Connection Setting > Bridge Connection > AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment)

6 Multicast TTL 

Displayed only when Transmission Mode (1) is set to "Multicast." For the expiration data of the voice packet, set the TTL (Time To Live) until the voice packet reaches the communication destination.
(Default: 1) · Range: 1 ~ 255

7 Connection Status

Displays the status of the Converter Bridge connection. Click <Refresh> to reload the status, or <Activate> to activate the set devices. L After they are successfully activated, the button changes to "Inactivate."

13-63
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge
 Communication
The settings to communicate between the RoIP gateway and a converter bridge connection destination.

1 2
3 4 5 6
L The screen shows when both Encryption and Talkback are enabled.

1 Encryption  2 TalkBack  3 Call Type  4 Dstination Prefix ID  5 Destination ID  6 Source ID 

Select "Enable" to encrypt the communication.

(Default: Disable)

When you select "Enable," enter the appropriate key in "Encryption

Key."

· Range: 1 ~ 32767

L This setting takes effect when the AMBE+2 codec is used.

Commonly used by the transceivers that belong to a group set in the RoIP Gatway. Set the period of time from when the transceiver finishes transmitting until the screen returns to the standby mode. (Default: 5) · Range: 1 ~ 10 (seconds)

Set the call type to send from a SIP phone to a transceiver that belongs

to the Converter Bridge connection destination.

(Default: Group)

· Options: Individual, Group, or All

Enter the prefix ID of the destination. · Range: Blank or 0 ~ 30 L The range differs, depending on the system settings

(Default: Blank)

Does not displayed when the Call Type (3) is set to "All."

Enter an Individual ID or Group ID of the destination transceiver, that is

entered into the Converter Bridge connection destination. (Default: 1)

· Range: When the Prefix is not set: 1 ~ 9999999

When the Prefix is set:

1 ~ 99999

Enter an Individual ID or Group ID of the caller. This ID will be announced at the call destination. · Range: 1 ~ 9999999

(Default: 1)

13-64
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge
 Control
The settings for the communication control between the RoIP gateway and a Converter Bridge connection destination.

1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 Prioritized Receive  2 PTT Call Cancel on
Call Incoming  3 Target Availability Check 
4 Timing of Target Availability Check 

Select "Enable" to inhibit a SIP phone from transmitting an RTP signal

while it is receiving an RTP signal from a Converter Bridge connection

destination.

(Default: Disable)

Select "Enable" to cancel the current call if a SIP phone receives

another call from the same Converter Bridge connection destination

while a call is incoming.

(Default: Disable)

Displayed only when the voice protocol setting on the Converter Bridge

is set to "Bridge Protocol" or "Protocol for Transceiver and SIP Phone

connection" in the "AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment." (Bridge Connection

Settings > Bridge Connection > AMBE+2 Vocoder Assignment >

Converter Bridge 1 ~ 20)

Select whether or not to check the availability of a Converter Bridge

connection destination when a device such as SIP phone linked to this

RoIP gateway makes a call (excluding an emergency call) to it.

If this setting is enabled, the RoIP gateway will stop sending a call to a

linked transceiver when the destination transceiver is busy, or it does

not answer in 5 seconds.

(Default: Enable)

Set when the Target Availability Check (3) will occur. (Default: After Call)
· After Call: Checks after a call is established · Prior to Call: Checks before a call is established

13-65
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge  Control

1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11

5 Call Incoming 
6 Dialing Notice Tone on the Transceiver 
7 Calling  8 Connection Success 9 Disconnect  10 Connection Failure  11 Notice Tone Volume 

Select a Notice Tone to send to notify a client transceiver that a call

from a SIP phone has arrived.

(Default: Not used)

· Not used:

Does not send a Notice Tone

(The transceiver automatically answers.)

· Notice Tone 1 ~ 3: Sends the selected Notice Tone

(The transceiver can answer by pushing [PTT] between

the Notice Tones.)

Displayed when the "DTMF Dialig" (on the screen) is enabled. (Default: Not used)

The Notice Tone to send to a caller transceiver alerting that the target

SIP phone answered the call.

(Default: Notice Tone 2)

The Notice Tone to send to a caller transceiver alerting that the target

SIP phone has hung up the call.

(Default: Notice Tone 2)

The Notice Tone to send to a caller transceiver alerting that the call

could arrive at the target SIP phone.

(Default: Notice Tone 3)

The Notice Tone to send to a caller transceiver alerting that the call

could arrive at the target SIP phone.

(Default: Notice Tone 3)

Set the volume level of the Notice Tones (5 ~ 10). · Range: 12 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

13-66
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge  Control

12 13 14
15
L "PTT-ON Tone" (13) and "PTT-OFF Tone" (14) are displayed only when "PTT Control Type" (12) is set to "DTMF."

12 PTT Control Type  13 PTT-ON Tone 

Sets the type of signal that SIP phones use to communicate for each

call type or destination device type.

(Default: VOX)

· VOX: When a voice signal is received from a SIP phone, the target

transceiver enters the transmit mode.

· DTMF: When a tone signal is received from a SIP phone, the target

transceiver enters the tranasmit mode.

· Constant Transmission during Call:

As soon as communication is established, the target transceiver

enters the tranasmit mode.

The No Voice Release Timer detects only the signal (VOX or RTP)

received from the Converter Bridge connection destination.

L When "Constant Transmission during Call" is selected, the No Voice Release

Timer detects the communication status only by the received signal from the

specified destination.

(PBX Extension > Transceiver Controller Telephone Connection > Release

Timer)

If a signal from the specified destination is not received for the set period

of time, the call may be terminated because of the No Voice Release Timer

function.

Select the PTT-ON tone when the either the signal types shown above

(12) is set to "DTMF."

(Default: 0)

· Range: 0 ~ 9, *, or #

L Dial this number on the SIP phone to make a destination device start

transmitting.

L If you enter the same value to both the PTT-ON Tone and the PTT-OFF

Tone, you can toggle the destination device status by dialing this number.

13-67
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge  Control

12 13 14
15
L "PTT-ON Tone" (13) and "PTT-OFF Tone" (14) are displayed only when "PTT Control Type" (12) is set to "DTMF."

14 PTT-OFF Tone  15 Method 

Select the PTT-OFF tone when the PTT Control Tone (12) is set to

"DTMF."

(Default: 0)

· Range: 0 ~ 9, *, or #

L Dial this tone on the SIP phone to make the destination device stop

transmitting.

L If you enter the same value to both the PTT-ON Tone and PTT-OFF Tone,

you can toggle the destination device status by dialing this number.

Set the transmitting trigger to make a call from a bridge to the IP

telephone system.

(Default: RTP)

· VOX: Starts dialing when the VOX detects voice data in the voice packet

that is received by the bridge interface through RTP (Real-time

Transport Protocol).

· RTP: Starts dialing when RTP (voice data packet) is received later than the

set period time in the Attack Time setting, regardless of if the RTP

includes voice data or not.

13-68
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge
 DTMF Dialing
Set details on DTMF Dialing through a Converter Bridge connection port.

1 2 3
4

L The screen above shows when "DTMF Dialing" (1) is set to "Enable."

1 DTMF Dialing  2 Permissible Tone Gap  3 OFF-hook Detect Timer  4 ON-hook Detect Timer 

Select "Enable" to use DTMF signaling. If enabled, set the details in the timer.

(Default: Disable)

Set the period of time to detect that the last digit has been input. (Default: 5)
· Range: 1 ~ 10 (seconds) L Applied only when a 1 digit number is set to the OFF-hook settings in the
Special Number screen.

Set the period of time to detect the ON-hook control signal. (Default: 400)
· Range: 0 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) L Applied only when a 1 digit number is set to the OFF-hook settings in the
Special Number screen.

Select the period of time to detect the ON-hook control signal. (Default: 400)
· Range: 0 ~ 2000 (milliseconds)

13-69
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge
 PTT Control Setting
The VOX (voice operated transmission) function automatically switches the connected transceiver to transmit, when the RoIP gateway receives an audio signal to the Converter Bridge connection destination device.

1 2 3 4

1 Attack Time  2 Release Time  3 Voice Delay  4 VOX Threshold 

Enter the TX delay time.

(Default: 50)

· Range: 5 ~ 500 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

· After the continuous signal for the set period of time is received from a SIP

phone, the transceiver controller starts to transmit.

Select the RX delay time.

(Default: 500)

· Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

This is the delay time for the VOX to turn OFF, after no audio signal is

received through the network.

Set the audio signal buffer time to prevent intermittent audio. (Default: 200)
· Range: 0 ~ 500 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps The voice delay is the amount of time the RoIP gateway stores the transmitted audio to prevent missing the first part of the speech.

Set the voice threshold level.

(Default: 40)

· Range: 0 ~ 100 (%)

The VOX function automatically switches between receive and transmit

according to this threshold level. The lower values make the VOX

function more sensitive to the voice input.

13-70
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge
 Call Initiation Setting
The VOX (voice operated transmission) function automatically switches the connected transceiver to receive, when the RoIP gateway receives the audio signal from the bridge connection destination device.

1 2 3 4

1 Attack Time  2 Release Time  3 Voice Delay  4 VOX Threshold 

Enter the TX attack time. It is the delay time before the VOX switch turns ON after an audio signal is received through the network.
(Default: 1000) · Range: 5 ~ 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

Select the RX delay time in 5 millisecond step. It is the delay time for

the VOX switch to turn OFF after no audio signal is received through

the network.

(Default: 200)

· Range: 5 to 2000 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

Set the audio signal buffer time to prevent intermittent audio. (Default: 5)
· Range: 0 ~ 500 (milliseconds) in 5 millisecond steps

Set the voice threshold level. The audio signal is output to the network

according to this threshold level.

(Default: 70)

· Range: 0 ~ 100 (%)

L The lower values make the VOX function more sensitive to the voice input.

13-71
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge
 Notice Tone on the Telephone
Sets the details on the notification to SIP phones when a call has arrived on a Converter Bridge port of the RoIP gateway.
1 2 3

1 Connection Success  2 PTT Monitoring  3 Notice Tone Volume 

Select a Notice Tone to notify a SIP phone that a call has arrived on the

transceiver controller, and the SIP phone is ready to transmit.

(Default: Notice Tone 1)

· Not used:

Does not send a Notice Tone

· Notice Tone 1 ~ 3: Sends the selected Notice Tone

Select a Notice Tone to alert you to switch receiving and transmitting.

(Default: Not used)

· Not used:

Does not send a Notice Tone

· Notice Tone 1 ~ 3: Sends the selected Notice Tone

Set the volume level of the Notice Tones (1 ~ 2). · Range: 12 (minimum) ~ +6 (maximum) (dB)

(Default: 0)

13-72
https://manual-hub.com/

13 PBX EXTENSION

Converter Bridge screen
PBX Extension > Converter Bridge
 Release Timer
Sets the timers for canceling or disconnecting a call.

1 2
3
4 5

1 Call Cancel Timer  2 No Voice Release Timer  3 Forced Disconnect Timer 4 <Apply>  5 <Reset> 

Enter the period of time to cancel the call. When the set time has passed without a response from the SIP phone, the call is canceled.
(Default: 15) · Range: 0 (OFF) or 5 ~ 60 (seconds)

Enter the period of time to stop transmitting. When the set time has passed with no audio signal, transmitting is stopped.
(Default: 15) · Range: 0 (OFF) or 5 ~ 600 (seconds)

Enter the period of time to be forcibly stop transmitting. When

the set time has passed, transmitting is stopped, even when the

communication is ongoing.

(Default: 10)

· Range: 0 (OFF) or 5 ~ 120 (minutes)

Click to apply the setting.

Click to reset the setting. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

13-73
https://manual-hub.com/

PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Section 14

Advanced Settings screen ...................................................................................................... 14-2 M SIP Settings .................................................................................................................. 14-2 M VoIP Settings ............................................................................................................... 14-4
Prioritization screen ............................................................................................................... 14-11 M EXT Output Port Prioritization .......................................................................................... 14-11 M Caller Prioritization ......................................................................................................... 14-12 M List of Caller Prioritization Entries....................................................................................... 14-14
Numbering Plan screen ......................................................................................................... 14-15 M Phone Number Routing Settings ....................................................................................... 14-15 M List of Phone Number Routing Settings .............................................................................. 14-16 M Exception Outbound Phone Number ................................................................................. 14-17 M Outbound Phone Number Reformatting Settings .................................................................. 14-18 M List of Outbound Phone Number Reformatting Settings ......................................................... 14-19 M Outbound Call Restriction Rule Settings .............................................................................. 14-20 M List of Outbound Call Restriction Rule Settings ..................................................................... 14-21
Outside Line Regulation screen................................................................................................ 14-22 M Outside Line Regulation................................................................................................... 14-22
External Call Limiting screen ................................................................................................... 14-23 M Overall Limitation............................................................................................................ 14-23 M Limitation for each Outside Line ....................................................................................... 14-24
IP Authenticated Extension screen .......................................................................................... 14-25 M IP Authenticated Extension (Pre-registered Extension) ......................................................... 14-25 M List of IP Authenticated Extension .................................................................................... 14-26
Caller Number Reformatting screen .......................................................................................... 14-27 M Source Line Settings ...................................................................................................... 14-27 M Caller Number Reformatting Settings ................................................................................. 14-28 M List of Caller Number Reformatting Settings ........................................................................ 14-29
DID screen........................................................................................................................... 14-30 M DID Allocation ............................................................................................................... 14-30 M DID Settings .................................................................................................................. 14-31 M List of DID settings ......................................................................................................... 14-32
14-1
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Advanced Settings screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Advanvanced Settings
 SIP Settings
The common settings for the terminals to the RoIP gateway.

1
2 3 4 5 6 7

1 Extension Domain  2 SIP 183 Support  3 Relay SIP Response 

You can enter a SIP service domain name of up to 63 characters, to commonly use between the local SIP server and its client SIP phones.
(Default: LAN IP address) L Enter a unique Extension Domain in an IP telephone network. The IP
address of the RoIP gateway is recommended for your Extension Domain name to prevent a conflict in domain names. L Enter this value in the "SIP service domain" setting in the client telephone settings.

Enable this option if you want to use the 183 Session Progress. (Default: Disable)
The 183 Session Progress response indicates that information about the call state is present in the message body media information (SDP). L When this option is enabled, the 183 session progress is transferred to a
client SIP phone.

Set whether or not to relay an error message received from an

upstream SIP server when a call is outgoing.

(Default: Enable)

· Enable: Relays an error response (4xx ~ 6xx) from the SIP server.

· Disable: Translates an error response (4xx ~ 6xx) into a 486 response and

relays it.

L Enable this setting if you want to use a slide outgoing function by connecting

another SIP server to this RoIP gateway as a simple relay client device.

14-2
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Advanced Settings screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Advanvanced Settings
 SIP Settings
1
2 3 4 5 6 7

4 Relay Internal Response 
5 Caller ID Relay on Call Forwarding 
6 Preferred Inbound Call Setting 
7 Use Letters for Phone Number 

Set whether or not to relay an error message received from a client SIP

phone, when a call is incoming.

(Default: Disable)

· Enable: Relays an error response (4xx ~ 6xx) from the SIP phone.

· Disable: Translates an error response (4xx ~ 6xx) into a 486 response and

relays it.

Set whether or not to relay the original caller number of a forwarded call

by using the Blind Transfer function.

(Default: Relay)

· Not relay:

Your number is shown at the forwarded destination.

· Relay: The original caller number is shown at the forwarded destination.

Set which line to consider when the SIP URI of an incoming call over the IP line conflicts with the SIP URI of a Peer to Peer line.
(Default: IP Line)

If allowed, you can enter letters as a phone number. (Default: Inhibit)

14-3
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Advanced Settings screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Advanvanced Settings
 VoIP Settings
Sets the audio quality for SIP phones. The setting items vary, depending on the TOS Type. TOS Type: Not Used

1

2

3

6 7

TOS Type: TOS

1 2 3 4
5
6 7

TOS Type: Diffserv

1 2 3 4
5 6 7

L The screens above show when the Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static"

1 Buffering Type 

Select the jitter buffer used to reduce speech break up due to packet

fluctuations.

(Default: Dynamic)

· Static: Buffers receive voice data for a set period of time in the Receive

Buffer Size (2).

· Dynamic: Buffering time of the received voice data varies, according to the

packet fluctuation status.

14-4
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Advanced Settings screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Advanvanced Settings  VoIP Settings
TOS Type: Not Used

1

2

3

6 7

TOS Type: TOS

1 2 3 4
5
6 7

TOS Type: Diffserv

1 2 3 4
5 6 7

L The screens above show when the Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static"

2 Receive Buffer Size 

Displayed only when Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static." Set the period of time to buffer the received voice data. (Default: 40) · Range: 20 ~ 1000 (milliseconds) L The shorter the time you set, the less the delay, however the more the sound
will be interrupted.

14-5
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Advanced Settings screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Advanvanced Settings  VoIP Settings
TOS Type: Not Used

1

2

3

6 7

TOS Type: TOS

1 2 3 4
5
6 7

TOS Type: Diffserv

1 2 3 4
5 6 7

L The screens above show when the Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static"

3 TOS Type 

Set TOS Type.

(Default: TOS)

· Not Used: Does not use the TOS function.

· TOS:

Outputs the VoIP packet to the TOS field (8 bit) in the IP header, in

the TOS (Type Of Service) format.

L TOS format applies RFC1349.
· The first 3 bits: Shows the priority. Set into "Media (RTP) Priority Level" (4) with a decimal
number.

· The next 4 bits: Shows the service type. Set into "Media (RTP) Service Type" (4) with a decimal number. The larger number, the higher priority.

· The last 1 bits: Reserved and fixed to "0."

14-6

https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Advanced Settings screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Advanvanced Settings  VoIP Settings
TOS Type: Not Used

1

2

3

6 7

TOS Type: TOS

1 2 3 4
5
6 7

TOS Type: Diffserv

1 2 3 4
5
L The screens above show when the Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static"

6 7

3 TOS Type (Continued) 

Diffserv: Outputs the VoIP packet to the TOS field (8 bit) in the IP header, in the Diffserv (Differentiated Service) format.
L The Diffserv format details: · The former 6 bits: Shows the DSCP. Set "Media (RTP) DSCP" (4) with a decimal number. The larger number, the higher priority.
· The next 2 bits: Reserved and fixed to "0."

14-7
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Advanced Settings screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Advanvanced Settings  VoIP Settings
TOS Type: Not Used

1

2

3

6 7

TOS Type: TOS

1 2 3 4
5
6 7

TOS Type: Diffserv

1 2 3 4
5 6 7

L The screens above show when the Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static"

4 Media (RTP) 

Setting the Priority details for the TOS or Diffserv format options.

· Priority Level: Set the value of the priority level for TOS. Range: 0 ~ 7 (in decimal)

(Default: 7)

· Service Type: Set the value of the service type for TOS. Range: 0 ~15 (in decimal)

(Default: 0)

· DSCP:

Set the value of DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) for

Diffserv.

(Default: 56)

Range: 0 ~ 63 (in decimal)

14-8
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Advanced Settings screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Advanvanced Settings  VoIP Settings
TOS Type: Not Used

1

2

3

6 7

TOS Type: TOS

1 2 3 4
5
6 7

TOS Type: Diffserv

1 2 3 4
5 6 7

L The screens above show when the Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static"

5 Signaling (SIP) 

Setting the Priority options for VoIP packets that are output to the TOS

field.

· Priority Level: Set the value of the priority level for TOS.

(Default: 6)

Range: 0 ~ 7 (in decimal)

The larger number, the higher priority.

· Service Type: Set the value of the service type for TOS. Range: 0 ~15 (in decimal)

(Default: 0)

· DSCP:

Set the value of DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point)

for Diffserv.

(Default: 48)

Range: 0 ~ 63 (in decimal)

14-9
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Advanced Settings screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Advanvanced Settings  VoIP Settings
TOS Type: Not Used

1

2

3

6 7

TOS Type: TOS

1 2 3 4
5
6 7

TOS Type: Diffserv

1 2 3 4
5 6 7

L The screens above show when the Buffering Type (1) is set to "Static"

6 <Apply>  7 <Reset> 

Click to apply the setting.
Click to reset the setting. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

14-10
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Prioritization screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Prioritization
 EXT Output Port Prioritization
Set the priority of incoming calls from SIP phones or external devices.
1 2
3 4

1 From Other Ports  2 From Own Input Port 
3 <Apply>  4 <Reset> 

Set the priority of Incoming calls arrived at other ports than the EXT/IO

(1 ~ 4) ports.

(Default: Normal)

· Options: Normal, Priority, or High Priority

Set the priority of Incoming calls from the devices those are connected to the EXT/IO (1 ~ 4) ports on this RoIP Gateway. (Default: Normal) This setting is only valid when EXT I/O mode is set to "Separate mode." · Options: Normal, Priority, or High Priority

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the entries. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

14-11
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Prioritization screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Prioritization
 Caller Prioritization
Set the priority of incoming calls from SIP phones or external devices. When a call from the specified SIP phone has arrived while you are talking on another call, the RoIP gateway terminates the current call to catch the arrived call. The priority of calls from other than the specified SIP phone depends on the Priority level (5)
Called via: SIP Server

1

2

3

4

5

7 8

Called via: Peer to Peer
1 2 3 6 5

7 8

1 Index  2 Name  3 Called via 
4 Phone Number 

Select a number. · Range: 1 ~20
Enter a caller's name of up to 31 characters.
Select the line type of an incoming call. · SIP Server: Through an IP line. · Peer to Peer: Peer to Peer
Displayed when Called via (3) is set to "SIP Server." Enter a caller's Phone Number of up to 31 digits.

14-12
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Prioritization screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Prioritization  Caller Prioritization
Called via: SIP Server
1 2 3 4 5
Called via: Peer to Peer
1 2 3 6 5

7 8 7 8

5 Priority Level 
6 SIP URI  7 <Add>  8 <Reset> 

Set the priority of the destination.

(Default: Normal)

· Options: Normal, Priority, or High Priority

L When a call from the prior IP phone has been arrived while you are talking

on another call, the current call is terminated and a Ring Tone will ring to

alert you a prior call is incoming.

When a call from the same priority as the current call, the current request will

stay connected.

L An emergency call has priority over all other calls.

Displayed when Called via (3) is set to "Peer to Peer." Enter the caller's SIP URI of up to 63 characters.

Click to add the entries.

Click to reset the entries. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

14-13
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Prioritization screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Prioritization
 List of Caller Prioritization Entries
The list of the entries into the Caller Prioritization.

1 2 3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete>  3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit an entry.
Click to delete an entry.
Click to delete all the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

14-14
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Numbering Plan screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Numbering Plan
 Phone Number Routing Settings
Set the Routing rules.

1

2

3

4

5

1 Index  2 Prefix 
3 Outbound Phone Number 4 Outbound IP Line  5 <Add> 

Enter an index number of the Routing rule up to 400 entries.
Enter a Prefix of the phone number of up to 7 digits. The entered prefix will be deleted when the RoIP gateway dials outbound using the Outbound IP Line (4). L You can also set the prefix of the phone number in the "External Call Routing
Number" (PBX > Special Number > External Call Routing Number)
Enter the specified phone number of up to 15 digits. When a phone number that starts with the specified number is dialed, the RoIP gateway will call outbound using the Outbound IP Line (4).
Select from the phone numbers that are entered in the "IP Line" screen.
Click to add the entry.

14-15
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Numbering Plan screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Numbering Plan
 List of Phone Number Routing Settings
Displays the list of entries into the Phone Number Routing Settings.
1 2 3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete>  3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit an entry.
Click to delete an entry.
Click to delete all the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

14-16
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Numbering Plan screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Numbering Plan
 Exception Outbound Phone Number
Enter external phone numbers to exclude from applying Outbound Call Restriction Rule or Phone Number Reformatting rule.

1 2 3

1 Outbound Phone Numbers the following rules are not applied Enter up to 5 special numbers. When an external phone number, that starts with either of these numbers, is dialed, the digits of the special number are excluded from applying the Outbound Call Restriction Rule or Phone Number Reformatting rule.

2 <Apply> 

Click to apply the entries.

3 <Reset> 

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

14-17
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Numbering Plan screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Numbering Plan
 Outbound Phone Number Reformatting Settings
Enter external phone numbers that apply or do not apply the phone number reformatting rules. The Reformatting rules are applied only for outbound calls.

3

4

5

1

2

6

1 Index  2 Reformat 
3 Outbound Phone Number
4 Delete Digits  5 Added Number  6 <Add> 

Enter the order for Number Reformatting operation. · Range: 1 ~ 100

Set whether or not to reformat the dialed number if a matched number

is dialed.

(Default: Apply)

· Apply: Reformats the number according to the rule.

· Exception: Does not reformat the number.

L The "Exception" rules has priority over the "Apply'' rules.

Enter the beginning of a outbound phone number of up to 15 digits. When an outbound phone number that starts with the specified number is dialed, the RoIP gateway applies the Number Reformatting.
(Default: Blank)

Enter a number of digits if you want to delete specified digits at the

beginning of the dialed number.

(Default: Don't delete)

· Range: Don't delete, or 1 ~ 15

Enter a number that you want to add at the beginning of the dialed

number of up to 15 digits.

(Default: Blank)

Click to add the entries.

Number Reformatting examples:

 Example 1

· Outbound Phone Number (3): 987

· Delete Digits (4) :

Don't Delete

· Added Number (5) :

800

Dialed number:

98765432

Reformatted to:

80098765432

 Example 2

· Outbound Phone Number (3):0006

· Delete Digits (4) :

3

· Added Number (5) :

800987

Dialed number:

00065432

Reformatted to:

80098765432

14-18
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS
Numbering Plan screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Numbering Plan
 List of Outbound Phone Number Reformatting Settings
The list of entered rules into Outbound Phone Number Reformatting Settings.
1 2

3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete>  3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit an entry.
Click to delete an entry.
Click to delete all the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

14-19
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS
Numbering Plan screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Numbering Plan
 Outbound Call Restriction Rule Settings
Enter destination phone numbers to restrict or to apply to call. 1 2
3

1 Rule Index 
2 Restricted Phone Numbers 3 Exceptions to the
Restricted Phone Numbers

You can set restriction rules to each Extension Group (PBX > Extension

Group.)

Select a group to apply the restriction rules.

(Default: Common)

· Common: Applies all the groups.

· 1 ~ 16: Applies individual groups.

Click <Add> to add the entered rule to the List of Extension Group Entries.

Enter external phone numbers of up to 15 digits to restrict to outbound

calls when the dialed number matches them.

(Default: Blank)

You can enter up to 20 numbers to each Rule Index (1).

Enter external phone numbers of up to 15 digits to apply to outbound

calls when the dialed number matches them.

(Default: Blank)

You can enter up to 20 numbers to each Rule Index (1).

14-20
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Numbering Plan screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Numbering Plan
 List of Outbound Call Restriction Rule Settings
The list of entered rules into Outbound Call Restriction Rule Settings.

1 2 3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete>  3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit an entry.
Click to delete an entry.
Click to delete all the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

14-21
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Outside Line Regulation screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Outside Line Regulation
 Outside Line Regulation
Set the External line. The outbound call management rules can be applied to this setting.

1

2

3 4

1 Call Restriction 
2 Number Reformatting  3 <Apply>  4 <Reset> 

Restricts outbound calls for the selected phone line (number).

(Default: Disable)

· Disable:

Does not restrict outbound calls.

· Call Restriction Rule 1 ~ 16: Restricts outbound calls according to the

selected rule that is set in "Outbound Call

Restriction Rule Settings" in addition to the

"Call Restriction" setting in the "Telephone

Common Settings".

· External Call Restriction: Restricts outbound calls, excluding Peer to

Peer calls.

Set whether or not to reformat dialed number.

(Default: Disable)

If enabled, dialed external numbers are reformatted, according to the

rules set in "Outbound Phone Number Reformatting Settings." (PBX

Advanced Settings > Numbering Plan > List of Outbound Phone

Number Reformatting Settings)

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

14-22
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

External Call Limiting screen
PBX Advanced Settings > External Call Limiting
 Overall Limitation
Set the limit number of the usable outside lines (phone numbers) simultaneously, according to the whole lines connected to the RoIP gateway.

1 2 3

1 Maximum Number of Simultaneous calls on the whole Outside Lines

Set the maximum number of external lines that can simultaneously

make. If more calls are inbound or outbound than the value of this

setting, they will be busy.

(Default: 50)

· Range: 1 ~ 50

2 Maximum Number of Simultaneous calls on the Priority Outside Lines Set the maximum number of lines to reserved for priority calls. (Default: 0)
· Range: 0 ~ 50 L The number of Normal Outside Lines (non-priority lines) is the value
obtained by subtracting the number of Priority Outside Line from the total number of external lines.

3 Simultaneous Ringing Restriction 

Leave as default for the normal use.

You can temporarily restrict incoming calls when there is a

concentration of incoming calls.

(Default: Enable)

14-23
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

External Call Limiting screen
PBX Advanced Settings > External Call Limiting
 Limitation for each Outside Line
Set the limitation and prioritization settings for each outside line (phone number).

1 2

3

4

5 6

1 Outside Line Phone Number 2 Line  3 Multiple Call Limitation 
4 Prioritization 
5 <Apply>  6 <Reset> 

Displays the phone numbers in "List of SIP Server Entries."

Displays the type of phone line.

Sets the maximum number of calls you can simultaneously make on

the phone line.

(Default: No limit)

· Range: No limit, or 1 ~ 50

Select the Prioritization of the line. Priority Outside Line means

reserved for priority calls.

(Default: Normal Outside Line)

L The number of Normal Outside Lines (non-priority lines) is the value

obtained by subtracting the number of Priority Outside Line from the total

number of external phone lines.

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

14-24
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

IP Authenticated Extension screen
PBX Advanced Settings > IP Authenticated Extension
 IP Authenticated Extension (Pre-registered Extension)
Setting for the gateway connection of the RoIP gateway. L This settings are for only the special system environment. Leave as default for the normal use.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 9

1 Extension Number 2 Activation Status 
3 Accept Multiple SIP Clients 4 SIP Client Identifier  5 Use Domain to
Call the SIP Client 
6 SIP Client Authenticated IP Address 
7 SIP Domain 
8 <Apply>  9 <Reset> 

Select an Extension number to use the gateway connection.

Enables the Gateway Connection function of the RoIP gateway.

If enabled, an extension can communicate without registering to the

RoIP gateway under the special condition.

(Default: Inactive)

Enables to use the multiple gateway connections. (Default: Disable)

Select how to identify the SIP Client. · Options: SIP URI or Display Name

(Default: SIP URI)

Set whether or not to use a specified domain to make a call through the

gateway connection.

(Default: OFF)

When using the IP address of this RoIP gateway, set this item to "OFF."

Enter the IP address of the target device when you use the gateway connections.
Enter the domain name of up to 63 characters or the IP address of the target device, that are used to authenticate the caller through the gateway connection.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

14-25
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS
IP Authenticated Extension screen
PBX Advanced Settings > IP Authenticated Extension
 List of IP Authenticated Extension
The list of entered IP Authenticated Extension. · Select an Extension Number in the "IP Authenticated Extension (Pre-registered Extension)" to edit the entry.
14-26
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Caller Number Reformatting screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Caller Number Reformatting
 Source Line Settings
Set the rules to reformatting Caller IDs of incoming call. 1
2 3

1 Reformatting 
2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

Set whether or not to reformat for each Caller Number. (Default: Disabled)
L The "Extension" rule is applied for incoming call from extensions that are registered to the same SIP server (VE-PG4).
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

14-27
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

Caller Number Reformatting screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Caller Number Reformatting
 Caller Number Reformatting Settings
Set the Caller IDs that are applied the reformatting rules.

1

2

3

4

5 6

1 Index  2 Reformat 
3 Phone Number  4 Delete Digits  5 Added Number  6 <Add> 

Enter the order for the Caller Number Reformatting operation. · Range: 1 ~ 100

Set the whether or not to reformat the Caller Number if a matched

number is received.

(Default: Apply)

· Apply: Reformats the number according to the rule.

· Exception: Does not reformat the number.

L The "Exception" rules are prior to the "Apply'' rules.

Enter the number of up to 15 digits.

(Default: Blank)

When the entered number matches at the begining of the Caller

Number, the reformatting rule is applied.

Enter a number of digits if you want to delete specified digits at the

beginning of the Caller Number.

(Default: Don't delete)

· Range: Don't delete, or 1 ~ 15

Enter a number if you want to add up to 15 digits to the beginning of the

Caller Number.

(Default: Blank)

Click to add the entries.

Number Reformatting examples:  Example 1
· Phone Number (3): 987 · Delete Digits (4) : Don't Delete · Added Number (5) : 800
Caller Number: 98765432
Reformatted to: 80098765432

 Example 2 · Phone Number (3): 0006 · Delete Digits (4) : 3 · Added Number (5) : 800987
Caller Number: 00065432
Reformatted to: 80098765432
14-28
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS
Caller Number Reformatting screen
PBX Advanced Settings > Caller Number Reformatting
 List of Caller Number Reformatting Settings
The list of entered Caller Number Reformatting Settings.
1 2

3

1 <Edit>  2 <Delete>  3 <Delete All> 

Click to edit an entry.
Click to delete an entry.
Click to delete all the entries. L You cannot restore after clicking <Delete All>.

14-29
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS
DID screen
PBX Advanced Settings > DID
 DID Allocation

DID Allocation 

Set the DID you use for External lines.

(Default: Don't Select)

· Range: Don't Select or DID 1 ~ 10

L When selecting a DID, the IP line number (phone number) that is entered in

the SIP Server Entries is displayed.

L When selecting a DID, the "Connect to" is set to the selected DID.

14-30
https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS

DID screen
PBX Advanced Settings > DID
 DID Settings
Sets the details when using the DID (Direct Inward Dialing) function.

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
L The above screen shows when Action (4) is set to "Call Default Destination."

1 Index  2 Response Time  3 Dial Tone  4 Action 
5 Default Call Destination Number 
6 Timer 
7 <Apply>  8 <Reset> 

Select a DID that you want to edit its settings.

(Default: DID 1)

Set the delay time to sound a Dial Tone (3) since an inbound call has

arrived.

(Default: 4)

· Range: 0 ~ 10 (seconds)

Selects the tone pattern that sounds on an IP phone. (Default: Type 1) · Options: Type 1 ~ 3

Select the timeout action of the RoIP gateway when the particular

period of time (6) has passed without receiving any DTMF signal.

(Default: Clear Down)

· Clear Down:

Cancels the call without calling the client

transceiver.

· Call Default Destination: Makes a call to the Default Call Destination

Number (5).

Displayed only when Action (4) is set to "Call Default Destination." Set the Destination phone number.

Enter the time period for timeout timer.

(Default: 10)

· Range: 0 ~ 120 (seconds)

L When setting this item to "0," the timeout timer does not work.

L The timer will be expired when a DTMF signal is detected.

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

About the DID operation After the set period of time in Timer (6) has passed without any operation since starting the Dial Tone, the DID starts the Action (4). L You can immediately dial by pushing "#" without waiting for 5 seconds of digit interval timer. L When dialing an incomplete phone number that does not include a DID number, the call will be canceled after the
Busy Tone sounds.
14-31

https://manual-hub.com/

14 PBX ADVANCED SETTINGS
DID screen
PBX Advanced Settings > DID
 List of DID settings
Displays the DID list.
L When a DID is set, the IP line setting in Inbound Call is changed to DID. (PBX > Inbound Call)
14-32
https://manual-hub.com/

MANAGEMENT

Section 15

Administrator screen ............................................................................................................ 15-2 M Administrator Password ................................................................................................... 15-2
Management Tools screen ...................................................................................................... 15-3 M USB ........................................................................................................................... 15-3 M HTTP/HTTPS ............................................................................................................... 15-5 M If you cannot access the setting screen .............................................................................. 15-6 M Telnet/SSH .................................................................................................................. 15-7 M Unit ID Confirmation ...................................................................................................... 15-8
Date and Time screen ............................................................................................................ 15-9 M Date and Time ............................................................................................................... 15-9 M Time Zone..................................................................................................................... 15-10 M NTP ........................................................................................................................... 15-11 M SNTP Server ............................................................................................................... 15-12
SYSLOG screen .................................................................................................................. 15-13 M SYSLOG ..................................................................................................................... 15-13
SNMP screen ..................................................................................................................... 15-14 M SNMP ........................................................................................................................ 15-14
Network Test screen ............................................................................................................ 15-15 M Ping Test ..................................................................................................................... 15-15 M Traceroute Test ............................................................................................................ 15-16
Management LTE Module screen ............................................................................................. 15-17 M Management LTE Network ............................................................................................. 15-17
Reboot screen ..................................................................................................................... 15-18 M Reboot ........................................................................................................................ 15-18
Settings Backup/Restore screen ............................................................................................. 15-19 M Settings Backup ............................................................................................................ 15-19 M Settings Restore ............................................................................................................ 15-19 M List of Settings ............................................................................................................... 15-20
Factory Defaults screen ......................................................................................................... 15-21 M Factory Defaults ............................................................................................................ 15-21
Firmware Update screen......................................................................................................... 15-22 M Firmware Status ............................................................................................................ 15-22 M Online Update ............................................................................................................... 15-23 M Automatic Update ......................................................................................................... 15-24 M Manual Update ............................................................................................................ 15-24
15-1
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT
Administrator screen
Management > Administrator
 Administrator Password
Set a password for accessing the setting screen.
1 2 3 4

5 6

1 Username 2 Current Password  3 New Password  4 New Password (Confirm) 5 <Apply>  6 <Reset> 

Displays the administrator login ID ("admin"). L You cannot change the Username.

Enter the current password, when you change it.

(Default: admin)

L The entered characters are displayed as an * (asterisk) or a · (dot).

Enter a new password of up to 31 characters. L The entered characters are displayed as an * (asterisk) or a · (dot).

Enter the new password again.

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

CAUTION: If you have forgotten the password, you cannot access the RoIP Gateway's setting screen. In this case, you have to initialize the RoIP Gateway. See the Section 5 of the Installation guide for details.
To prevent unauthorized access You must be careful when choosing your password. A good policy is to occasionally change it. · Choose one that is not easy to guess. · Use numbers, characters, and letters (both upper and lower case).
15-2
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Management Tools screen
Management > Management Tools
 USB
Settings for USB flash drives that will be connected to the USB ports.

1 2 3 4 1 USB Flash Drive 
2 USB Access Permission 
3 USB Authentication Key 

Select "Enable" to use a USB flash drive.

(Default: Enable)

L If you use the Automatic firmware update function, or Automatic Setting Load

function, select "Enable."

Select the USB flash drive access option. (Default: M Firmware Update M Settings Backup/Restore)
· Firmware Update (p.15-22) · Settings Backup/Restore (p.15-19)

Enter a USB Authentication Key of up to 64 characters to import to and export from the USB flash drive.

L This Key can restrict access to the Firmware Update function and Settings Backup/Restore function.
L After entering the characters, click <Apply> in the Management Tools. L If you set the USB Authentication Key, the RoIP Gateway can verify the USB
authentication key written in the USB flash drive.

15-3
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Management Tools screen
Management > Management Tools  USB

1 2 3 4
4Write USB Authentication Key

Click to write the USB Authentication Key to the USB flash drive that is inserted in the [USB] port. Click <Write>, then continue as shown below.
If you have inserted a flash drive in which an authentication key is already saved, "An authentication key already exists on the USB flash drive. If you want to overwrite the key, click the "Next" button." is displayed.

When the "The USB Authentication Key has been changed. Write the key after saving it by pushing the Apply button." window is displayed, click <OK> and then click <Apply> in the Management Tools screen.

15-4
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Management Tools screen
Management > Management Tools
 HTTP/HTTPS
HTTP and HTTPS are the protocols to access from a web browser. L When you set HTTP settings and HTTPS settings to "Enable," you can not access the setting screen using a browser.

1 2 3 4

1 HTTP  2 HTTP Port 3 HTTPS  4 HTTPS Port 

Select whether to allow access using the HTTP protocol. (Default: Enable)

Enter the HTTP Port number · Range: 80, or 1024 ~ 65535. · Some of the RoIP Gateway's ports cannot access HTTP. L Enter a different port number from HTTPS, Telnet or SSH.

(Default: 80)

Select whether to allow access using the HTTP protocol. (Default: Disable)
L HTTPS access is more secure than Telnet or HTTP access because the passwords and data are encrypted.

Enter the HTTPS Port number. · Range: 443, or 1024 ~ 65535. · Some the RoIP Gateway's ports cannot access HTTPS. L Enter a port number different from HTTP, Telnet or SSH.

(Default: 443)

15-5
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT
Management Tools screen
Management > Management Tools
 If you cannot access the setting screen
Access Telnet or SSH (Example:192.168.0.1). · See the INSTALLATION GUIDE Section 6 for details. · Set to default, the RoIP Gateway can not be accessed from a Telnet client because the Telnet setting is set to "Disable."(Management > Management Tools > Telnet/SSH > Telnet) (See page 15-7.)
After entering "VE-PG4>," enter the letters written in bold as follows, and then press [Enter]. 1. Enter "network http enabled on," and then press [Enter]. 2. Enter "save," and then press [Enter]. · The setting is applied. 3. Check if you can access the setting screen.
15-6
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Management Tools screen
Management > Management Tools
 Telnet/SSH
Set for accessing the RoIP Gateway using Telnet or SSH.

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Telnet  2 Telnet Port  3 SSH  4 SSH Authentication Method
5 SSH Port  6 SSH Public Key 

Select whether or not to allow access to the RoIP Gateway using Telnet. (Default: Disable)

Enter the Telnet Port number.

(Default: 23)

· Range: 23, or between 1024 and 65535.

· Some the RoIP Gateway's ports cannot access Telnet.

L Enter a different port number different than HTTP, HTTPS, or SSH.

Select whether to allow to access by the SSH protocol. (Default: Enable) L By using SSH, you can encrypt the contents to be set using the SSH client
program. L This product supports only the SSH protocol Version 2. L Prepare an SSH client to use SSH.

Select the SSH Authentication Method to access the RoIP Gateway

when you set SSH Settings to "Enable."

(Default: Automatic)

· Password:

Authenticating with the password.

· Public Key:

Authenticating with the Public Key.

· Automatic:

Automatically authenticating with the password or the

Public Key.

Enter the Telnet Port number.

(Default: 22)

· Range: 22, or between 1024 and 65535.

· Some of the RoIP Gateway's ports cannot access SSH.

L Enter a port number that is different from HTTP, Telnet, or HTTPS.

Set the Public Key for accessing. L Displayed only when the SSH setting is set to "Enable" and SSH
Authentication Method is set to "Public" or "Automatic."

15-7
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Management Tools screen
Management > Management Tools
 Unit ID Confirmation
You can know which VE-PG4 is the current RoIP Gateway by the blinking lights on it.

1

2

3 4

1 Check Status  2 Confirmation State 
3 <Apply>  4 <Reset> 

Display the status of the Unit ID.

· Checking:

Checking the Unit ID and [PWR] blinks red.

· Stop:

Does not check.

Click <Start> to start checking. · [PWR] blinks red. · While checking, the <Start> button changes to the <Stop> button. · This function automatically stops in 2 minutes, but you can also manually stop
the check by clicking <Stop>.

Click to apply the entries set on the Management Tool screen.

Click to reset the settings, when you change the settings on the "Management Tools" screen. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

15-8
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Date and Time screen
Management > Date and Time
 Date and Time
You can set the RoIP Gateway internal clock time. (See Section 3 for details.)

1 Current Time  2 Manually Set Time 
3 <Set> 

1 2
3
Displays the current time.
Displays the time when you opened this screen. L Refresh the browser screen to refresh the time.
Click to set the internal clock to the time displayed in the "Manually Set Time"(2). L Before clicking <Set>, refresh the browser screen.

15-9
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Date and Time screen
Management > Date and Time
 Time Zone
Select the appropriate Time Zone.

1 2

1 Time Zone  2 Use Daylight Savings Time

Select the appropriate Time Zone.

(Default: UTC)

Select "Disable" if not necessary.

(Default: Enable)

L If "Enable" is selected, the RoIP Gateway automatically adjusts the time according to your time zone.
L If Daylight Savings Time is not used in your area, set to "Disable."

15-10
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Date and Time screen
Management > Date and Time
 NTP
The Automatic Clock Synchronize function automatically synchronizes the internal clock with the time server (NTP). L To use this function, an Internet connection and default gateway settings are necessary.

1 2 3 4

1 NTP Client 
2 NTP Server 1  3 NTP Server 2  4 Status 

Select whether or not to use the Automatic Clock Synchronize function. (Default: Disable)
· Disable: Not used. · NTP: Set to the internal clock automatically by accessing the NTP. · LTE: Set to the internal clock automatically by accessing the LTE Module.
Enter the time management server's IP address. (Default: 210.173.160.27)
If the RoIP Gateway cannot access this address, the address set in the [NTP Server 2] (3) item is used.
Enter the second time management server's IP address. (Default: 210.173.160.57)
Displays the status whether or not to synchronize with the NTP Server or the transceiver module.

CAUTION: When you select NTP Client as NTP, you must set the Interface for the NTP server. (Network Settings > IP Address > IP Address > Default Gateway) (Network Settings > Static Routing > Static Routing)
TIP: The Automatic Clock Synchronize function When you connect to the SIM card, · Set the Automatic Clock Synchronize function to LTE, to synchronize the current time to the transceiver
module. · Set the Automatic Clock Synchronize function to NTP, to synchronize the current time to the NTP server. · After inserting the SIM card, the RoIP Gateway is automatically set to the Automatic Clock Synchronize
function.

15-11
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Date and Time screen
Management > Date and Time
 SNTP Server
The SNTP server is for other RoIP devices that have no route to an external Time server (NTP). L To use this function, an Internet connection and default gateway settings are necessary.

1 2 3

1 SNTP Server 
2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

Select "Enable" to use the SNTP function.

(Default: Enable)

When you select `Enable', the RoIP devices function as an NTP server

and set the internal clock time of the RoIP Gateway.

L This function can be used only for Icom RoIP devices, which cannot set the

route to the external NTP server.

L Set the Date and Time screen before using this function.

Click to apply the entries set on Time Zone, NTP, and SNTP Server.

Click to reset the settings when you change the settings on Time Zone, NTP, and SNTP Server. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

15-12
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

SYSLOG screen
Management > SYSLOG
 SYSLOG
Select the information to be saved to the SYSLOG host.
1 2 3 4

5 6

1 DEBUG  2 INFO  3 NOTICE  4 Host IP Address  5 <Apply>  6 <Reset> 

Select "Enable" to display the debug information in Host IP Address (4). (Default: Disable)
Select "Enable" to display the INFO messages in Host IP Address (4). (Default: Enable)
Select "Enable" to display the NOTICE messages in Host IP Address (4). (Default: Enable)
Enter the SYSLOG host's address. L The host device must have the SYSLOG server function.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

15-13
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

SNMP screen
Management > SNMP
 SNMP
Configure the SNMP function, that is information on the RoIP Gateway for being collected by each host in the IP network for their network management.

1

2

3

4

5 6

1 SNMP
2 Community Name (GET) 
3 System Location  4 System Contact  5 <Apply>  6 <Reset> 

Select "Enable" to manage the setting information in the SNMP

management tool.

(Default: Enable)

Enter the Community name to get the SNMP community string. (Up to

31 characters)

(Default: public)

Enter the SNMP system location. (Up to 127 characters)

Enter the SNMP system contact. (Up to 127 characters)

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

15-14
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Network Test screen
Management > Network Test
 Ping Test
Verifies that a particular IP address exists and can accept requests.

1 2 3 4
5

1 Host  2 Number of Times  3 Packet Size  4 Timeout
5 <Ping> 

Enter the IP address or Domain Name of up to 64 characters to send the Ping packets to.

Select the number of times to send. · Options: 1, 2, 4, 8

(Default: 4)

Select the size of the packet's data.

(Default: 64)

· Options: 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1448, 1500, 2048 (bytes)

Select the Ping response time.

(Default: 1000)

Note: If there is no response within the selected time, a time out error is

returned.

· Options: 500, 1000, 5000 (milliseconds)

Click to run the Ping test. L The test result is displayed as shown below.

L Click <Save> to save the result to a PC as a text file (extension: "txt"). Note: The file is saved as "ping_host's address.txt."
L Click <Back> to return to the Ping Test screen.

15-15
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Network Test screen
Management > Network Test
 Traceroute Test
Executes a tracerout test against a particular node.

1

2

3

4

5

1 Node  2 Maximum Hop Count  3 Timeout
4 DNS Lookup  5 <Traceroute> 

Enter the node's (device's) IP address or Domain Name of up to 64 characters.

Select the maximum hop number. · Options: 4, 8, 16, 32

(Default: 16)

Select the response time.

(Default: 3)

Note: If there is no response within the selected time, a time out error is

returned.

· Options: 1, 3, 5 (seconds)

Select "Enable" to convert the node's (device's) IP address into the host

name. (DNS name resolution)

(Default: Enable)

Click to run the traceroute test.

· The test result is displayed as shown below.

· Click to save the result to a PC as a text file (extension: "txt"). · The file is saved as "tracert_node's address.txt." · Click <Back> to return to the Traceroute Test screen.

15-16
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT
Management LTE Module screen
Management > Management LTE Module
 Management LTE Network
The settings and status for connecting to a LTE netowrk.

1 2

3

4

5 6

1 Network Selection 
2 Network Search  3 Network Operator  4 RSSI Level  5 <Apply>  6 <Reset> 

Set to automatically select the LTE Network, select the last accessed,

or enable the User to select.

(Default: Auto)

· Auto:

Automatically selects the network that the LTE module can

connect to. LTE is selected prior to 3G if both of them are

usable.

· Last accessed:

When turning on the RoIP Gateway, the same connection way as before is attempted. If the previous LTE Network Operator (PLMN) is not saved, `Auto' is selected, and saves the LTE Network Operator (PLMN) when the network is able to connect. L The RoIP Gateway works as the same way as the
"Auto" setting, if it could not connect to the last accessed LTE Network Operator (PLMN.)

· User select:

You can select the network from LTE or 3G after searching. If the selected network cannot be found, the RoIP Gateway cannot connect to the network.

If you select "User select," the Network Search setting is displayed. Click <Search>, and <OK> on the displayed dialog, to display the list of the LTE Network Operators (PLMN) that this RoIP Gateway can connect to. L Loading may take a few minutes or more.

Displays the connected LTE Network Operator (PLMN).

Displays the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) level (dBm).

Click to apply the entries.

Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

15-17
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT
Reboot screen
Management > Reboot
 Reboot
Click <Reboot> to reboot the RoIP Gateway.
15-18
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT
Settings Backup/Restore screen
Management > Settings Backup/Restore
 Settings Backup
Save the RoIP Gateway's settings to a PC as a backup.

Save to File 

Click <Backup> to save the settings to a PC as a backup file (Extension: sav). See the topic below to load the saved file into the RoIP Gateway.

Management > Settings Backup/Restore
 Settings Restore
Load the setting file (Extension: "sav") into the RoIP Gateway. Note: Loading takes a few minutes.

1 2

1 Load Settings File  2 Restore 

Click <Browse> to select the setting file.
Click <Restore> to load the setting into the RoIP Gateway. Notes: · The RoIP Gateway's settings are overwritten. · After loading, the RoIP Gateway automatically reboots. Caution: Do not modify the settings other than the VE-PG4.

15-19
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT
Settings Backup/Restore screen
Management > Settings Backup/Restore screen
 List of Settings
Displays the changed settings. Note: The list is cleared when the RoIP Gateway is initialized.
(This is only an example.)
15-20
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Factory Defaults screen
Management > Factory Defaults
 Factory Defaults
You can reload the RoIP Gateway settings to the factory defaults. L If you forget the IP address and the Administrator's password, see Section 5 in the Installation guide.

1 2
3

1 All Settings 
2 V/RoIP Settings  3 Restore 

Select to return all settings to the factory defaults. L After the RoIP Gateway is initialized, the IP address is returned to the default
(192.168.0.1). L If the network part of the PC IP address is different from that of the RoIP
Gateway, you cannot access the RoIP Gateway setting screen. In such case, change the PC IP address according to your network environment.
Select to return the settings to the factory defaults except for the Network Settings, the Router Settings, and the Management Settings.
Click to restore the settings.

15-21
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT
Firmware Update screen
Management > Firmware Update NOTE: · NEVER turn OFF the power until the update has been completed. Otherwise, the RoIP Gateway may be
damaged. · While updating, all connections are disconnected L Ask your dealer for updated function or specification details.
 Firmware Status
Displays the firmware version.
15-22
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT
Firmware Update screen
Management > Firmware Update
 Online Update
Downloads the firmware through the Internet, and automatically updates it. NOTE: To use this function, an Internet connection, or LTE(4G/3G) is required.

Check for Updates 

Click <Check> to access the update management server. When the RoIP Gateway has successfully accessed the server, the latest firmware version is displayed, as shown below.

About the firmware information: · When there is a new firmware update available, the <Update Firmware>
button is displayed. · When there is no firmware update, "Firmware already up-to-date" is
displayed. · When an error message is displayed, check the network connection so that
you can access the update management server, as follows:
When a SIM card is installed: · Confirm that the antennas are attached properly to the [ANT1] and [ANT2]
connectors. When a SIM card is not installed: · Confirm that the default gateway and DNS server address are properly set
to the RoIP Gateway. (Network Settings > IP Address) · Ask your network administrator if a web transmission from the RoIP
Gateway is blocked.

CAUTION: Do not turn OFF the power until the firmware update is completed. L Ask your dealer for updated function or specification details.
15-23
https://manual-hub.com/

15 MANAGEMENT

Firmware Update screen
Management > Firmware Update
 Automatic Update
The firmware can be automatically downloaded and updated. L When a SIM card is inserted, the Automatic Update Setting is not displayed.

1

2 3

1 Automatic Update 
2 <Apply>  3 <Reset> 

Select "Enable" to use the Automatic Update function. (Default: Enable) L Select "Disable" if you do not want to automatically update the firmware.
Click to apply the entries.
Click to reset the settings. L You cannot reset after clicking <Apply>.

 Manual Update
The firmware can be updated using the saved firmware.

1 2
1 Select the update file 
2 Firmware Update 

Click <Browse...> to select the firmware file (extension: "dat"). L The selected file appears in the "Update Firmware using File" item.
Click <Update> to update the firmware. Note: After updating, the RoIP Gateway automatically reboots.

CAUTION: Do not turn OFF the power until the firmware update is completed. L Ask your dealer for updated function or specification details.
15-24
https://manual-hub.com/

A7487-4EX-1 © 2019 Icom Inc. May 2019

1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan
https://manual-hub.com/
	ICOM IC-SAT100M Network Setting Guide This guide provides instructions for configuring network settings for the ICOM IC-SAT100M Satellite PTT device using the EX-4241 utility. It covers system requirements, software installation, PC connection, network device connection, and integration with the VE-PG4 RoIP Gateway.
	Icom VE-PG3/4 to Portable Radio Cable Connection Guide Detailed guide and diagram for creating a connection cable between Icom VE-PG3/VE-PG4 units and Icom portable radios, including pin assignments and connector part numbers.
	Icom Professional Radio Solutions: IP, LTE, Satellite, WLAN, Digital & Analog Radios Explore Icom's comprehensive range of professional two-way radio communication systems, including IP, LTE, Satellite PTT, WLAN, IDAS digital, and analog radios, designed for reliable business communication.
	ICOM OPC-2389 Connection Cable Instructions Detailed instructions for connecting the ICOM OPC-2389 serial communication cable to VE-PG3 and VE-PG4 devices, including connector replacement guidance and wire assignments.
	Icom HM-169, HM-184, HM-170GP, HM-171GP Series: Waterproof Speaker Microphone User Guide Explore the features, specifications, and operating instructions for Icom's HM-169, HM-184, HM-170GP, and HM-171GP series waterproof and GPS speaker microphones. Learn about their robust design, audio quality, and GPS capabilities for reliable communication.
	Icom IC-7200 Advanced Instructions: HF/50 MHz Transceiver Guide Explore the features and operations of the Icom IC-7200 HF/50 MHz transceiver with this comprehensive advanced instruction manual. Learn about panel descriptions, basic operations, and advanced functions.
	Icom OPC-2218LU USB Data Cable: Instructions and Specifications User guide for the Icom OPC-2218LU USB data cable, covering setup, system requirements, safety precautions, FCC/CE compliance, and disposal. Essential for connecting Icom transceivers to PCs for data cloning.
	Icom IC-7800 Instruction Manual: Your Guide to Advanced Amateur Radio Discover the features and operation of the Icom IC-7800 amateur HF/50 MHz transceiver with this comprehensive instruction manual. Learn about installation, panel descriptions, basic and advanced operations, and maintenance from Icom.
References

Related Documents
